Highlight Words

Attitude - Gratitude

Q:

What should I study or do to stop being self-centered? When selling I realize I have to give without concern of getting in return but it’s only an intellectual understanding. How do I live it?

A:

That’s a good question. You live it … first of all I’d recommend you start being very grateful for what you’ve got. Write down 10 things you’re grateful for every morning. Really develop an attitude of gratitude. And then realize that there’s been a lot of people that have put a lot of energy into you getting all the good things that you’ve got.

You’re going to realize that no one does anything on their own. If you just study what I’ve done you may say you must be so much of a dynamo. No. I’ve got a lot of people to help me. Really good people who really care. You’re going to do that by not being so self-centered. Focus on other people. How can I make them feel better about themselves?

I think Dale Carnegie had a good concept. Visualize MMFI printed on people’s foreheads. When you go to work with them see MMFI printed in big bold letters on their forehead. That means Make Me Feel Important. You focus on making them feel important. That’ll get your mind off yourself.

Billy Graham once said, “The smallest package in the world is the person that’s all wrapped up in themselves. People that are most successful are the ones that really care about other people”.

Q:

I’ve been making a lot of investments but I haven’t been doing the work. It’s like I have been opposed to making investments after coming from a scarcity mindset. I see myself being frustrated chasing goals because I’m not doing the things I invested into. What should I do?

A:

Well, change your attitude and get busy. You see your attitude is your thoughts, feelings and actions. It’s the composite of thoughts, feelings, and actions. Sounds like you’re thinking but you’re not doing, or you may be thinking and feeling but not doing. Get them all lined up. That’s called integrity. When what you say and what you feel and what you do are all the same. Give it everything you got.

Q:

Why is attitude called the magic word? Could you please go into that more for me?

A:

Well Earl Nightingale called it the magic word and I think he’s right. Attitude magically makes things happen. Attitude is the foundation of everything. Change your attitude and whatever you’re looking at changes. It’s like magic. Second – when you change your attitude your outside world looks different. That’s like magic. When you change your attitude what you’re looking at looks different. Wayne Dyer used to say that all the time. Attitude is thoughts, feelings, and actions. It is magic!

Q:

How can one explain gratitude to a three year old so they can practice it every day the way I do?

A:

You’ve got the answer for it. The only thing a child does not have that you have is experience and vocabulary. Keep that in mind. But you can talk to the three year old child the same as you can talk to me. The only thing they lack is words, proper vocabulary, and experience.

Q:

What can I do when a relative has a negative attitude? How can I handle it without having an argument?

A:

Well understand it’s their attitude, you can’t change their attitude, but you can change your perception of what they’re saying. Just don’t let it affect you. There’s a difference between respond and react. When they’re negative and you react you let their negative attitude control yours. When you respond you’re not letting their attitude control you.

Q:

I am 58 years old. I was raised in a hard working, but poor family. It is extremely difficult for me to change my paradigms. Am I too old to start changing them and become successful?

A:

I was 58 twenty-six years ago and I’m working at changing mine. I’ll be 84 in July and I think I’m just getting warmed up. That’s not too old. Forget your age. How old would you be if you forgot your age? Forget about the hard working family. Don’t live from your history, live from your imagination, like I just quoted Steve Cubby.

Your family wasn’t poor, they probably just didn’t have a lot of money. They were probably rich in other areas, so you want to have all that good stuff come to you. “It is extremely difficult to change my paradigm.” Don’t say that. Say I’m so happy and grateful now that I am improving everything I do every day. I’m talking about little things like pick up your socks, cut your nails, comb your hair. Little things. Things you’re putting off now, stop putting them off.

And you’re not too old for… my goodness. You know that medical science is moving is you’re probably only half way there. Change your attitude. Get the attitude going right, thoughts, feelings, and actions. Start to think how young you are compared to me. You’re just a kid, for goodness sake.

Q:

Every morning I email myself with 10 things that I’m happy and grateful for. I love doing this. I want to know if you think that typing out my gratitude is less effective than hand writing it.

A:

No, I don’t think so. I think the hand writing is very effective but the typing is probably very effective and that’s fine. The fact that you’re doing it, you’re bringing your mind to bear on what you’re grateful for, that connection to your source of supply is a magnificent habit.

Q:

I have been writing my daily gratitude exercise with the left hand for six plus months but I feel that meditation works better for me. Should I change this habit?

A:

Well listen, that isn’t comparable to meditation. Meditation, you will benefit greatly from because meditation gets your whole system in harmony with spirit or with the law. The writing with your left hand is showing you that you can actually alter a paradigm. The paradigm is nothing but a multitude of ideas that are fixed in your subconscious mind that you automatically act on. You automatically signed your name with one hand. Now, you put the pen in the other hand and I said, “I’m going to train my other hand to do this.” Well, what that’s proving is that you can change a paradigm. You can change your habitual way of living. And if a person really wants to multiply their income, improve their relationships, build their business, they’ve got to change their paradigm. And it’s true the repetition of doing something that you haven’t done before that creates the new paradigm.

Like let’s suppose a person sleeps in every morning and they say, “I’m not going to do that anymore. I’m going to get up early.” And so, they reprogram themselves. When they wake up they get up. And they’re reprogrammed to do this. Pretty soon they don’t sleep in anymore. They’ve changed that program. Well, it’s the same thinking about how money’s earned. Most people never learn how to earn money. You earn money by providing service. Most people think you go to work. You don’t go to work to earn money you go to work for satisfaction. You provide service to earn money. So, it’s changing our habitual perception of life and how we’re living it. That’s what the writing with the other hand is doing. The meditation is a good program. It’s a good habit. I’ve been doing it for many years and it puts your whole being in a calm state.

Q:

What are your morning and evening rituals?

A:

My morning ritual is the … I always start out with the gratitude, I meditate, and I study for an hour, or the better part of an hour, sometimes more. I started out at 4:30, quarter to 5:00 this morning. I usually don’t start till 5:00, 5:30. And I always study first thing. I don’t have a ritual in the evening, in the morning.

Q:

I have invested in the Science of Getting Rich program. I am enjoying it and learning a ton. What is the best way to utilize the program for ultimate results?

A:

I would study every day chapter five … No, chapter 4, 14, and 7 in that order. Everything, you study the program in any kind of an organized manner you want, but every day take 4, 14, and 7 and study those three. Four puts you in control. 14 elevates everyone with an impression of increase, and number seven is gratitude.

Q:

I seem to intimidate more than influence. I am confident with myself because I have been told I am handsome my entire life, but I am not arrogant. How do I influence people instead of intimidating them?

A:

If you think you’re intimidating them, that’s probably the attitude you’ve got. Change your attitude. From the attitude you want to help people. Quit thinking of yourself, just think of them.

Books - Audios - Videos

Q:

What are the top five books you have read on selling?

A:

Well, one of the best books for selling and for mental expansion is You Squared by Price Prichett. And another on selling, How I Raised Myself from Failure to Success in Selling by Frank Bettger. It’s a phenomenal book, just read those two and study them and do what they say.

Q:

Do you use any speed reading technique for reading a book?

A:

I don’t now. I used to. I studied many different speed readings. Edwin Woods had one. I stopped speed reading and now I may read the same page a 100 times. I may read the same pages. I’ve got about 12 pages here I’ve been reading for three months. I read now to understand. I want to understand what the author is saying. I’m not in a hurry to finish a book. I don’t care if I ever finish the book. No amount of reading or memorizing is going to make you successful, see understanding and application that makes the difference.

Q:

How do you stay focused on the belief of prosperity in the present moment? When the bills need to be opened and paid, how can we manage these thoughts?

A:

Listen, I’ll be the first to tell you that’s not an easy thing to do, but it’s something you’ve got to do. If you go in to Born Rich into the second chapter, I talk about a debt repayment program. You’ve got to get the debts into an orderly state and maybe pay more than you should be paying to do this. You get your debts into an orderly state, and then you focus on prosperity. You can be saving money. You can be focusing on prosperity while you’re heavily in debt if you set up an orderly debt repayment program. And it’s all outlined in the second chapter, How Much is Enough in Born Rich. Get it and do it.

Q:

What are your thoughts on new rave of online dating? Women are left crushed and desperate for men who disappear after one interaction. Is this a paradigm?

A:

I don’t think all women are. Some maybe. Just because somebody doesn’t want to go, you shouldn’t be left crushed and desperate. I think that’s more of a self-image problem than a dating problem. I’d really get the book Psycho Cybernetics by Dr. Maxwell Maltz. It’s a classic. It’s a great book. Study that.

Q:

What is the best thing I can do to get things done on time and stay on track?

A:

Go online and look for a book, The Technique of Getting Things Done by Donald and Elanor Laird. Now, this is an old book, so it’ll be out of print, but you can get it, you’ll find it: The Technique of Getting Things Done by Donald and Elanor Laird. It is one of the best books I have ever read. And I remember when I was reading it I thought, “Where in the name of goodness did they get all of this information? They must have ate an encyclopedia.” On the next page it says, “You’re probably wondering where we got all this information. We have read an entire set of encyclopedias.” They write this. This is in the book.

But they wrote marvelous books, the Technique books. The Technique of Getting Things Done was one of them. It helped me enormously. And I’ll tell you one thing I learned from it. There’s some things you don’t have to do. You think you have to get them done. You don’t have to get them done at all. They’ll get done through neglect. They don’t have to be done. You’re conning yourself telling you you’ve got to do these things. Some of the things you’ve got listed that are piling up in your mind you’re not doing, they don’t have to be done. Other things, they do have to be done. So start asking yourself, “How important is it that this get done?”

Now, I’ll tell you what to do. Every night write down four, five or six things that are goal-achieving activities. They get priority. All the other things, they come after that the next day. Goal-achieving activities always get priority. But some of the stuff you think you have to do, you don’t have to do at all. And you just make up your mind you’re going to become really good at getting things done.

When you start something, finish it. When you start it, finish. Don’t say, “I’m going to put it off.” Don’t say, “I’ll do it later.” If you start it, finish it. You become very disciplined in your mind. See, I’m a very disciplined guy. I get a lot done. If anybody followed me around they’d go, “Whew, how do you do it all?”

Well, people that do it, they just make up their mind they’re going to become super effective. I’m a very productive guy. I take pride in being a very productive guy. Productivity increases your amplitude of vibration in so far as attracting money is concerned. You are a more valuable person.

Q:

How do you determine what is positive and what is negative? And isn’t it possible that something could be negative for one person and positive for another?

A:

That’s exactly right. Nothing’s positive or negative except your thinking makes it so. Everything just is, that’s it. You make it what it is. Nothing is big or small.

What’s big to one person is small to another. It’s neither big nor small, it just is. We make it what it is.

Ralph Waldo Trine wrote a great book, “In Tune with the Infinite.” I have a classic copy here in a little box. “In Tune with the Infinite,” Ralph Waldo Trine. And he points out there nothing is good or bad except our thinking makes it so. It’s a very well written book, “In Tune with the Infinite,” Ralph Waldo Trine.

Q:

The house of my dreams is my goal and I see it but very far away. I look at my bank account and I see it even further away. What can I do to eliminate my negative thoughts and beliefs so that I can achieve my goal sooner?

A:

Quit letting your bank account, other people or past results dictate how soon it’s going to take you to reach your goal. If you don’t own it already, get the book, “You 2,” this is what it looks like. “You 2.” You with a red 2. It’s by Price Pritchett. If you’re in North America, the phone number is 800-992-5922, or it’s pritchettnet.com.

Q:

On Saturday my phone app for the Secret stated, “When you need money it is a powerful feeling with you, and so of course through the law of attraction you will continue to attract needing money.” I have lived most of my life this way, needing money. Can you please explain how it looks to not need money?

A:

That’s great. It’s really a good way to live. Don’t think of needing money, love it. But understand you got to get it in its right place. Money is something you use. Don’t let it use you. Money is something that you use, you do not let it use you. You love people and use money. Don’t get that reversed. Most people love money and use people. When I say love it, feel comfortable with it, feel very comfortable with it. Stop thinking that you need it. You want it. Wanting it is a normal thing.

Want comes right from the center of our being, that’s our spiritual essence of who we are, spiritual DNA is perfect.

Well, spiritual DNA wants to express itself in a greater way. Start to see yourself. Do you know the strange thing? All the books on money that teach you how to earn money very rarely talk about money. It’s all about consciousness. It’s developing a prosperity consciousness. Get into “The Science of Getting Rich,” I got a copy sitting right here on my desk, “The Science of Getting Rich.” Getting into “Think and Grow Rich.” Get into Catherine Ponder’s book … “Dynamic Laws of Prosperity.” There’s all kinds of books.

Start to see it. Don’t think lack and limitation, think prosperity. See yourself with it. Get yourself a $100 bill and put a bunch of paper in behind it and wrap it with … Look it. There, there’s a $100 bill. I’ve got a paper clip with it. I had something like this and it had all kinds of false paper behind it so I had a wad of money in my pocket and that’s what I did. And your subconscious mind doesn’t know. You just feel all that money in your pocket. When you start impressing that upon your subconscious mind people say, “That’s silly.” Well, it worked for me. Helped me earn millions of dollars and I didn’t have a whole lot of the gray matter working at the time. It works.

Start to see yourself with it. Don’t think you need it. Think you got it. See yourself already in possession of it. Go visit nice places. When you go out for lunch, go to a real good restaurant, leave a good tip. If they’ve got valet parking, use the valet. Don’t park the car yourself. When you go to clothes stores, go to the best clothes stores. Pick out the garments you’d like to wear. You don’t have to buy any of them. If you haven’t got any money, just go shopping there mentally. But go into the place. Get into a prosperous environment mentally.

Q:

The first, once you’ve completed 90 days of reading a chapter, do you simply stop and move on to another or is it better to keep reading the material but less regularly?

A:

I’ve got a chapter here. Let me read this to you.

“To enter into the spirit of anything then is to make yourself one in thought with the creative principle,” that’s what we were talking about with the visualizing. “Making yourself one in thought with the creative principle. That is at the center of it, and therefore why not go into the center of all things at once and enter into the spirit of life? You ask where to find it, in yourself. And in proportion you find it there you will find it everywhere else.” Get into the spirit of it. Spirit is the essence of it. It’s complete, it’s done. Get into the spirit of it.”

I may just read for 90 days and I may go on and read it for another 90 days. See, it isn’t how often you read it and it isn’t how much you read or what you read. It’s your understanding and application that makes the difference. Here, look, I’ve been reading this book every day, I’ve got an elastic around it to keep it closed because it falls apart. I’ve been reading this every day since the 21 of October, 1961. That was probably before your parents were born. Every day.

How do I read it? I just take the elastic off and boom, I’ll open it. I’ll open it right here.

A publisher of books that would sell for a nickel made a discovery. They should be worth much to publishers generally. He learned that many people buy titles and not contents of books. By merely changing the name of one book that was not moving, his sales of that book jumped upward more than a million copies.

Hell, I know somebody that did that. Zig Ziglar had a book, “See You at the Top,” it was in multiple languages. He’s gone now, God bless him, but Zig helped a lot of people. “See You at the Top” was translated into many languages and sold millions of copies. But it sat around for a long time, nobody bought copies when it was titled, “Fleas, Biscuits and Pump Handles.” That was the name of the book, “Fleas, Biscuits and Pump Handles.”

You say, “Why in the name of goodness would anybody name it that?” Well, there was three stories in the book. Fleas, and he tells a story about you take fleas and put them in a jar and put a lid on the top of the jar and the fleas will come up and hit the lid of the jar. After a while you can take the lid off and the fleas will never go beyond where the lid was and they’ll stay in the jar. We’re much like fleas, that’s the way we live, most of us. That was the story about the fleas.

The biscuits, he tells a story about his mother making biscuits and forgot to put the yeast in. The yeast is what raises the dough. The biscuits come out very flat. So he put that idea across.

And then the pump handles, he talked about people trying to pump water out of a well. He said, “If you’re going to get water out of a well, you got to put some into it first.” That’s called priming the pump. So you pour some water in and then you start pumping and you’ll get water out. That was the idea but it didn’t sell books.

When he changed it to “See You at the Top,” I remember going into my office way back in the early 70s, and I had a letter from him in a big envelope and he had about four or five designs, “See You at the Top.” He asked me to mark the one I like best and send it back to him, which I did. He probably did that with a number of people and then that was the title of the new book. But the new book was the old book, “Fleas, Biscuits and Pump Handles.”

Now, I just pick it up anywhere and I’ll read for a little while. I’ll usually read longer than I read that. It’s understanding and application.

Q:

What video or audio should I repeat daily multiple times?

A:

For the doubt and worry. On our YouTube channel, type in “Eliminate fear from your life” to find the video.

Q:

I had a TIR client ask me why would someone have to deal with slavery or the Holocaust where their environments were so extreme and conditions were extremely difficult to escape. Bob, would you say that changing their paradigm could really help them out of something that was pervasive systematic problem like being a black person during slave times or a Jewish in the Holocaust?

A:

You know what I would recommend to do, anybody that’s really wants to know the answer to this, I’d recommend that they read Man’s Search for Meaning by Viktor Frankl. You can’t change what’s going on or what has gone on, but you can change your understanding and your perception of it. Viktor Frankl was a Jewish psychiatrist from Vienna, spent the years in a concentration camp, and he said that regardless of the intellectual or physical abuse he was subjected to, no one could cause him to think something he didn’t want him to think. It’s a wonderful book.

Q:

What are the five best books you’ve ever read, and you consider are a guide for living?

A:

Think and Grow Rich by Napoleon Hill, Power of Awareness also includes Awakened Imagination by Neville Goddard, You Squared by Price Pritchett, As a Man Thinketh by James Allen, and Your Invisible Power by Genevieve Behrend. There you go.

Career and MSI

Q:

What must an individual do to develop will and focus in order to create successful work and avoid distractions?

A:

The will is a mental faculty. It’s like perception, reason, imagination. It’s one of our higher faculties and it’s what separates us from our pets. You develop it.

First of all, the will is the tool you use for concentration. The average individual, if they could concentrate for more than two seconds, they would probably set a family record. I recommend that a person take the opposite chair they sit in most often at home and on the wall opposite that chair, where no one else is seated, put a dot on the wall with your pen. Then, whenever you’re sitting in that chair, concentrate on that dot.

Every time you find your mind wandering, bring it back to the dot. Don’t be distraught about your mind wandering – just bring your concentration back to the dot.

Another exercise would be to take a candle that’s in a candle holder and put it opposite your favorite chair. Light the candle and focus on the flame. Whenever you find your mind wandering, bring it back to the flame. Note that your mind will wander. However, practice this exercise for quite some time, and you will learn to concentrate on one thing.

By learning to concentrate (on anything) you are actually strengthening the will. If you see the will as a mental muscle and think of it as if you’re developing the muscles in your arm by lifting dumbbells for a period of time every day, and if you do that often enough and long enough and through enough repetitions, you’re going to develop very, very powerfully strong muscles in your arm. Exactly the same concept with the mind, but it’s got to be done frequently, religiously and repetitiously.

Q:

My persistent desire is to be a philanthropist. I feel there is a lot of money to donate through this. Does this count as a goal if I clarify and envision it?

A:

Yeah, listen, philanthropy is giving, start with what you’ve got and give. You don’t have to give a lot, give a little. If you haven’t got any money, give up your time, give a smile, but start to see yourself as a philanthropist. I’ve been a philanthropist for a long time. I was a philanthropist when I didn’t have any money. Don’t see philanthropy as something, where you’ve got to be a billionaire or a multi-millionaire, something like that. Philanthropy is a philosophy. It’s a concept that I would suggest you adopt and incorporate into your life. If spirit tells me to give, I even give to some of these hobos on the street periodically, not often because I think most of them should be working, but every now and then, spirit says, “Give them something.” I may give them a 100 bucks. I’m a big tipper. I like seeing the energy change in a person. Start giving, be a giver. Jane Willhite’s company, PSI seminars, they teach Givers Gain, I love that Givers Gain.

Let me expound further on this. I wouldn’t see philanthropy as a goal. I see philanthropy as a self-image. I see philanthropy as a way of life. I don’t think it’s something you work towards. I think it’s something you are. Be generous. I have a reputation of being a generous person. Generosity is a wonderful thing, it’s giving. Willingly give and graciously receive. My mentor Val Van De Wall taught me that.

Q:

If you were selling your services for personal training, what approach would you take if someone is more dominant from the right side of the brain, the creative side than if they were left side dominant and more analytical?

A:

You’re getting too complicated. Just fall in love with helping the person. It’s how you present it. See, if you knew what I could do for you, I wouldn’t have to knock on your door, you’d come knocking on my door, hoping I would work with you. Forget about this right-brain, left-brain stuff.

You’re God’s highest form of creation, see yourself that way. If you want to get into right brain, left brain concepts down the road that’s okay, but get really good at this. Fall in love with the idea of helping people and that’s where you are. You don’t give it, you sell it. Selling is doing something for people, not to them.

Q:

Jeff is in real estate. Christine is in online coaching and Victor is an MLM. They all want to know what information you would give them on how to attract clients or get prospects. They want to know in detail the how to.

A:

Well, fall in love with the idea of helping people. Doesn’t matter who you’re with. Just start talking to them and say, “I have been studying, I met some really fascinating people.” Let’s suppose I’m talking to Jeff, I’d say, “You know Jeff, I have met some of the most fascinating people. I can teach you how to get anything you want. It’s the most fascinating information in the world. If you can have anything you want Jeff, what would that be? Your objective is is to get them talking about what they want. Well, I have some of the most fascinating information you’ll ever find. I’ve been studying it now for some time. This subject, should be taught in school. You can actually show a person how to get anything they want.

Now, I don’t have time to talk to you about it right now Jeff, but if you want to set up an appointment with me, I’ll make sure I get together with you and I will show you how to lay down a pattern, where you can actually accomplish anything you want. You know people who are not very bright yet they become very wealthy. You see other people who are very brilliant and they’re broke. Why is that? How is it that ordinary people can do extraordinary things? That’s what this is all about. I’d love to talk to you about it. When can I get together with you? You make them want it. Believe that you can help them get it. Your objective is to make an appointment where you sit down and you really got to fall in love with the idea of helping them. You’re not trying to make a sale. You’re trying to get them to think of what they want and convince them that you’re quite capable of showing them how to get it.

Q:

How can I really make more money?

A:

You can’t make money. The only people that make money either work in the mint or they’re on their way to jail if they haven’t already arrived. Everybody else earns money. You earn money by providing service. The more service you provide, the more money you’ll earn. We just read that the centerfield for the Los Angeles Angels baseball team is signing a contract for $430 million. Now, somebody’s thinking it’s the richest contract anybody in sports in America has ever signed. People are saying, “Well nobody’s worth that kind of money.” No, he is. Now, money is reward received for service rendered. He provides a lot of entertainment. Millions of people are watching every time he goes to bat, hoping he gets a hit or hoping he strikes out, depending where their head’s working. They visualize it. He’s entertaining a lot of people.
The money he receives is reward received for services rendered. He provides a lot of service. That’s why he’s getting a lot of money. A lot of people are tuned in, watching the Angels play, so they can see this guy. They say he’s the best player in baseball right now. Got to provide a lot of service if you want to earn more money. But you earn it, make no mistake about it – you earn it.

Q:

What would be the top six things you’d have your salespeople do daily and if you were to start a new network marketing business? What would be the top six things you would do daily?

A:

I would listen to the Attitude lessons from Lead the Field every day. If you don’t own Lead the Field, you should get it. You should invest in it and listen to it every day. I don’t care if you’re into Thinking into Results, the first message in the Lead the Field program is without question the most powerful thing in the world. Now, I do have salespeople and I’m going to tell you, I get a lot of them listening to Attitude. I have them listening to it twice a day. In fact, I was in the middle of a coaching call before I got on this call. One of our salespeople was just calling to check in. I got him to agree that he would call and check in on his way back from taking his daughter to school. Then, when he gets home, he turns on Attitude. Now, he’s already listened to Attitude before taking his daughter to school. This is a habitual routine that he’s getting involved in. That would be one of the top things I’d have them doing daily. Get in front of people, if you’re selling. Personal contact is the key to success. Personal contact is the key to success. Touch them, reach out and touch them.

Now, the six things, are goal achieving activities, not just six things. They’re goal achieving activities. You’ll come up with goal achieving activities.

Concerning network marketing, most people in network marketing talk about product all the time. Most network marketing companies have great products. The products have to move, no question about it, but what you’re doing in network marketing, you are building a system that products will flow through. You don’t have to focus on the product. First of all, the product has to be a good. I haven’t met a network marketing company that didn’t have a good product. You’ve got a good product. Focus on the people. Your objective is to build an organization. You’re looking for leaders. You’re looking for people that will follow direction and will bring people into the organization. You help them set goals. You help them get excited about their goal, where they’re going, what they’re doing. You are building an organization that product is going to flow through. You’re looking for good people. That’s how you build the organization.

Q:

My income has dropped to about 50%. I have a strong sense of peace because the universe is reshuffling my life. Now, I can focus more on exploring my true potential. Did you experience that?

A:

I have at different times experienced the same. If your income has dropped to about 50%, I would suggest you change it. I would raise it by at least a 150%. Take it where it’s never been and understand that you can. What you needed is time to rethink and reshuffle. That’s usually why that happens. Make up your mind, you’re not going to settle for staying there for any length of time. Just change it and change it very quickly.

Q:

Bob, you emphasize how long you have been studying this material and that you continue to study it. Is this to insinuate that you need a lot of years to make it work?

A:

Not at all. You see, I am helping you cut years off your learning curve. Now, I’m helping you because you are wise enough to hire me to help you. When you can hire somebody that knows this as well as I do and I’m very good at this. Now you wouldn’t want to hire me to fix your house. In fact, they don’t let me do anything around our house. In fact, I don’t do very many things around our company. I stick to what I am expert at. Stay at what you’re good at. You are benefiting from all years I’ve got, so I’m helping you cut all kinds of time off the learning curve. Napoleon Hill spent his whole life preparing to write that book. I got the book. I didn’t go through all the years he went through. That’s how we move ahead.

If we all moved at the same speed all the time, we’d still be on all fours. I’m studying because I have to, it’s a habit. Like an addiction. I just love studying. Well, I study because I want to grow and that’s what studying is for. I can teach you things that took me a long time to learn. You’re getting them in maybe an hour. But, I benefit too. I’m benefiting from other people learning. I picked up a book by Dr. Maxwell Maltz, The Search for Self- Respect. It’s an old book, it was written around 1970. I thought, “Wow.” I thought this book would be perfect for one of my friends so I bought the book for my friend to give him the book. I really love sharing with other people and help them to learn new material that will help them.

Why did I mention Maltz? Maltz was a cosmetic surgeon and he would operate on people, perhaps doing such surgeries as nose jobs for example. Perhaps the patient had a great, big nose. Maltz would operate on them and they would have a nice, neat little nose. He found sometimes that this really changed their whole personality. Other times, it didn’t make any change in them at all. This, he thought, was rather interesting. Sometimes he makes a physical change, and there’s a tremendous change in their personality, but other times, there was no change at all. That got him to postulate that we have an inner picture of our self. We not only have the reflection that comes back from the mirror, but we’ve got an inner image of our self. He wrote the book, Psycho-Cybernetics. Psycho-Cybernetics is the mind and it’s the science of control and communication in the mind.

Q:

In regards to Phil Goldfine, what were the exact instructions given to him at the beginning of his study with you that impacted his income and career? The specifics that I can employ in my career.

A:

It’s interesting that you ask that. Tomorrow I’m going to meet Phil in New York and we’re going to see Tootsie – it’s opening night. He’s on Broadway. You know that since 1930 there’s been 3,070 (I believe) Oscars handed out. There’s only been 26 people who have won an Oscar, an Emmy and a Tony. He has won an Oscar and an Emmy and it looks like he’s going to win a Tony for Tootsie on Broadway. The Oscar is for movies. The Emmy is for TV and the Tony’s are for Broadway. If he gets a Tony he’ll be the 27th person. It’s very rare that a producer or any person, really, would work in all three different areas.

What did I tell him? Well, there’s no really specific things that I told him. It depended on where he was and what he was doing. I would say if you want to solve that here’s how you do that and you’ve got to do this. It’s a repetition of something. I would tell him to read a book, read a chapter in the book every day for maybe 90 days. Same chapter. I suggested that he read it with someone. In other words, he’d start reading and then he’d read maybe 10 or 20 lines and he’s say, “Pass,” the other person would pick and have to pick up right then. That meant that the other person was reading along with him and he wasn’t just speaking the words.
But, whatever I tell him I would find out what’s going on in his life and I would say this is what you should do from this point. I remember once he told me that he had a movie, I think it was in Bulgaria, but the actor that was going to do it wouldn’t work there because of some nuclear plant nearby. I said, no, he’ll work there. You just see yourself shooting the movie. I said imagine that every day.

Well, then after the movie, he wanted to move there when they were shooting the movie. So, I’ve told him different things at different times depending on what was coming up in his life to determine what would be necessary. But, one thing that is absolutely necessary is the repetition of ideas. That’s something that the intellect just has difficulty accepting because we’re not taught to repeat… we’re taught to read something you read it once that’s it.

Well, that’s not it. You read it once you may get it intellectually but you haven’t changed anything on a subjective level. Goldfine is just a very excellent student. I’ve been working with him now for about 17 years. Everything I tell him he’ll do. So it works.

Q:

I am interested to know your process of when you first began studying this material and how you happened upon the cleaning business. Any challenges you faced and how did you overcome them?

A:

Well, the process … I really didn’t know very much of anything. I hadn’t gone to school. I never had a real career. I just had laboring jobs. I’d been in the Canadian Navy. So, I’d never excelled or done anything of any consequence and I was 26. The man that really got me on this tract, he told me something that I tell people if I work with them one on one, is you got to do exactly what I tell you until you find that I’m lying or until I don’t know what I’m talking about. But he said “I don’t lie and I do know what I’m talking about.”

Anyway, he told me to study Lead The Field. Well, I’ve got it on my desk. It’s always on my desk. It’s always with me. I’m going out on the road tomorrow I’ll be taking it with me. He said read it every day so I read it every day. I did what he told me to do. The really big win was I formed a habit of doing what the mentor or the coach was telling me to do. Now, I had five or six other people over the years that has mentored or coached me and I’ve always done exactly what they said.

One mentor I worked with was Ray Sanford. I was very, very selective about the people that I would work with. I would only choose people that had already succeeded at what I wanted to do. I chose the cleaning business because the first goal I had, Ray had me write a goal on a card, was to earn $25,000. Keep in mind that was in 1961. I was earning $4000 a year at the time and so I’m telling myself I want to have $25,000. That was like saying I wanted to take the next ride to the moon. It was totally out of the box. I really didn’t believe it would happen. He said you don’t have to believe it. Write it down if you want it. And if you keep reading it, he said you’re going to start to believe it. You can write a lie on a card and if you read it often enough you’ll start to believe it. When you start to believe it that’s when everything starts to move in the right direction.

Well, I heard someone say there was good money cleaning floors. I said I’m not proud – I’ll clean floors. Now, I had on this card that I was going to earn $25,000 so I kept reading the card. That got me thinking of earning money. Now, up until then all I thought about was my debt. If your goal is to get out of debt, you’ll probably stay in debt forever. That can’t be a goal. The goal should be for prosperity. One of the things you want to do is pay off your bills. I tell the people in second chapter of You Were Born Rich how to do that.

But, at any rate, this guy said there was good money cleaning floors so I said I’m not proud, I’ll clean floors and I started to clean offices. I had the person teach me how to clean offices and you really have to know what you’re doing. At the end of the first year I had my income up to $14,500 a month. I was only earning $4000 a year at the fire department. The chief was only earning $11,000 a year. I was earning more money than the chief was and then I eventually left and I started to expand the cleaning business. I went into different cities in the United States and then to England.

So, that’s really where it all started. I was in England and I was earning over a million dollars a year and I was trying to figure out what I had done that made me apparently so successful and I didn’t know what I had done. I just did what I had been told and I realized it took me nine and a half years to figure out what actually happened to me because I knew I wasn’t that smart. I’d been raised to believe that you have to be really smart if you’re going to earn a lot of money. I wasn’t that smart but I was earning a lot of money.

So, it took me nine and a half years and when I figured out why I changed and the process that I had followed, at that point all I wanted to do was teach it and that’s all I’ve done ever since. Now, I work in this business and I love it.

Q:

My C goal includes making a quantum leap professionally in the public sector and becoming a multi-millionaire. I have no plans as to how and what but would like to earn my six-figure annual salary net on a monthly basis. It seems my goal and vision statement refers to both goals and it feels odd to think about, as they would not coincide in reality if I was truly a multi-millionaire and pursuing the things I visualize. Is it okay to keep both goals and manifest both outcomes?

A:

Sure. You want to make a quantum leap professionally in the public sector. That’s how you’re going to become the multi-millionaire then. I don’t know what you’re doing, but I would recommend you seriously look at network marketing. I’m often asked what would I do if I were starting over. Now, keep in mind, I have a very mature business. I’ve been at it for 50 plus years.

I would go into network marketing because I’d be very careful where I went. Most companies have pretty good products so it’s not so much the company, it’s the person that you’re signing up with. Make certain that person is very successful in the business. Don’t just go with anybody because it’s like anything else, there’s a small percentage win in a big way.

But, network marketing enables you to earn multiple sources of income. If you want to become a multi-millionaire, that’s how you do it. Multiple sources of income. I would seriously investigate it.

Q:

Bob, you say in selling we should always focus on how much value we are adding to prospects through our product or service. If a customer is getting the desired outcome results through my company product as well as from a competition product also and the cost of my product is higher than the competition, then how do we convince the end user to buy my product even if it’s a little bit on the higher side?

For example: My company name is A. The competitor’s company is named B. The end user’s name is C. Both A and B offer a product or a service to C. Both A and B are the market leaders in their field. However, price of A is higher than B and both company services are a high standard. How do I convince end users C to buy my products? Do we have any recipes or tools or techniques to overcome such a situation?

A:

Absolutely. I charge more than other competing companies and the added value is me. You are the added value. They can only get you with the company they’re dealing with through you. You are the added value. There’s many people that will pay more to stay with the person they’re dealing with. You add such phenomenal service. Nobody can do what you do. You’re unique and you want to remember that. That’s the difference.

Q:

I know, Bob, you have surpassed Napoleon Hill in knowledge. Is there anything you disagree with in Think and Grow Rich?

A:

No, I don’t think so. I don’t know as I passed him in knowledge. I’ve studied it longer than him and I had the benefit of everything he studied to start with which is an enormous gift. But, I wouldn’t say I’ve surpassed him. I have no way of knowing that. I have nothing but the highest degree of respect for him and the work that he’s done and I have benefited from it and still do as of today.

Q:

I have left my job as a bookkeeper to have my own online business. I’m receiving negative responses from friends and family. What technique do you recommend to deal with those responses?

A:

Just laugh at them. Say, “Well, I want you to remember this. I would like you to write down what you’ve just told me and when I become super successful, I want you to take it out and read it because what I’m doing anybody can do. I am learning how to bring more of me to the party. I’m going to have my own online business and I’m going to be one successful individual. Trust me because I already am in my mind. It just hasn’t manifested yet.”

I remember one time I was working at Nightingale-Conant and I made up my mind I was going to leave there and was going to start doing what Earl did. I had a friend of mind that I had been a very good friend to him. He had worked with me in different places and he was working for me there. I phoned one day and I said what are you doing? He said, “I’m doing nothing just looking after the kids. The wife’s gone out somewhere.” So, I said could I come over and see you and he said sure. Now, this is a friend of mine. I made a recording. It was probably the worst production recording that anybody has ever made. It was god awful but it was the idea. I had made this recording, I ran over and I told him, I said, “I want you to listen to something,” and I turned it on.

Production of quality was horrible. It was on a little computer, little recorder and I had to snap it on and off and on and off as I was starting, no edits or anything. As it went on … Joel Goldsmith wrote a book called The Thunder of Silence. Well, I’m going to tell you I understood what that meant. The tension in the room became just ridiculous. He was so embarrassed he couldn’t look at me. He was embarrassed for me. He was thinking you got to be out of your mind to think you can do what you’re talking about.

Before it was finished I said well, it was just an idea and I turned the recorder off. I couldn’t get out of the house fast enough. My legs were long but they were actually not moving very fast physically. Mentally, I was rushing out of that place but physically I was moving very slow. I said well it was just an idea and I was making apologies and everything.

I’m driving home and I thought – wait a minute. I’m letting that guy steal my dream. I said, no way I’m going to do this. I am getting out there and I’m going to make it happen. I didn’t let him get to me. Don’t let them get to you. You go and you prove to them just what you’ve got and what you’re made of.

Q:

When selling, what is the opening sentence you say to a prospect over the phone? What do you say if they ask, “What will this do for me?”

A:

First of all, I’d start off by saying, “You don’t really know me, but I was given your name and would you mind if I asked you a few questions because your friend Bill thinks that what I’ve got you can really benefit from. But, if I could ask you a few questions maybe we could determine if Bill was right or not.” I’d start to ask you some questions about yourself.

I would want to find out how is this going to help you. Well, I’ve got to know something about you so I’d start asking questions about you. I’d say, “Some of the questions I may ask you may be personal and it’s not that I want to dig into anything that’s very confidential with you, but it’ll help me understand who you are and where you are and then I could determine maybe if what I’ve got could help you. How old are you?

Now, that’s just going to tell me how conditioned you may be in your way of thinking. She said, “Why you want to know?” I’d say, “I want to know how conditioned you might be in your way of thinking because what I’m talking about here could change your way of thinking and when you do that you change your life.”

You sell by asking questions. And when you’re asking questions you want to listen to understand. Don’t listen to hear. Listen to understand where they’re coming from.

Q:

When you first started the business, who was the first person you employed? Was it a sales person, a marketer, an accountant?

A:

The first person I employed was an assistant. I’m going to tell you I would tell anybody to do that. You can’t do anything of any consequence on your own. I have an assistant now she’s been with me for over 33 years, Gina Hayden. She is incredible. She is so phenomenal. She anticipates what I need and it’s done before I even mention I want it. But, I’ve worked with her for 33 years.

If I was starting a business, first thing I’d do is get an assistant. Otherwise, you’re going to have to do everything yourself.

Q:

What is the most effective approach in helping potential clients come up with the money to pay for TIR when they have committed but lack the funds. I have many people who love to work with me. The challenge in getting them signed up as a client in TIR seems to be the money. What would you suggest I do?

A:

I’d suggest your change your attitude about that. That’s not their problem at all. Lack of money is never a problem. They do not want it enough. I want you to think of everything you’ve got in your home or in your clothes closet or your wardrobe, or whatever. There’s all kinds of things there you don’t need. You got them because you want them.

When you want something bad enough you’ll always find the money for it. Remember I told you at the start how I started in the cleaning business? Well, the guy said, “There’s good money in cleaning offices,” but he said, “You’ve got to do it for yourself. Don’t clean for somebody else.” If I was working for somebody else at that time I would have gotten a dollar an hour. Working for myself I got between $10 and $20 an hour.

Now, he said, “You’re going to get some equipment. You’ve got to get a floor machine and some buckets and mops.” I didn’t have any money. I was earning $4000 a year but I owed $6000. So, if I paid what I owed, taken every cent I earned for 18 months nothing to live on I would have just broken even. I wouldn’t have lent me money! It’s not that I was dishonest, it’s just that I never earned enough to pay it back.

But, I wanted this so much that I kept asking people to lend me money. I went to a trust office on Danforth Avenue in Toronto. It was a new trust company. The guy’s name was Al [Kiper], the manager, I’ll never forget him. He said, “Why do you want this money?” I wanted $1000. I needed $980 to be exact.

I said I want to buy a used floor machine and some buckets and mops. I’m going to build a business. He kept asking me questions and I was very enthused about and I was emotionally involved. He said, “You know something. I think you’re going to do it. I’m going to give you the money.” I was shocked when he lent me the money. I had a terrible credit rating, but I really wanted that money.

When you want something bad enough you’ll always find the money for it. When somebody tells me they can’t afford it, what they’re really saying is, “You haven’t made me want this well enough.” You’ve got to get them emotionally involved. When they say, “Well, I really can’t afford it,” say, “You can’t afford not to have this. I’m going to tell you something. When you say I can’t afford this it’ll probably be the last time you’re ever going to have to say it because you’re going to learn how to earn money with this.”

Now, if you have to go and borrow $1000 off six or seven people go then do it. You have to write them an IOU and say to them, “If I have to tell you what it’s for I don’t need it. But, I want you to trust me and I’ll pay it back every cent.” Get the money. When they want this bad enough they’ll get it. When you convince them that this is going to do the job, this has changed all kinds of lives. It’s changed the lives of huge companies.

So, them not having the money is not a problem. The problem is you haven’t made them want it enough.

Q:

I want to lead another 28-day online group event/seminar to get clients committed and working with you, myself and TIR. What are some of the key areas that I should focus on and how little or how much of TIR should I share?

A:

Well, first of all, I don’t think I’d do that. I may put on a presentation once or twice, but if you spend too much time with the people they’ll figure they’ve got it all. You’ve got to leave them wanting more. If you ever go and see some kind of an entertainer, singer or something like that, they’ll come out at the end of the show.

They come back out on stage and they take a bow and they leave the stage and everybody’s clapping and clapping and clapping. They want them to come out again. They may come out again and then the audience keeps clapping and wants them to come out again but they don’t come out. They always leave them wanting more.

That’s what you’ve got to do with your prospects. You’ve got to leave them wanting more. You’re going to get emotionally involved then. You ought to get that book, The Art of Acting. Study it. Become a real product of the product. Make them want what you’ve got. Say, “Listen, this idea you can’t afford it is not a valid idea. How many other areas of your life does this show up in? Every time you want something you haven’t got you say I can’t get it because I can’t afford it? Don’t you know that all the money in the world is available to you all you have to do is earn it.

What you have to do is learn how to raise your level of thinking about yourself. Get involved in a big idea. That’s what this program’s going to do. Now, let’s quit screwing around and let’s figure out how to do this. Let me help you. Start thinking about people that would lend you the money.”

Q:

How can I bring onboard clients from my corporation who don’t want to be grouped together? In fact, senior leadership needs this too but privacy is an issue.

A:

Well, put them with people … don’t just deal in the company. Get people from other places and put them in it. Mix it up.

Q:

I’m no longer motivated to create in my job. New projects motivate me minimally and I feel physically affected. Is it time to leave or should I change my way of working-delegate more?

A:

Well first of all, I think you should change your way of working, maybe you should leave too. You don’t let the job control you, you control the job. If you’re giving it everything you got and you don’t like it – get out of it. See, you should be doing what you love to do. Find out what you love, dedicate your life to it. Just because you don’t like it doesn’t mean you should back off and not do a good job. Give it everything you’ve got. That’s a good habit to form. If you’re giving it everything you’ve got, and it’s not giving you what you need, get out of there. Go do something else. Stop and think, what do I love doing? That’s what you should be doing.

Q:

When is it wise to go into debt in order to participate in some kind of training/coaching program and when is it better not to? Is it wrong to tell oneself to wait and first earn the money?

A:

Well that would depend on the person. I remember there were two people that worked in a company for my wife, and I would help her periodically. One’s name was David and the other was Mike. They were fairly close friends, they weren’t real close, but they were friends. They both wanted to get a new Cadillac car. They’d come to me and ask for advice. I told one of them to go ahead, put a down payment, and by the Cadillac. The other guy, I told him not to. Now David would have let the weight of that debt slow him down, so he would be useless. The other guy would motivate him. So it depends on your attitude. It depends on how you do things. You see, I’m in the business of telling people, go and borrow the money if you have to but get in the program. That is because people borrow money to buy cars, fix houses, buy clothes, do damn near everything, but they don’t do anything to raise their own level of consciousness.

When you invest in you, that’s what Ben Franklin did, he said dump a part of your purse into your head, in other words invest in your own growth and development. I think it’s always a good idea. I did. I recommend people do it.

Q:

What can I do to attract a new client today? My final pay from my job is now in, and I don’t have the savings you recommended and I want to book the September consultant training. I do believe transformation is for me.

A:

Just book it, you’ll have the money when it comes. Go ahead and book it.

Q:

What exercise do you recommend before going to speak in public that helps deliver it so people connect in a deeper level?

A:

I put myself into a very relaxed state, and I visualize. Years ago I went to a Supper Club in England, it was called the Talk of the Town. It was the largest Supper Club in the world at the time. They had over a thousand people that would sit down to dinner. It was like an amphitheater. They had a big stage show. At this time it was called the Wild, Wild West. That show would run for maybe two or three years. They’d bring in different stars to head it up. I got a table right near the stage. I’m going a long ways back into the 60s. Wayne Newton headed up the show. He’s Mr. Las Vegas now I think but he walked out on that stage, he may have been 21, and he took command of that place, he owned it. He didn’t let the size of that, or the thousands of people there intimidate him one bit.

He walked out, he owned the place. When I speak, I put myself in a very quiet place, and I’ll visualize him walking out on the stage and I see myself walking out and I’m gonna own the place. Then I just focus on helping the people understand what I’m doing. I don’t wonder what they think of me. If you get nervous you’re wondering what the people think of you. If you want to be relaxed think of helping them. So I see myself, I own the place, I’ve got their attention, and I’m really going to help them. I may go sit in the kitchen in a hotel. If you’re all dressed up they’ll think you own the place and nobody will say anything to you.

Q:

I recently turned 71 and cannot release the need to attract unhealthy minded people into my life. I believe I inherited it from my mother. This blocks me to even participate in Matrixx or Paradigm conferences. I want to be a consultant and know I will be a good one as I enjoy teaching others. What do you suggest?

A:

Become a consultant. 71 my God you’re a kid. I’m 85 and I think I’m just warming up. If you were 91 that’s got nothing to do with it. You’re alive, it’s now, it’s today, give it everything you’ve got, really live! Used to be a song, “I’m gonna live until I die, until my numbers up I’m gonna fill my cup I’m gonna live, live, live until I die.” Some people don’t live til they die, they just put in time. When their heart stops beating it’s a formality. Start living the way you want to – right now.

Q:

One of my part-time employees delegated a task which I gave to her to one of our other employees. Since she has started she tends to overrule me. What can I do to stop that?

A:

Sit down and have a come to Jesus talk with her. Look her right in the eye and say if this keeps up you won’t be working here very long.

Q:

I’ve run out of contacts on my phone. What strategy would you recommend to approach the general public?

A:

As a consultant, call on companies. Go to real estate companies, go to insurance companies, go to anybody that’s selling. They all wanna know how to do more. We’ve got the answer for them.

Q:

My girlfriend bought and paid for TIR where I coached her. Should she always pay for my coaching and events or how have you done it in your personal relationships?

A:

Well you should pay your own way.

Q:

I want to sell one of my companies. What do you recommend that I do in order to sell it at a good price? How can I be sure that the selling process will be quick and easy?

A:

Well, you image you. You release it, mentally release it. You don’t hold onto the company. Some people are selling something and mentally, they don’t really want to let it go. You’ve got to mentally let it go. See yourself signing the papers and a good price will be a fair price. What would you pay for it? That’s what you should sell it for. You don’t try and get more than it’s worth but you want to get what it’s worth. See the company being sold. See yourself shaking hands with a faceless person, and see yourself signing the papers. Visualize it. Give thanks for it moving so easy and so fast, and to such a great owner.

Q:

I was taught that at some point, you run out of people to sell things to and only those at the top are making money. Can you please speak about changing a paradigm on network marketing?

A:

Well, that is absolutely absurd. You know, it was a loser that taught you that. Somebody that wasn’t winning. Network marketing, is the greatest idea that’s ever came down the pike. Now, there’s only a handful of people that win at anything. That’s true in network marketing, but anyone in network marketing can win. Now what you want to understand, is whatever you’re selling, that is not the name of the game to sell the stuff. What you want to do is build a network through which your product or service moves. That’s what it is. It’s networking marketing. So what you’re trying to do is find the right person and help them build a business. Just focus on helping them build their business. If they come along, help the person they bring on build their business.

This idea that some can win and some can’t is absurd. Everyone can win. We’re dealing with infinite potential, infinite power. My business is a very mature business. I’ve been at it since networking marketing started, but if I was starting over today, that’s what I would do because it’s such a marvelous way to set up multiple sources of income. Don’t talk to anybody about network marketing unless they are at the top. When my wife decided she was going to go into network marketing, I made her appointment with a guy that was earning about a million dollars a month and she flew right across the country to sit down with him. And she said, “What are half a dozen things that I could do, if I did them every day?” Go to people that are doing really well and say what, if I did it every day, what would happen? That’s where you want to go.

Q:

I am in a situation where I am not sure what I should focus on. Last year I couldn’t afford my place so my family and I moved in with my aunt temporarily. The plan was to stay for three months, increase our income, my wife and I, and move on to our upgraded life. Unfortunately, this did not happen because I did not have a strong enough focus on the goal and let myself become distracted. My aunt is ready for us to leave and I am not sure what to do. I have three additional months until I need to be out of her home. Should I focus on my goal now, or move out and then focus on increasing my income without the thought that I am on a deadline?

A:

Well, I’m going to tell you, if I were you, I’d get out of your aunt’s house right now. I’d figure out a way to do it. Your aunt is a crutch for you. You’ve got to be able to earn that much money. I wouldn’t care if I had to go out and wash cars or cut lawns and do whatever I had to do. I would earn enough money to make it happen. That’s just the kind of guy I am. You don’t want to lean on anyone. Lean on yourself.

Here’s a great question. This is in a lesson that I’m teaching on The Inner Circle. What is our point of support? Is it in ourselves or outside of us? Are we self poised or does our balance depend on something external? According to your actual belief in which our answer to these questions is embodied, so will our lives be. You’ve got to realize that you are the stabling force. You’ve got to make it happen. And make it happen right now. Give yourself seven days to get out of your aunt’s place, get into another place. I don’t care if you just have to lay a mattress on the floor. Get in your place and do whatever you have to do to earn the money. The idea that you can’t earn money is ridiculous. Anybody can earn money, and you can as well. You provide service, doesn’t have to be a lot, but make it happen. You’re going to like yourself when you make the decision. Three months, my goodness, you could build a house in three months.

Q:

I want to turn my yearly income into my monthly income. What can I do daily to achieve this?

A:

Well, do a better job than you’re doing. Do more than you’re being paid for. I like the way Napoleon Hill put it. He said if you’re not prepared to do more than you’re being paid for, you’re never going to be paid for more than you’re doing. Give it everything you’ve got. Really give it everything you’ve got and keep your eye open for multiple sources of income.

We’re going to be introducing something that is mind blowing and I know everybody is going to want to be in it. We introduced it at the Paradigm Shift in Los Angeles here, but it wasn’t ready to go. It will be ready to go in days. It’s called the PGI Marketplace. It is phenomenal. It’s a great networking place, place for you to set up MSIs. You watch for it. It’s coming out probably in a week, and it is really good.

Q:

I know I want to be in an A list film. I know I want to make $240,000 per year, but how do I get emotionally involved in these ideas? Can you explain what it means to be emotionally involved in an idea? I think this is an area of confusion for me.

A:

You’ve got to see yourself. It’s like Van Gogh said. He was asked how he did such beautiful work. He said, “I dreamed my painting and then I paint my dream.” That’s what you’ve got to do. And you see yourself in the film. See yourself and reduce that $240,000. Make that so small that you’d be ashamed that that’s all you’re going after.

You have infinite potential. All the money in the world is available to you. All you have to do is earn it. Start reducing the money to the ridiculous. Make it small. Make it look like it would be easy to do. See yourself in that film. You see, we have the ability with our imagination… I read a quote this morning in our own insights from Steve Cubby. He said don’t live from your history. Live from your imagination. See, the imagination is the one that will take us out of the situation we’re in and put us in the situation we want to be in. So use your imagination. It is a mental faculty. It’s one of your higher faculties. The imagination to the mind is something like hearing or sight is to the body.

Imagination takes you into universal intelligence, universal energy, where everything is because nothing is created or destroyed, so you’re tapping into the universe.

Q:

I am feeling deeply passionate and living in the reality of the financial goals I have set for myself. I will be increasing my annual salary by 40 times. What can I do to accelerate the manifestation of my goal?

A:

That’s exactly what I did the first year. I increased my income, and multiplied it by 43.75 the first year that I started to study this. Now I couldn’t have known very much because I started with nothing. I mean, I really didn’t know hardly anything. I had never read a book. I’d never listened to a record or anything, but my income went from $4000 to $175,000 a year and that was way back in 1961, so that’s 43.7 times. You can do it.

Now, what did I do? You said, “What can I do?” I was cleaning offices. I just became a real good office cleaner and then I realized I can’t clean enough offices. So it was like a little voice in my head said, “If you can’t clean all of them, don’t clean any of them.” So I get other people cleaning offices. Now what I really did there was set up multiple sources of income for myself, so that’s what I would suggest you start looking at.

Now that’s not multiple jobs, that’s multiple sources of income.

Q:

Sometimes I get myself into trouble with some of my coworkers. I speak too openly about their issues and how they can overcome them. At times, it is in front of other coworkers. I really mean no harm. Do you have any suggestions?

A:

Leave your coworkers alone. It’s none of your business what they’re doing. If they ask you for your opinion, then go ahead. But otherwise, you’re like a sheriff of the universe and people will start resenting that. You help them if they ask you. Best way you can help other people is to be a great example. Just work on you.

Q:

I am doing TIR and I am stuck. I live in Tokyo and have not signed up a single client. What three things can I do to be successful in signing up clients?

A:

Okay, quit trying to sell TIR. Start trying to help people. Just start building a rapport with people. You know, just ask them, “If you could have anything you want, what do you really want? Do you ever sit and think of why some people do so well in life and others don’t? Why there’s a small, select group of people, they just go from one win to another? That fascinated me for a long time and I found some people that explained the answers to all that. If you’re interested, I’d like to share it with you because it’s really good.” Then start talking to them about it.

And say, “I have found if we invest in ourselves, we’re going to do so much better, but we’ve got to invest in ourselves. I started investing in me. Everything in my life is changing. You got to try and get over to the training because there’s some good Consultant training coming up pretty soon.

I don’t care if you have to blow the minds of your grandmother to come. You want to get over here to that training because you’ve got one of the most phenomenal programs that you’re ever going to find anywhere.”

Q:

What is a good way to get appointments with businesses for Thinking into Results?

A:

You’ve got to get to the decision makers. Get sales managers, get to vice presidents and sit down, and talk to them. Ask them, say, “What do you do to improve business here?” And they’ll probably come out with advertising and new systems and things like that.

Say, “Do you know that your business is people? If we take the people out of this company, you don’t have a company any more. You just got a building full of stuff. Do you know if you just improve the productivity of your people by 5 to 10%, what it would do the bottom line in this company? We have programs where we come in, it’s got nothing to do with what the people are doing, it has to do with them. We show them how to become more effective at what they’re doing, and have more fun at what they’re doing. I could come into your company and change the production of any person or any department in your company. Let’s take a department that’s got maybe a half a dozen people. If I could show you how to maybe increase the productivity by 25 to 50%, would that be worth $500 or $600 a week to you in a year? I mean the return is ridiculous.”

That’s what I’m talking about because that’s really what you’re talking about.

Q:

When I tell people that I have ideas that can improve their business, they ask in regard to what. What can I tell them?

A:

Tell them what I just told you. It’s about how to help your people become more effective at what they’re doing. Let’s suppose you’re running a company. I want you to think… Tell me the name of two people, first name, just first name. You say Rob, Bill, and Bettie. You know that Bill and Bettie can do a better job than they’re doing, don’t you? And you know Bill and Bettie both know how to do a better job than they’re doing.

You know what the puzzle is to you, to Bill, and to Bettie? They don’t know why they’re not doing these things because the truth is they want to do them. See all of your employees are programmed to operate throughout the way they operate. If you have a person that comes in late, they come in late fairly regularly. If you have somebody that comes in early, they come in early regularly. People are programmed to live the way they’re living. We help them understand how those programs were built and how they can be changed.

When you do that in a company, you’ve got a dynamic organization. Things start to fly. You could actually double the productivity without adding any more people in this company. You’ve got to look them right in the eye. Now see, what I would recommend you do is take a small department, I don’t know 5 or 10 people. Make the investment and do it.

Q:

I have crafted marketing services for business owners. How can I get them to want to listen when I walk into their business?

A:

Well, you got to mentally prepare yourself before you walk into their business. You’ve got to have an opening line that’s really going to grab their attention. You want to get them to give you all of their attention.

Too many people are distracted in the middle of a sales presentation. I try and make a presentation outside of an office. I don’t want to talk to them in their office. I want to get them in my territory. That’s important that you do that. You have to have opening information that’s really going to cause them to think.

Q:

How can I price my services to be fair to everyone involved?

A:

Put a fair price on them. What would you pay for it? What do you think it’s worth? Some people think I’m expensive. I don’t think I am. I don’t think quality is ever expensive. It’s priceless and our material is priceless. We really deliver. I don’t go to a marketplace to find out what I should charge. I charge what I think it’s worth and then we deliver. That’s what I want to recommend you do. Be fair. What’s it worth to you?

See, I couldn’t tell you what this has been worth to me. It’s changed my life and helped me change the lives of millions of people.

Q:

I am Christian and lesson one of TIR asks of my worthy ideal. It is to save animals, but my religion tells me that is secondary, as the priority is to save mankind. What would you suggest?

A:

I’d suggest you do what you want to do. I have a number of friends that save animals. My wife gives a lot of money to organizations here in Toronto to save animals. There’s a woman started an organization of any animal, any wild animal, or anything that’s hurt or anything, they take them in, even skunks, doesn’t matter, ducks, birds. It’s a wildlife preservation company and a woman started it on her own and she runs it all through donations. And if that’s what you want to do, that’s what you should do and do a really good job.

You’re Christian and you want to grow. How do you grow? You grow by getting better at what you’re doing. Save mankind, you save yourself. Be a good example.

Q:

I have a TIR client that struggles with lesson one, and aiming for her C-type goal. She is Buddhist and she is reminded of, ‘Be content and you will be happy.’ Do you have any suggestions to help her with this?

A:

Well some people, they say they’re happy when they’re content because there’s a smile on their face. They’re really simple. You’re supposed to be growing. The Buddhists have a great philosophy. A lot of people think Buddhism is a religion. It’s not. It’s a great way of life. It’s where you move in perfect harmony with the law. The real true Buddhists, Buddhist priests, they get in harmony with the law, and the energy flow freely to you. And they’re extremely productive. Some of the most productive people are Buddhists.

Q:

I am investment manager for a real estate investing school. I have only been able to attract tire kickers so far. What will help me attract the right people I need for a flourishing business?

A:

Quit thinking you’re attracting tire kickers. Start to see yourself as the manager. Build an image of the organization you want. Build yourself a chart. Go get a piece of dartboard and make yourself a real nice organizational chart where you’re the top person, and then the people that you want in it. Lay the organizational chart out and start to see those people coming in. Start to imagine the people coming in it. I guarantee it will start to work.

Q:

I have three months before my status in the US changes and my business is becoming very prosperous. I need to get a green card, which I have already applied for. Do you have any suggestions on what I can do in my situation?

A:

I really don’t. I think what you want to do is get a real good immigration lawyer, people that work on green cards. Do what they tell you, exactly what they tell you. They’ve got a good track record.

Q:

In a corporate group of eight, the team has not been given a clear view of where the company is going. How can they get a goal going without that?

A:

Someone of that group wants to step up and become a leader, pull them all together. Say “let’s use our marvelous mind. We don’t need somebody else to come along and tell us. We know what they want done here. Let’s shock them and do a better job.”

Q:

If you feel stress due a high workload at your job, how can you handle this stress in an effective way? Any suggestions on avoiding stress all together?

A:

Well first of all, ask yourself what’s causing the stress. The workload. Now take the workload and let it be represented by what you write out. Describe it on a piece of paper and put it on the piece of paper. Put it in the center of a table and then go to one side and look at it. Now say where is the problem? Is it in me or is it on the paper? Where does the work go? Is it in me or is it on the paper? Your objective to work at getting in on the paper and getting it out of yourself.

Then, you break down into parts and you do what you can, when you can. Look at it from a different point of view. When you’ve got it all written out, go sit on the opposite side of the table and say how did Proctor look at this? Then go sit at another part of the table and say how would somebody else that you really respect, how would they look at this?

Change your perception of your workload. It’s not the workload, it’s your perception of the workload that’s causing you the problem. Say I’m going to release the stress. The stress is brought on by me. It’s not brought on by the workload. It’s brought on by my own thinking. Say I’m going to change the way I look at my work. I’m going to turn this into a game. I’m going to have some fun.

Q:

I work in the jewelry industry as a diamond/gemstone grader and buyer. I go to Jaipur for the International Gemstones Week. How can I use this event as an opportunity to become self-employed as an international buyer for other companies?

A:

Go approach them. Tell them you’re very good at what you do and you’d like an opportunity to show them what you can do for them. What’s the benefit to them? When you approach them remember you’re selling benefits. You’re not just selling your service, you’re selling the benefits. What’s the benefit of your service? You’re going to let them know you’re really good at this and you might add I’m not sure I’m good at anything else but I don’t want to do anything else. I would like an opportunity to show what I can do.

Q:

I recently moved from a clinical department to sales with my current employer. It is a major pharmaceutical company. Do you have any advice that I can use in my new role as a sales manager?

A:

Well, pharmaceutical sales people don’t close sales so you’re in a different business than most other sales people. Pharmaceutical sales people make presentations to doctors or whatever and then they go check drugstores to see what the doctor is prescribing – what they’re selling. What you want to do is sell the benefits of your company and your service. You’re selling the benefits, the stability, the honesty, the success of your company and your service. You let them know that you’ll take very good care of them.

Q:

We were told not to focus on selling but at times I just want to push the TIR purchase. Any suggestions?

A:

We should focus on selling all the time. Selling is getting another person in the path of agreement. It’s finding out what they want and help them get it. That’s really what you’re doing. Become involved. Say “…do this now, don’t put it off.”

Q:

What should I look for, we should look for the good in a person, but my gut feels this person is not a good business partner. Is this a conflict between my intuition versus perception?

A:

Probably not. You don’t have to be in business with somebody. My gut feels the person is not a good business partner. Well if they’re not a good business partner you don’t have to wonder and you don’t have to go by your intuition. All you do is look at the results of how they’re performing. Like Sandra Gallagher is my business partner. I’ve had a few partners. She is without question, by far, the best partner I’ve ever had. She does a phenomenal job. She more than carries her half of the load and that’s the way partners should be. You trust your partner. Trust them implicitly.

I had an old guy a long time ago says, “You stand up for your partner, you trust your partner and you don’t let anybody say anything bad about your partner and if they double cross you, you kill them.” And I thought wow, now he was referring to mob rule. Now you’re thinking about it and that’s not such a bad idea. You don’t have to physically kill them. They’re just gone. You don’t spend any more time thinking of it. Good partners are hard to find.

Q:

What are some tools that can be used to exert your ability to lead others?

A:

Find out what they want. Believe that you can help them get it. Show them that you can help them get it. That’s how you lead others. You’ll never lead anybody if you don’t know what they want. You don’t know what they want, you’re trying to get them to do something you want them to do. If you find out what they want, you’re trying to get them to do something that’s going to help them get what they want. You’ve got to relate their goals to what they’re doing. People follow people. Leaders are leaders. People follow people because they want to follow them. You get them to want to follow you. You become such a great resource, a great help.

Q:

What are some tools that can be used to exert your ability to lead others?

A:

Find out what they want. Believe that you can help them get it. Show them that you can help them get it. That’s how you lead others. You’ll never lead anybody if you don’t know what they want. You don’t know what they want, you’re trying to get them to do something you want them to do. If you find out what they want, you’re trying to get them to do something that’s going to help them get what they want. You’ve got to relate their goals to what they’re doing. People follow people. Leaders are leaders. People follow people because they want to follow them. You get them to want to follow you. You become such a great resource, a great help.

Q:

It seems that TIR was originally designed as a corporate coaching program. What steps would you take to approach larger corporations when introducing TIR?

A:

Well it was designed originally because Sandra Gallagher worked in corporations and she’d be in board meetings with different companies. She was a securities lawyer so she was always in board meetings and she’d hear people that couldn’t get along. They had conflicting concepts and they didn’t understand what was going on. They didn’t understand the mind and she had started to study this and she said, “If we had something like this it would help.” So she had those people in mind when she designed it. This will help a kid in public school, in grade school. This will help anybody. See as it turned out she created something that anybody can use and benefit.

Next one on how you approach the company. Same way you approach anybody else. Company’s nothing but people. That’s all it is. So, you get to the person that makes the decisions. You might go in and say to the receptionist who makes the decisions here. Now they might not tell you but they might. Say I’d like to see that person for a few minutes. Try different ways of getting in. All you have to do is get in front of them and tell them you’ve got something that would really change the bottom line of their financial statement and ask them if they’re interested in hearing about it. Go in with a question. I’ve got something that will make everybody in here more productive, were you interested in talking about it? Something like that.

Q:

What do I need to learn and do to accelerate my network marketing business? My results have not been great yet and it has been three years.

A:

Well if you’ve been in it three years and the results aren’t great you don’t have good leadership. You’ve got to have a darn good leader. First of all you’re probably trying to sell a product, that’s a mistake. See I think you have to have a good product because if a company has a good product, good product, the customers won’t come back and the company isn’t going to win. So, every company needs a good product, most network marketing companies have good products.

Now the objective is not to sell the product. The objective is to build an organization through which the product flows. Now think what I’m saying it’s to build an organization through which the product flows. So, you’re talking to them about ownership and you point out that as a part of this you have products that come to you and you use. You’ve got to use the product, if you’re not using them you’re going to have difficulty talking anybody else into using them. See if you put yourself in ownership, let’s say it’s $150 a month, and then everybody you introduce this to, they do the same thing.

Now, let’s say you have 50 people, then 500 people, and then 5,000 people. And, remember, your pay is based on what the company sells in your organization every month. So, if it’s a 100 times $150 there’s $150,000 that your organization has brought into the company. Well, you’re paid on the $150,000. Now there’s all kinds of bonuses tossed in. Most people spend their time getting lost in the marketing plan, the bonuses, the product – forget all that. Go on out and show the people how they can improve the quality of their life by being in business with you.

Q:

I want to buy an estate where I live and do my business. Which mindset should I be in? Do I sign the contract first and then the money comes, or is the decision to do this even okay?

A:

Whatever you want to do is okay as long as you’re within the confines of the law, do whatever you want. I don’t think you should sign the contract when you haven’t got any money. I think you should make the decision to buy it. If you don’t have any money and then find out how much you need to put down. And then get hustling and get that much, earn it. Borrow it, if you have to. But get it.

Q:

I know that you cannot manage time, only tasks. I would like to know how to manage these tasks better. I have employees, customers and family to juggle. How do you find personal time?

A:

Well I think if you sat down at night you say only half a dozen gold achieving activities I can be involved in tomorrow. And one of those three or four very important areas that I look into tomorrow will be to develop my skill as a manager. This can be done by just working with some of your people, you know? See yourself as a great manager and the way will be shown. See people, people want to be led they really do. They want to follow a strong leader. Become a strong leader.

Q:

Since practicing your teachings daily, my income has increased over 30% yet I still seem to have just enough. It seems to be a life-long pattern. What can I do to change this paradigm?

A:

Well start by earning more than you need. You see if you’re fixed to spend all you need, it won’t matter how much money you earn, you’re going to spend it all. You want to earn more than you spend. You’ll feel good about yourself when you do that. You take part of your earnings and you put it away. Really make up your mind you’re going to double your productivity. You can take 20% of all you earn and stick it in a savings account and watch it grow. Maybe set a goal of getting up to $50,000, and then $100,000 and then $200,000. You know? You can do this.

Q:

If you had 30 days to attract 20 new TIR clients, how would you spend your time and energy?

A:

I’d be out getting a couple of people on and I would have them going around giving tickets to a meeting I was going to do and I’d try and fill the room. It’s a great opportunity in today’s world to multiply your income and put on a meeting and then make a presentation to them all at once.

Q:

When I do a cold call to business owners, how can I get them to leave their premises and listen? I usually speak to about ten per day.

A:

Well I’d make an appointment. When you call on them the only thing you’re doing is making an appointment, that’s the only reason you’re there. You’re not there to sell them anything. Say I wanted to talk to you today, Bill, Mrs. Brown or whatever. I would like to make an appointment to sit down with you, in a quiet, objective environment because I have an idea that I think you’re going to absolutely love that could change things- like night and day for you. But I don’t have the time right now but do you have time tomorrow or the next day where we could get together for a half hour. And then make the appointment somewhere else. But not at their place. And when you meet with them, say let’s turn our phones off for a half hour.

Q:

How can I prepare myself before going into a selling appointment?

A:

See yourself helping the person. See yourself totally relaxed. Sit in your car and totally relax. Just totally relax, let your jaw relax. In fact do that now. Let all the muscles in your stomach relax. Feels so good doesn’t it? You do that before you go in your call and then you mentally relax and you see yourself totally relaxed asking questions. And you have well prepared questions. Don’t go in there unprepared. See how much you can tell them. Ask them questions. Give good questions.

Q:

Once I have new client, once I have new client success stories to share with new prospects, it will make it easier to convince them that this program works. As a new consultant, I do not have these stories yet. What can I do to overcome this?

A:

Use somebody else’s stories. “Let me tell you about a woman that got involved in this. Let me tell you a story about Jacqueline. Let me tell you a story about Bill. Bill was a guy that was stuck in a job. He didn’t like the job. He’d been there for a long time. Bill started to study this program, everything began to change but you know the first thing that changed was the job. His perception of it changed. His perception of himself, he could see where he was going.” And think of another story. “Let me tell you about this woman she was a single mother.” And tell the story. They don’t have to be your stories. Make them true stories. Ask consultants you know that are doing very well and say give me a story. I remember Jack Canfield and Mark Victor Hansen came to me and they said Bob you got all kinds of stories, give us some stories. We’re going to write a book. Chicken Soup for the Soul. Look where it went. And so it was the stories.

Q:

If this program is to be done in sequence, lesson one through 12. How does one do the webinars when clients sign up at different times? If I were to sign up one client per week for 16 weeks, would that mean I need to have 16 sessions in week 16?

A:

No. What your doing right now, you’re getting too analytical about this. You have them study one week at a time. But it’s a philosophy all the way through it. It’s a strategy for healthy living. And so they can come on at any time, it will fit in with what their doing. And you can get them to look at it that way when you get back on the one that you’re on.

Q:

What attributes, attributes have you seen with your top consultants that have made them successful?

A:

They all use the program to get what they want. They’re products of the product and that is exactly why I became very successful in this business. I used the material. I listened to it everyday. I set my goals. I listened to it all the time. I still do. That started in 1961 and I still listen. I got the book right in front of me here. I will open it anywhere.

“Skepticism in connection with all new ideas is characteristic of all human beings but if you follow the instructions outline, your skepticism will soon be replaced by belief. And this in turn will soon become crystallized into absolute faith. Then you will have arrived at the point where you may truly say I am the master of my faith. I am the captain of my soul.” That’s part of a poem that Henry wrote. Many philosophers have made this statement, that the man is the master of his own earthly destiny but most of them have failed to say why he is the master. And you see I just opened this up anywhere every morning and I read it. And you can too. Study everyday that’s how you become more successful.

Q:

When starting out your business, what are the best methods to attract prospects to fill up your pipeline?

A:

Get out and knock on doors. Make a list of a hundred people that you know and start seeing them in the morning. Make appointments, make breakfast appointments. I help the Prudential Insurance Company of America raise their sales to over a billion dollars. I had them selling more $100,000 policies in a week than they previously sold in a year. I had them being in front of somebody every morning before 9 am and they had to ask every person to buy $100,000 worth of insurance. I said you don’t have to sell them just give them a chance to say no. Ask them. Get out in front of people everyday. Don’t sit and getting ready to get set to get going. Get out there! So whether it’s scary you’ll soon get comfortable with it and you’ll feel good about yourself.

Q:

I received a bonus download about multiple sources of income. I am beginning to think it is encouraged to become creative and come up with new ways of doing multiple sources of income. What do you suggest?

A:

I’m working on it all the time. I spend a fair amount of time every day, it’s not scheduled where I do it at 1:00 and 6:00 or something like that, but in between projects, I’m forever thinking, how could I monetize this? How could I turn this into a source of income? It’s a corporate thing we’re working on, but it’s going to produce a lot of income for a number of people. So, yeah, look for new ways. See, there’s no end to the number of ways. The only limit is the limit that we place on our own thinking. U.S. Andersen wrote in a book, he said, “When we fully realize that thought causes all, we will know there’s never any limits that we ourselves do not impose.” Keep going. You’re going the right direction.

Q:

I would like to know which paradigms are holding me back. I live and work full-time in Saudi Arabia. I am striving for sufficient income to move to Thailand. My definite aim is to build up property investment portfolios that will create passive income for me. I keep getting sidetracked by potential earning schemes. How can I reprogram to stay laser-focused?

A:

Well, I’ll tell you what I did. In this business, I meet a lot of people, and it’s an idea business. It’s a very creative business that we’re involved in. I used to have people bringing me opportunities all the time. I still do. Almost every day I have somebody bringing something. So, I’m seeing all these opportunities, and I’m taking time to investigate them all. One day, I realized that I was spending way too much time looking at opportunities, and they were taking me offtrack. I don’t look at anything today unless it is really focused in this industry and this business. It’s got to be on purpose for me, or I don’t even look at it.

I’m offered opportunities in real estate where I could earn probably millions of dollars. I’m not remotely interested in real estate. I have a house, but outside of that, I don’t want to buy and sell houses. I don’t want to get involved in anything that distracts me from where I’m going and what I’m doing. Well, make up your mind that you’re going to focus. You’ve got a goal. Stay focused on that goal, and do what you want to do. Your reward is going to be your place in Thailand, and move there. You know exactly how much it’s going to cost you. Make up your mind that that’s what’s going to happen, and quit getting sidetracked. You see, your problem is I don’t think your goal is properly set, because you’re getting knocked offtrack.

Q:

It is said that money must circulate the whole time. How can I differentiate between wasting money and bringing it into circulation?

A:

Well, money should be in circulation. It should be working. Everybody has a certain amount of money, or at least should have, probably, that’s not in circulation, where they leave it sitting in the house or sitting in a wallet, or something like that, but wasting money is just getting rid of it. That’s a perception problem. I get rid of a lot of money, and I don’t ever think I’m wasting it because I’m doing something with it that I want to do. You want to see yourself using money properly. See, giving is a prosperity law. Most people don’t understand.

There’s a great book, The Magnificent Obsession. It was written by Lloyd C. Douglas. W. Clement Stone read that book years ago, and on the weekend, and then he started to practice what the book taught. By 1970 he was the wealthiest man in the United States. He’s gone now. He outlived his whole family, though. He lived to be over a hundred. He was a chairman of combined insurance companies. Well, you want to learn how to use money. Most people don’t understand money. They get it, and they hold it. You don’t want to hold it or hoard it. You want to use it, and the more you give, the more you’ll receive.

Our company gives away a lot of money, and I remember we were giving a certain amount of money to a foundation for building schools in Africa. And my business partner, Sandy Gallagher was up, and they were thanking her for what she did, what we were giving, and on the stage she says, “I’m going to double what we’re giving.” And she almost choked while she was saying it because she wasn’t quite sure how she was going to do it, and she said, “The first week or so it was a little difficult. Then it got easy. Now you don’t even miss it.”

It’s a law of receiving/giving. You don’t give to receive. You give to give, and the universe sends it back to you. That’s circulating money. Start to see money coming to you. I believe money goes where it’s invited, and it stays where it’s welcome. Money is energy. Money, as somebody said, is God in action. Money is a phenomenal tool. Money will enable you to extend good far beyond your own physical presence. I love earning it. I don’t like counting it or looking after it, but I just love earning it because earning money is a creative process, and the more creative you become, the more you can earn, and then get it moving. Just keep studying it. You’re on the right track.

Q:

I work full-time roofing with my dad and plan to run the business next year. I also work part-time as a trainer at a gym, do network marketing, as well as an online fitness coaching program. In your opinion, is this too much?

A:

No, not too much. I remember when I started, I had five different businesses going at the same time. I was doing all kinds of things. You see, I don’t know how old you are, but it sounds like you’re on a good track. You’re becoming very productive and very creative. Now, what you might be wise to do is to start backing off one or two. I had a whole bunch of them going at the same time, and one day I realized where the greatest potential was, and it was in the office cleaning. I read Think and Grow Rich, and I was making flower boxes that hung on apartment balconies. I was working in a variety store for a relative for a dollar an hour. I was cleaning offices, I was painting houses, and I was working on the fire department.

I mean, I had all kinds of things going, and then one day I set down, and I had analyzed, where was my greatest potential, because the books, I guess, taught me to do this. And I realized that the greatest potential was in the office cleaning, so I quit doing everything, and I focused on office cleaning. Like I said a few minutes ago, I was cleaning a couple of offices. Pretty soon, I was cleaning offices in different cities, and then different countries, and I was doing hundreds of thousands of dollars.

Focus is really important, and getting really good at what you’re doing is really important. The law of compensation is very clear. The amount of money you earn is in direct ratio to the need for what you do, your ability to do it, and the difficulty there is in replacing you. So, pick the one that you feel has the greatest potential, or the one that you like the most, and give it everything you’ve got, and get real good at it, because that’s when your stock goes up.

Q:

The You Were Born Rich book has really highlighted the giant gap between my desires and my expectations. How do I really submit new, prosperous, abundant expectations in my life?

A:

Well, the expectation comes by law, or understanding the law. You see, if you understand the law, how the law works, your expectations are going to be in harmony with your desires. You will just know it’s going to happen. Like Andrew Carnegie said. Any idea that is held in the mind that’s emphasized, that’s either feared or revered, so it goes good and bad, will begin at once to close itself in the most convenient and appropriate form available. You hold the image in your mind. That image must move into form if you hold it. You’re holding the image in your mind. You’re turning it over to your emotional mind.

Well, when you turn it over to the emotional mind, that’s turning it over to universal intelligence. Universal intelligence operations by law. The first law is the perpetual transmutation of energy. The idea has to move into form. Now, when you understand that, you’re going to be expecting the desire. The desire is the idea in the subconscious mind, or on a conscious level. As you deposit the want, I think William James put it best, “In the treasury of your subconscious, it turns into a desire.” As you keep feeding it, as you keep getting emotionally involved, it turns into a desire.

That desire must move into form with and through you. That is an absolute law. So, the more you understand the law, the more you’re going to bring your expectations in tune with your desires, but you’re studying. That’s what these programs that we do are all about. It’s understanding. That’s why Solomon said, “In all you’re getting, get understanding.” You want to understand how the law works. You want to understand how goals are reached, and they’re reached through law, by working with the law. So, you’ll bring your expectations more in tune the more you understand how the law operates in your life.

You see, if you haven’t been studying this for years, when you first start studying it, it’s exciting, but it’s also confusing because it seems there’s so much to study. I’ve been studying it like a scientist now for 57 years, but I’ve still walked into it. I’ve been studying since… I was here at 5:30 this morning studying, and I’m teaching now. I’m going to be teaching again in another hour. I mean, I just love studying this because it’s so fascinating, and I expect wonderful things to happen. I still have gaps between my desires and my expectations, the same as you. I probably don’t have them as big as you, or maybe the goals are bigger or something like that, but as I increase my level of understanding, the desire and the expectations are more intent.

Q:

I recently took out a large loan to grow my business, but I’m now having buyer’s remorse. I have voices telling me that I never should’ve done this, and that it will never work. How can I overcome this?

A:

I would start talking to yourself another way right now. I have done that. I’ve been on the track you’re on, and I damn near put myself out of business a long, long time ago, but I did it, and I didn’t ask anybody what I should do. Listen. Build the business. Absolutely refuse to think why you can’t. Set a target and say, “This is where this business is going, and I’m not even going to accept anything else.” Don’t feel bad if you took out a large loan. You want to be thankful that you got the loan.

Now, I’m going to give you an exercise. I want you to do this at least three times a day. Tie it in with eating. If you eat three times a day, I want you to sit down, and write out 10 things you’re grateful for. This is critical right now because you are on the wrong track as long as you’re thinking this way. You want to be very grateful you got the loan. Now start to use it wisely. Really use it wisely. Get good counsel from someone, but absolutely refuse to have buyer’s remorse. That is a dumb thing to do, and yet we all do it from time to time, but say, “I’m not going to be dumb. I’m not too dumb. I was able to get this loan. I’m going to put the damn thing to good use.” Now, you need a mental adjustment.

On the very first page in a book, it’s Chapter Seven in The Science of Getting Rich, it’s Gratitude, it says, “The entire process of mental adjustment and atonement can be summed up in one word, gratitude.” Now think about that. The entire process of mental adjustment. You said that you got this loan, you’re having buyer’s remorse, voices telling me, “You shouldn’t have done this,” you need a mental adjustment. You want to say, “You’re one smart catch. You got this loan. You taught good to yourself.” Say, “There’s something phenomenal about me. There’s something so magnificent,” a mental adjustment. You do it by being grateful. Think of all the things you’ve got to be grateful for. Now, you do that three times a day. Get yourself on the racetrack, and don’t you have those nasty talks to yourself anymore. Be grateful.

Q:

I live in the DC Metro area and there’s a lot of work for the government. I am an information technology federal contractor. How can I use what I am taught to leverage more business? Enrolled in the Bob Proctor coaching.

A:

Well, first of all, you would come right down to a goal. I mean, how much business do you want? If you’re in business for yourself, you want to set a target of how much business you want to do. Then begin to work towards that. And you’re going to start to see how short of the goal you are, present results relative to the goal, and you’ll start to attract more business. You’ll just see where it should be. Do you want to attract government business or do you want to attract other business? You can get it from both places, but the whole thing comes into the law of attraction, but the law of attraction is based on the law of vibration, and the law of vibration is the vibration you’re in which is going to be controlled by the image you hold.

So it goes right back to setting the goal, setting your goal for what you want and see yourself with it, and you’ll get in harmony with it, you’ll start to attract business. I work with it everyday and it’s working.

Q:

As a TIR consultant, I have prospective and active clients. Both have a difficult time identifying what they really want. What would you suggest to help them?”

A:

Well, that’s not uncommon. Everybody has a difficult time with that. That’s one of the objectives as a consultant that you have. You’ve got to talk to them, get them to take the time to sit down every day and ask themselves what do they really want? Not what do they think they can get, not what can they get with the resources they’ve got, but what do they truly, really want? That’s what people are not familiar with. They don’t really think of that.

It’s ironic that we can have anything we want and only 5% can tell you what they want. A person has to take the time to sit and really play hardball with themselves and ask themselves what do they really want?

Q:

If someone has a lot of different business ideas they would like to execute, where would you suggest they start? How do you know which one to choose?

A:

Choose the one you feel closest to. You want to choose the idea that you want to build a business around and then focus on that idea rather than a whole multitude of ideas. The trick is get moving, get doing something, start. Pick one that you think is better than any of the others to you and then do it. Get going.

Q:

Do you ever plan on doing an event with anyone else in the industry, for example, Michael Beckwith?

A:

That’s funny you asked, I was talking to Jack Canfield yesterday about doing that. We may do something together. We’re just exploring it. So yeah, I think of that every now and then. Jack and I are friends and we would like to do something together. We just haven’t got a plan yet. We’re thinking about it though.

Q:

I am transitioning from my career of 25 years in the military to full-time life coaching. How can I stay focused on believing in myself and the possibilities?

A:

Well, it’s very important that you mix with the right people. You want to stay very close to the people that are doing what you want to do, and that’s not always the easiest thing to do. Make connections with people that are doing very well in this business and study what they’re doing. Stay closely attached to what we’re talking about here. In fact, that’s about the best advice I can give you – you’re going to find out the people from the military career are thinking one way. The real effective coaches are thinking another way. The people in the military career are more focused on security, pensions and things like that, and you’re not. You are more focused on opportunity, on really making things happening in the future. That’s where I would go if I were you.

Q:

I just finished high school. I’m trying to decide if I should take psychology or chemistry in university. I have interest in both. What would you suggest?

A:

Well, it’s not just what you’re interested in, it’s where are you going to go? What are you going to use this information for? What do you want to be? What is the end result that you’re working on? That’s really what you want to look at. That’s the important thing.

Well then you ask yourself, “Which should I know most about?” You might want to study both of them. I don’t know, but I don’t study just to study. I study because I want to expand my mind in a particular area. So that determines what I’m going to study. I was listening to Earl Nightingale on an old record this morning and I really enjoyed it. I got some good ideas from it.

Q:

How should I approach Bob Proctor coaching if I’m not sure what business to start or how I can be of service to others?

A:

Ask yourself what would you enjoy doing. It comes down to what do you enjoy. See, the important thing is that you really love doing something. Otherwise you’re not going to do it well. You’re not going to do anything well that you don’t enjoy doing. You’ll probably try and talk yourself out of doing it. What you love to do, you’re going to want to keep moving on.

Q:

I have a one million goal that I have had for years. I study Born Rich and … Excuse me. I study Born Rich and practice paradigm shifting daily for over six months now. I even wrote Serenity for over 90 days. Things have not improved. What am I doing wrong?

A:

Well, are you doing anything that is profit earning? You’ve got to do something that earns a profit. You’ve got to do something that earns money, and you might look at setting up more than one source of income. We’ve started something new called the Entrepreneurial Marketplace, and people who join that, I see the biggest benefit. We’re just really getting it into high gear. It’s a great thing to belong to. You’ll see people that have multiple sources of income, and you could set up joint ventures with them. You’ll get ideas of how to set up multiple sources of income. You want to mix with people. You’ve got to get different ways of money coming in. And that’s multiple sources of income.

Now, it sounds like you’re letting the results control you and you’re looking and it’s not happening. Well, you don’t know it’s not happening because there’s all kinds of things happening that you don’t know are happening. There’s an unseen world that we’re a part of. Things go on there that you can’t see until they do manifest, so it’s what you believe in in your consciousness, that is really the big thing.

Q:

If someone is just getting started with multiple sources of income, what would you suggest they do first?

A:

I would investigate network marketing. I’m asked all the time if I was to start over, what would I do? I’d join the networking marketing company because I think it’s a great way to set up multiple sources of income. You can have all kinds of sources of income. That’s why it’s such a very prosperous concept. Now, clearly understand that most of the people in it are not winning in a big way. Everybody’s winning to some degree, I suppose. But if you want to win in a big way, you’ve got to go to people that aren’t winning in a big way and then do exactly what they tell you, and most people in network marketing don’t do that. You’ll find people that aren’t doing much talking to other people that aren’t doing much and they’re trying to brainstorm what’s the best way to do it.

The best way to do it is to go to somebody that really understands and there’s a good book, Go Pro, and you want to look at it. It’s on network marketing. Now, I’m not sure what you’re doing, so it’s very difficult to say, but that’s a great way to have multiple sources of income, and you can have all kinds of them. You might look up Eric Worre. Eric Worre runs a generic training for network marketers and he’s got all kinds of people earning a million dollars a month, that you could get lessons from.

Q:

There are so many things I want to accomplish. I am looking to earn a higher salary at current employer, make more money outside of work, personal growth and more. I feel I’m out of focus. Should I just be focusing on one thing at a time?

A:

Yeah, I think you should. Every job holds a future just as every person does. What you want to do is ask how can you be more valuable to your employer, and really focus on that. If you want to do something outside of work, start an MSI. You could belong to a network marketing company and still do a very good job where you’re working and do it on a part-time basis, which most people do. That’s where your focus should go.

Q:

I’m new to coaching. You have suggested several things for us to do every day for a month, 90 days, et cetera. I want to do them all but I’m getting overwhelmed. How do I determine which ones to work on?

A:

Pick the ones that you think you can benefit most. And don’t try and pick too many. If you pick too many, you won’t do any of them. Do the ones you feel closest to, the ones you feel most familiar with, the ones that you like the most. Do the ones you want to work on.

Q:

I am making eczema products. Am I contributing to my child’s eczema because I’m studying and thinking about it?

A:

You could be. But I think if you’re looking to clear it up, you start to see the child with nice, clear skin. Clear, pink skin. That’s all you see. But if you’re thinking about it all the time, you’re transmitting that idea, so you could be. So stop doing that. See the result of the eczema product. Clear skin.

Q:

When you first started learning this, what did you actually do to double your income?

A:

I started cleaning offices on the side. I was on the fire department and within five years I was cleaning offices in Toronto, Montreal, Boston, Cleveland, Atlanta, London, England. I quit the fire department to clean offices. Everybody thought I had lost my mind. I was the second person since 1934 to quit the fire department. Nobody quit that job. But I fell in love with the idea of building a business. That’s what I did.

Q:

I have been writing my daily gratitude exercise with the left hand for six plus months but I feel that meditation works better for me. Should I change this habit?

A:

Well listen, that isn’t comparable to meditation. Meditation, you will benefit greatly from because meditation gets your whole system in harmony with spirit or with the law. The writing with your left hand is showing you that you can actually alter a paradigm. The paradigm is nothing but a multitude of ideas that are fixed in your subconscious mind that you automatically act on. You automatically signed your name with one hand. Now, you put the pen in the other hand and I said, “I’m going to train my other hand to do this.” Well, what that’s proving is that you can change a paradigm. You can change your habitual way of living. And if a person really wants to multiply their income, improve their relationships, build their business, they’ve got to change their paradigm. And it’s true the repetition of doing something that you haven’t done before that creates the new paradigm.

Like let’s suppose a person sleeps in every morning and they say, “I’m not going to do that anymore. I’m going to get up early.” And so, they reprogram themselves. When they wake up they get up. And they’re reprogrammed to do this. Pretty soon they don’t sleep in anymore. They’ve changed that program. Well, it’s the same thinking about how money’s earned. Most people never learn how to earn money. You earn money by providing service. Most people think you go to work. You don’t go to work to earn money you go to work for satisfaction. You provide service to earn money. So, it’s changing our habitual perception of life and how we’re living it. That’s what the writing with the other hand is doing. The meditation is a good program. It’s a good habit. I’ve been doing it for many years and it puts your whole being in a calm state.

Q:

I have a goal to enroll 11 TIR clients this month. I am constantly focused on it and I want to allow it to happen instead of doing actions that force it. What can you suggest that I do?

A:

Get in front of somebody real fast. Make up your mind when you wake up in the morning you’re going to make a sale before you get back into bed at night. U.S. Anderson tells the story about going to a nightclub with his friend and he said there was entertainment. There were spinning plates on the end of bamboo poles. You might have seen this on television where they’d have maybe a whole string of these poles and there’s plates spinning on the top of them. The bamboo poles bend, and bend, and bend, you think it’s going to fall but just as it’s going to fall he gets over and gets spinning the plate again on that pole. When they left the guy said, “Wasn’t it amazing how well he did those plates, those 18 plates?” The guy says, “What was amazing?” “Well the fact that he did it at all.” And that got him thinking how do you learn to spin 18 plates on the end of bamboo poles. Then it dawned on him you learn to spin one plate and once you master that then you go and spin the second one. And that’s where you want to go with your 17 sales. You want to make one and when you make that one then you go and make another one. And you do it today, not tomorrow. You don’t just get ready to do it. You go and do it.

Q:

My goal is to become a multi millionaire and earn my annual income monthly. I currently earn approximately a $100,000 per year. I am going through a divorce and I am a single mother with two children, one with special needs, so medical insurance through employer is critical. How can I make my goal happen when I am not an entrepreneur and I work for the public sector? I do not have a business idea or any plan to start a business.

A:

Well, first of all I think your idea of earning a million dollars a year working for the public sector is an illusion. I don’t think they’ll pay you a $100,000 but I think you can earn a million dollars. You want to look at becoming an entrepreneur. And as far as the medical insurance you can earn enough money to do that so don’t think you can’t. What you want to do is start seriously entertaining entrepreneurial concepts. We’ve got a beautiful one. In fact I was just with a man who has become a consultant with us and you can earn a million. In fact I know women that are doing it in our business. You want to inquire about this. If you want to earn a million dollars a year the odds of you doing it working for somebody else is rather slim. It can be done but you will greatly increase your odds as an entrepreneur. And you see the idea that you have to have a job because you need the insurance, you can pay for the insurance yourself and don’t think you can’t. Start to entertain the idea of why you can and how you can. You want to send in and get somebody to talk to you about the opportunity as a consultant with our company.

Q:

How do you suggest I use what I learn in BPC to market my business and reach new customers? And, how can I obtain an ideal affordable office space for my holistic psychotherapy and life coaching business? It’s very costly in the Washington D.C. area.

A:

Why don’t you do home calls? You don’t need an office. Have an online office. Have an online office. And start going out to networking groups. Start a mailing list and do mailings. But you do home calls rather than go to an office. You want to get into some marketing concepts, get a book on marketing. There’s a great book it’s called, How I Raised Myself From Failure to Success in Selling. He was an insurance sales person. It was probably one of the best books on selling I have ever read. It’s got a bad title on it I think but you want to get into that. Get that book and study it. And you’re going to find it’ll work really well. The author of the book is Frank Betger. It’s a great book. Anybody that has anything to do with selling or marketing. There’s some great ideas in it. Somebody gave me that book years and years ago. I was getting on a flight to England and I fell in love with the book. I think it should get a different title because a lot of people will be driven away from it because of the title but it’s really a good one and I would recommend it. I think that’ll help you.

Q:

A few months ago I began listening to Magic in Your Mind and found it phenomenal. After a few weeks I signed up for Bob Proctor coaching and this is great too. Last week I decided to become a PGI consultant and am just starting out with that. I am having trouble keeping up with my daily studies. They are all valuable to me in different ways. How would you recommend I prioritize my studies so I get the most out of the material?

A:

The one that you feel drawn to most, that’s probably the one you need best. There’s some of it you’ll be drawn to. You just feel really in harmony with it. That’s the one you want to study. And as a consultant this is what you’re sharing, you’re sharing all of this information. Well, understand people don’t want to buy a program. What they want is the benefits of the program. That’s what you’re selling. You’re selling all of the benefits. How have you benefited from it? That’s how you’re going to help them.

Q:

I don’t know what I really want. What can you suggest I do to figure this out?

A:

Take the time every morning. Get up a little early. Take a pad and a pen and sit down and be totally relaxed and think, “If I could do anything I want with my life what do I really want to do?” You’ve got to get serious about this. You get real serious about it. “If I could do anything I want with my life what would I do?” You might have to do this for a month everyday for a half hour or an hour in the morning. Sit down, put a pen and a pad beside you, and leave the pen and pad sitting there until an idea comes.

I watched a woman on television one time and she told a story about she was a chorus dancer in Las Vegas. In other words she danced in a chorus line. She knew that she wasn’t good enough to be the star of the show. She would never be the star of the show. So, she decided she was going to quit dancing and go and do what she loved doing. She loved baking pastries. She went to France, got a job working with some of the best pastry chefs in the world. And at the time I was watching her she was one of the best pastry chefs in the world. That’s what she loved to do.

When you’re doing what you love you’re going to automatically get better at it and that’s really what you want. So, you’ve got to sit and figure out, “What do I really love doing?” The fact that you don’t know hot o do it or you’ve never done it before doesn’t mean anything. What would I really love to do? If I could wake up every morning and do what I love for the rest of my life what would it be?

I went to visit Earl Nightigale way back around 1964 or ’65 and I was in his office looking for the better part of an hour I guess. And when the meeting was over I was leaving. I said Earl what is the real secret? I mean what is the real deal, the secret of life? He said, “Well there isn’t any secret.” He says, “It’s simply the matter of a person sitting down and asking themselves what they’d love to do and then dedicate their life to doing it.” He said, “The problem with most people is they don’t know what they love doing.” Well, at that moment I started to get excited because I knew exactly what I’d love to do. I wanted to do what he was doing and I made up my mind right then that I was going to do what he was doing. And in 1968 I went back and I started to work with him.

Q:

When presented with numerous options how do you know which one is the correct decision to make? I am unable to decide if I should start my own business or keep working in sales which I enjoy.

A:

Well, I think you should start by asking yourself what do you really love doing. You do what you really want. And don’t back away from something because it scares you. That would be an error. Do what you really love doing.

Q:

I understand the value of act as if strategy but when my income is less than my desired standard of living what would you suggest I do?

A:

I would suggest you change your income. I would suggest you stop and think how can I add income. There’s all kinds of sources of income. You can set up as many sources as you want. Ideas will come to you on how you can earn more money. Start earning it. Really listen carefully. Look at affiliate programs. We have affiliate programs. Send a letter to [email protected].

Q:

What actions do you recommend that I implement daily to experience a quantum leap in standard of living and in annual income?

A:

Well, first of all I would have to know what you’re doing. But I do know that if you want to substantially increase your income you have to add sources of income. You can have multiple sources of income. You don’t just have one. You can have many sources of income. And that’s what you want to look into. You can write in to our customer service team, and ask for information on the affiliate programs. You can recommend these programs to people and you can earn money on it. There’s all kinds of affiliate programs.

Q:

How do I act like the person I want to become when I still work in my current career?

A:

Easy. That’s what you’ve got an imagination for. You put your imagination to work. You can turn the worst situation into a beautiful situation with your imagination. Download the lyrics for Pretend. It’s a song by Nat King Cole. I think it goes back to 1970 but the lyrics are incredible. Download the lyrics. “Pretend you’re happy when you’re blue. It isn’t very hard to do. You can find happiness without an end whenever you pretend.” It goes on, it’s beautiful. That’s how you do it.

Q:

Up until now I have been hesitant to send in my weekly form as it seems to repeat itself for the past three weeks. She’s a BPP member. I have been working diligently on getting my eCommerce business going, but it is taking longer than expected, because I am not savvy with technology. Trial and error is the way I am getting things done. Do you suggest I keep repeating the same goal and forms each week?

A:

Yes, absolutely. You see, you’re starting a business. And the thing can go like a rocket once you get it going. It’s a matter of getting it going. eCommerce is pretty good. You’ve got a global business starting from scratch. And I know a number of people that are starting up. And sometimes they’re slow to start because you’ve got so much to learn. But if you stay with it and keep learning every day you’re going to move.

Q:

I have been selling to people without having them sign a contract TIR. Do you think a contract is necessary? I feel like I may lost a sale if I ask them to sign something after they have agreed to buy.

A:

No, I don’t think a contract’s necessary. If you build a good rapport with them, that’s the main thing.

Q:

By background is in business accounting, and I have a very good handle on business management in general except for sales. How do I attract engaged salespeople?

A:

Well, if you have your own business, I would look for a damn good sales manager. Find a real good salesperson. You can advertise for them. Get a good sales manager and have that person build the sales force. We have a great vice president of sales in our company. He is phenomenal. And he just developed himself by studying it. Get a good book on sales. Get a book on sales management. But find yourself a person and put them in charge of bringing salespeople to your business. Because if you don’t sell, there’s two departments, sales and sales support. Nothing happens until somebody sells something.

Q:

I’m looking for clients that have a business niche of consulting couples in marriage and relationships while using TIR. What suggestions do you have on finding these clients?

A:

I would suggest you send a letter to the administration. We’ve got a couple of people that do this. Just send an email to [email protected].

Q:

What is the quickest way to grow a network marketing business and attract the right people into your business?

A:

Well, if you want to build a network business, what you’re looking for is leaders. And you want to help the people build teams. You’re looking for team leaders all the time. What you’re doing is building a network for the product that the company sells to flow through, but the whole trick is to build leaders. If you don’t have leaders, you’re never going to build a network marketing company. And oddly enough, people that have never lead in anything can learn to lead in network marketing. They’ve got to really care about their people, and they’ve got to want to help their people build the business. But that is the secret.

Q:

How do we explain the difference between Thinking Into Results and the new Lead the Field to someone who is trying to decide between the two? Or to a client of TIR that is considering the new Lead the Field?

A:

Well, they’re very much alike. It’s that I think the Thinking Into Results will get you results a bit faster. The lessons are very pointed, and it’s not as comprehensive, so you can move faster with it. Lead the Field is a very comprehensive program. And for a person to properly study that, it’s going to take a long time. I’ve been studying that for many, many years. And you can just keep studying it. They complement each other. Thinking Into Results, I think you’ll move faster. It’s more entertaining, so for a first program, that would probably be a good one. If a person wants to read it and get into study in depth, Lead the Field will help you do that.

Q:

Is it best to visual net monthly or annual sales? I’m envisioning a certain amount of money in my possession, but it is tricky when the flow of money is constantly in and out of the account.

A:

Well, stop thinking it’s going to be in and out of the account. Build a target in your mind, and then work towards and hit that target. It doesn’t matter whether it’s monthly or annually. You live by the month, live by the week. So probably a month you’re going to leave something there every month. So over 12 months you’re going to have a nice little nest egg.

Q:

When selling TIR, how would you explain the importance of providing people with a complete understanding?

A:

Well, you’re not going to provide them with a complete understanding. You’re going to tell them that this is going to help them understand more about themself, the world they live in, how they can take control over their life and over their results. That’s why Solomon said, “In all you’re getting, get understanding.” We’ve got to understand how our world works. Our world, our life. Because you take a look there’s some people that are extremely successful, and they’re not very smart. There’s other people that are absolutely brilliant, and they’re not very successful.

So we’ve got to say, “Well, wait a minute. How is this happening?” They understand something about life. Now, there’s some people that are very well off and are brilliant. There’s some people that are not very smart and they’re in terrible shape. Should not make any difference what you’ve got. What makes a difference is what do you know. How do you understand? That’s why Solomon said, “In all you’re getting, get understanding.”

Well, the Thinking Into Results or the Lead the Field, either one of them is just going to transform a person’s perception of who they are and what they’re doing. And it’s going to put them on a beautiful path that’ll help them live the way they want to live. See, one of our great problems is we invest nothing in our own development. Now, I know you are. You wouldn’t be on this call. But the average person doesn’t. They think, “Oh, wow.” Well, why wouldn’t we learn something about ourself?

We have to learn something about a computer if we’re going to operate it. We have to learn something about our car if we’re going to drive it. We have to learn about anything that we want to take control over. Well, Thinking Into Results teaches you something about yourself.

Q:

Why did you want your kids to go to school?

A:

Well, first of all, when my kids started school, I had just been studying this for a short period of time. I think you learn things at school that you’re not going to learn outside. I don’t think school is gonna prepare for life properly, but I didn’t go to school. My kids did, because I wanted them to. But I didn’t tell them they had to go. I didn’t say they didn’t have to go. I just asked them where they were going to go and where they decided they were going to school. Because I think you develop a social intelligence in school that if you don’t go to school you won’t develop. That’s primarily why I wanted them to go.

Q:

I have a business idea, but I am leery to share it for worry that others might take it. Is this a normal feeling?

A:

Yeah, but it’s silly. I mean, listen, if somebody takes it just go and build another idea. I mean, I never concerned. I can compete with anybody. I don’t care if anybody wants to copy what I’m doing. There’s no competition. Amateurs compete. Professionals create. Just go ahead and make it happen in a big way. Get so far out in front nobody can catch you.

Q:

I try and coach people who are older than me through their problems. They do not always take me seriously because I am younger than they are. What is the best way to get these people to take my advice seriously?

A:

Well, I would tell them, “Listen, I think you and I’ve got a problem. I think you believe your seniority is giving you a wisdom that’s greater than mine. But the results would indicate that’s not true. So why don’t you forget my age and take a look at my results and listen to what I’m saying, because I can show you how to make things happen.” I remember, many years ago, I was working with the head person at a very big company, and he wanted to really change the company. And I told him, I said, “I can put on a seminar.”

So I said, “Get all your executives together, and I’ll put on a two-day seminar. We’ll really teach them something,” which he did. Well, there was one guy, he and I just were not communicating, and I could tell in the first meeting. So at the first break I went over and I said, “You and I just aren’t communicating, are we?” And he said, “No, I guess we’re not.” I said, “What do you think the problem is?” He says, “Can I be very candid with you?”

And I said, “Well, certainly.” We’re just on a coffee break, so it’ll probably save time.” He said, “I can’t understand how anyone who makes so many grammatical errors could teach me anything. I said, “Hell, I can help you there.” I said, “I didn’t go to school.” But I said, “I know things that school doesn’t teach.” I said, “What’s your goal?” His goal was to get a parking space under the building, because outside the building where they’d park it snowed and ice and everything, and his car would always be covered in ice when he went to get it.

So I said, “That’s your goal?” I said, “Listen. I can show you how to buy the whole damn building. Why don’t you sit down and pay attention to what I’m saying?” You’ve got to be candid with people sometimes. Hit them right in the nose. Age has got nothing to do with it.

Q:

Can you please share your first experience regarding changing your paradigm?

A:

Ray Stanford told me if I would do what he tells me, do exactly what he told me, that I could have anything I wanted. I really didn’t believe that.

But then he said, “Now, what do you really want?” All I wanted was some money. Well, he said, “How much money?” And I just said, “$25,000.” I mean, I might as well have said $25 million. I really didn’t believe I was going to get it. Well, he had me write it on a card, and he said, “Carry the card in your pocket.” That’s where the goal card that we hand out comes from. “Carry it in your pocket, and every time you touch it the sensory factor of touch is affected, that’ll send a message to your brain and it’ll activate the cells in your brain that have been impregnated with the picture of what you wrote on the card. Because when you write, writing causes thinking, thinking creates an image, and the image is impregnated into the cells in your brain.”

And so I wrote, “$25,000.” I didn’t believe it. I really didn’t believe it. But it happened. So I’m convinced you don’t even have to believe it to start. You have to believe it before you get it, but you don’t have to believe it to start. So write out what you want. You don’t have to believe it, but you’ve got to want it.

And what happened was, and although in retrospect, I didn’t realize this at the time but it was happening. I stopped thinking of debt and I started to think of earning money. Now, you’ll say, “Well, weren’t you thinking of that when you were in debt?” No, I was just thinking of debt. There’s a difference. And if you’re thinking of your debt, that’s what you’re going to get. That’s why I say having a goal of getting out of debt is a bad goal, because you’ll attract more of it. And I started to think of earning money, because when I started to think about it I heard people talking about it, because I could hear people talking about it, it caused me to think about it. So I got myself into a new cycle of thinking.

That was when the paradigm really started to shift. Now, at the time, I didn’t realize it, because I didn’t have somebody explaining what I’m explaining to you. I mean, Ray was just a motivational guy. I mean, he was an upbeat guy, and he’d just tell me to do things and I’d do them. He would just tell me to do what he thought would work. He didn’t explain it like I’m explaining it. Like, he hadn’t studied it for 50 years like I have. But he had studied enough to know that anyone can do better than they’re doing.

So looking back, that’s when the paradigm really started to change for me. And, you see, the view of it changing motivated me. I started to realize things were changing. I started to earn an extra few dollars a month, then it got up to $100 a month, pretty soon I was earning an extra $400 or $500 a month. God, I was only earning $400 to start with. Then, it got up to $15,000 a month before the year was out.

So, you see, the change was dramatic for me. It was really dramatic. So when somebody says, “Do you believe this?” Yeah, I believe it. I’ve got good reason to believe it.

Q:

I have a hard time deciding what to do in my life. I own a store and I am trying to change it. Should I go with something I love, or should I look at it as a business only?

A:

Well, listen, I don’t know what kind of story you have, but it certainly doesn’t sound like you love it anyway. You should go with what you love. Why go to … Let’s suppose you don’t love whatever you’re doing in the store. So you’ve got to go to a place you don’t love every day. I go to a place I do love every day. I have a wonderful business partner, and she saw it fit to build a studio, and I go to that studio every day. It’s a beautiful place, and I love it. I come here every day.

So that’s what you should do. You should go to a place you love every day. You should be doing what you love. If you have a hard time deciding what to do in your life, well, that’s what you want to do: ask yourself, “What do I really love doing?” And that’s what you should spend your life doing.

Now, you may not be able to start doing that tomorrow. I sat in Earl Nightingale’s office probably around 1965 or ’66, and I didn’t go to work with him until 1968. See, I loved what I was doing. I was cleaning offices, and I was cleaning a lot of them in Canada, the US and in England, but in looking back – I didn’t love cleaning offices. I would have been winning doing anything. It wouldn’t have mattered what it was. What I was doing was getting the cleaners excited about setting goals and living the kind of life they wanted to live. And I was really excited about doing that.

So I realized that it wouldn’t matter what I was doing. If I’d have been selling siding for houses, or windows, or selling cars, I would have loved it, because I was getting the people I was working with excited about what they were doing.

And when I sat in Earl Nightingale’s office, I felt like I was a young priest going to work with the Pope. I asked him when I was leaving his office, I said, “Earl, what’s the big deal? What is the secret?” And he says, “There isn’t any secret, Bob.” He said, “It’s a simple matter of sitting down, decide what you’re doing, and dedicate your life to it.” He said, “The problem with most people is they never decide what they love to do.” Well, I really got so charged right then, because I knew exactly what I loved doing. I wanted to do what he was doing, and I wanted to do it with him.

Now, I had to make a lot of changes. I had a pretty fast-moving, mature business. I couldn’t just walk away from it. But I knew I was going to walk away from it. I did get away from it – it just took me a bit of time. And I ended up doing what I loved doing with him.

So I know you may not be able to do it overnight, but if you sit down every day, you might do it every morning, get up early and ask yourself, “What do I really love doing?” And that’s what you want to do for the rest of your life.

Q:

In the Path to Agreement program it says, “Find out what your prospect wants and help them get it.” What should I do if I find that my prospect wants something that I do not have?

A:

Help them get it anyway. You’re there to help that person. You’re not there to get them to help you. Now, it would be nice if they can help you, but if you can help them … I have people that maybe wanted me to … but I can’t, and can I introduce them to them. I’ll say, “Sure.”

I don’t teach public speaking. Steve Siebold teaches public speaking. So I have people that come to me from time to time that would really like me to teach them how to do what I’m doing as a speaker. I don’t teach that. So I refer them to Steve. Steve always wants to give me something. I say, “I don’t want anything for it.” He says, “No, let me pay you.” “No, I don’t want it. I just want you to help the person.”

Your objective is just to fall in love with the idea of helping people, and if it leads you to help them in such a way you’re not going to get paid for it, that’s okay. Do it anyway.

The law looks after you. The Universe operates by law. When you put good out, it always comes back. It has to. That’s the law.

Q:

How do I decide what I want to do? I feel like I am forced into the work in business that I am currently doing.

A:

You should quit. You should quit. Say, “No more. I’m not doing this anymore.”

Listen, sit down and ask yourself … I’ve told this story many times on here because it’s the best one I’ve ever come across … That doesn’t mean you quit what you’re doing right now, but ask yourself, “What do I love doing? What would I really love doing?”

Now, Mykie and I have something in common. I don’t know if she’s ever thought about it, but she and I both sort of grew up in this business. She grew up in this business. She was just a kid when I met her, and she was working as a nanny. Now, she’s one of our senior executives. But she grew up in this business.

We sort of both grew up in this. So we’ve been very fortunate that we love what we do.

There was a woman that was obviously a pretty good-looking woman, pretty nice figure, because she was a dancer in a chorus line in Vegas. And you’ve got to have a pretty good figure and you’re going to be pretty good looking or you won’t get into chorus line as a dancer in Vegas. So she had the appearance going for her, and she was a pretty good dancer because she made it to the chorus line.

But she knew … And she enjoyed it. She liked dancing. But she knew she wasn’t good enough to be a star. And she knew she had to love what she was doing if she was really going to be a star. So she quit and she moved to France and she got a job working with pastry chefs, some of the best pastry chefs in the world. She loved baking pastries. She loved it, baking pastries.

When I watched her being interviewed, she was one of the world’s leading pastry chefs. She was still a very attractive woman, so I don’t know how long she’d been at it, but she quit what she was doing and went and started over, started just helping out as a helper to a pastry chef in France, and she became one of the world’s premier pastry chefs. That’s how you start doing what you love. You know?

Listen, just stop and think of that, of the wisdom … I was going to say “the logic”. It isn’t logic, it’s wisdom. Why would anybody spend the only life they have going to work every day at something they’re not really in love with? Why would a person do it? Well, they do it because they’re not thinking. They do it because they think they have to. And that is not true. If you start thinking, “Well, no, you don’t have to.” And you may have to start over, but what the heck.

I went from earning over $1 million a year. I took a job for $18,000 a year. Five years later, I was earning $33,000. I was prepared to pay them to let me work there. I just wanted to do this. I made that switch. And that’s what I suggest you do. Just keep asking yourself, “What do I really love doing?” And I don’t care if you have to start over. Start over. At lest you’re going to wake up in the morning knowing that you’re going to do what you love all day long. Great way to live.

Q:

I am $7,000 in debt, $1,000 per month expenditure and not earning at the moment. My experience is in online marketing and servicing accommodation properties. I am very hungry for success. Is it okay that my main focus is on money that I don’t have for starting a business or should I be focused on something else?

A:

No, that’s fine. You’re $7,000 in debt and you have expenses of $1,000 a month. You’re not earning anything. Well, you better be getting instructions from somebody that’s online. The Morrisons are very good at that, they run courses every now and then. Don’t let this debt scare you. First of all, it’s not very much. $7,000 is a little bit. You can knock that off in nothing flat when you get this business rocking.

The only way you can lose is to quit. You make up your mind, you will not quit. You get discouraged, you might get upset, but you will not quit. And if you have to borrow some money to keep it going, go borrow some money to keep it going. And you should be hungry for success, we all should be. Hungry for growth is what you’re talking about. Success is growth. Success is the progressive realization of a worthy ideal. You’re going somewhere and you’re going to keep moving in that direction. So make up your mind you’re going to do that.

You’re on the right track. Don’t feel bad about it. If you’re getting by on $1,000 a month, you’re doing very well.

Q:

Do you have any suggestions for someone that had a stroke recently, owes debt and works on a commission only basis? Their speech was impaired along with balance and writing abilities.

A:

Well, if their speech was impaired it’s probably in the left hemisphere of their brain they had the problem. First of all, what you want to understand is if a person’s had a stroke and they lose the use of any parts of their body and they can get it back through patterning. If you take and open a person’s hand and close it, open and close it, open and close it, open and close it. See what happens with a stroke, there’s a lack of blood going to the brain. The brain is the greediest part of the body when it comes to blood. If the brain doesn’t get the blood it’s like that, the brain cells die.

Now the brain is the electronic instrument that … It’s an electronic switching station. It sends messages. There’s brain cells sending messages to my hand to open and close my hand, so you see my hand opening and closing. Now, if those brain cells get killed, we can take, by opening and closing the hand, open and close it, this is done over quite a period of time, you finally send signals to healthy cells and you can educate them and pretty soon they will open and close the hand. That’s called patterning and it’s a relatively new idea, in the last 50, 60 years.

I had a grandfather that had a stroke, I didn’t know that, this was way back during the Second World War, and I was just a little kid. And he never did gain the use of his arm or leg back but he could have.

Now, your person that’s on commission that’s had the stroke, I’m really … They’re having trouble with their speech, that person is not in a good spot. I think what they want to really focus on is their health. I would get some information on that, on patterning.

Q:

How do I identify what it is that people want and need, develop an appropriate product and then get them to buy this product from me? What are the key steps and the most important things I need to keep in my mind?

A:

Well, how to identify what people want and need, that is the trick of life and marketing. Find out what they want, show them how to get it. That’s what we do. That’s our business. You should become a consultant with us, that’s what we teach people. That’s what our consultants do. Our good consultants do a great job. I think all our consultants are good, some of them haven’t learned how good they are yet.

Start paying attention. Start to pay attention. What do people want and need? And then you go ahead and make it. Find a need and fill it. That is a marketing success. Pay attention. What do you need? What do you want? You’re probably very much like the guy next door, he wants it too. So you come up with something that’s really good.

Look at this. I take this flipper out of here and I put it in my computer and then I can get 100 feet away boom, by flipping this I can flip slides on my computer. Do you know that this didn’t exist when I started in this business? Neither did the computer. Somebody figured all these things out.

I went from working on a chalkboard, then I started with flipcharts, then I started with acetate sheets and overhead projectors. These are all things that we needed, somebody come up with them. I’m buying them, I’m using them. That’s what you want to do.

Understand that you can, you have the ability to do this. You have a marvelous mind. Pay attention what people need.

Q:

What are the three most important things a new consultant should know to secure new clients?

A:

Well the first thing they should know is that everyone needs what we’ve got. Everyone. I don’t know anybody that doesn’t. I’ve been studying for 57 years. I need what we’ve got. I’m studying it all the time. They’ve got to understand that they’re quite capable of making a good presentation, but they’re not selling the program, they’re selling the benefits of the program. They don’t even need to have a program with them. They don’t even be talking about the program. What they’re talking about is the benefits of the program.

When I first started, it was all on records. I used to haul kinds of records into the place and I’d bring film in on a reel-to-reel movie projector to show them on film about what I was talking to them about. God, I almost crippled myself and drove them all away. I’d bring all kinds of programs in, I’d set them up. The people, they looking at them and they’d be thinking, “He’s going to sell those to us, or try to.”

And then I listened to Elmer Wheeler on a record. He was a great salesman. He said, “People don’t buy quarter inch drills because they want quarter inch drills. They buy quarter inch drills because they want quarter inch holes.” And he said, “Sell the sizzle, don’t sell the steak.” In other words, sell the benefits. So you want to talk to them about the benefits. Everybody wants what we’ve got. Build a conversation with people, and quit trying to sell them and try and help them.

Q:

What are the three most important things a consultant should know to be highly successful?

A:

They should know their product. They should be a product of their product. You know? They’ve got to be studying what they’re selling all the time. I’ve been studying it all my life, and I still study it all the time. I’m for ever preparing a presentation because I have to get the person’s attention. But I have to get them interested in what I’ve got.

Q:

I get ideas on how to improve my business all day long. How can I know what ideas are worth pursuing?

A:

Well if you’ve got them coming all day long, you know you’re probably not acting on any. Just take one and act on it. Get going. Sounds like you’re not working enough, you’re just thinking. And where you should think and act. If you’ve got a real good idea, you’ll feel it. It’s in harmony with you.

Q:

Can you explain when to coach and when to manage?

A:

Well they’re very similar if they’re done properly. Management is the development of people, it’s not the direction of things, and you want to do it in a very positive way. Coaching is helping a person see the power within them. So real coaching and real management is very similar. Most people think management is something different. That’s where the direction of things, that’s where you’re counting the numbers and you’re moving things. I see management as the development of people. That’s what coaching I see, too.

Q:

I want to be a successful PGI Consultant. How will I know if it is a path that I am capable of? I am not sure I can do it.

A:

Well you’re not sure if you can do it because you’ve never done it. If you want it, it’s in the want. If the want is strong, you’re going to be able to do it. You won’t want to do something you’re not capable of doing. The wants come from the heart, the soul. The soul’s forever seeking its awareness of its oneness without which is. It wants to grow and so it keeps jabbed you in the consciousness, want this, want that, and it’s by going after it that you develop yourself.

Q:

One thing is absolutely clear that I want to create a business, but which one? I have two or three options coming to mind. How do I choose what I really want to do out of these options?

A:

Ask what you feel the best about. Go by your feelings.

Q:

I’ve been involved in development programs from PGI, TIR, Brian, Tracy, Tony Robbins, and John Assaraf for some years now. The result of learning is very good and I am grateful for what I have achieved so far and confident I am going to achieve much more in the coming years. I recently joined BPC and have a goal of an amount of money I would like to achieve. I know it is possible, but how quickly can this happen and does this come from multiple sources of income? My current annual income is about $500,000 US, and I would like to be $5 million US in the same time frame. Is this asking too much?

A:

Not at all. Not at all. I think if you can earn half a million, you can earn 500,000 … or 500,000, you can earn five million. Not at all. How did you go from nothing to 500,000? You just follow the same process. Understand that $500,000 is the amount of money you receive for service that you rendered. The five million’s going to be for service, you just got to figure out how to provide more service. That probably will be through multiple sources. Almost all high-income people are receiving it through multiple sources.

Q:

Do mastermind group members have to be in the same field that I am in?

A:

Not at all. No. Sometimes it’s better they’re not. They’ll bring fresh perception of what you’re doing.

Q:

How do I best keep the right balance between things that are required to run my business and visioning and planning to grow my business?

A:

Well, you’ve got to act like the person you want to become. So you’re holding an image of everything you want in your mind as you’re working. You work as if you’re already there. That’s the way to do it.

Q:

I am trying to meet five people for TIR every day, but when I don’t know the person, I am feeling nervous. I don’t know how to face their negative responses. In this situation, what should I do?

A:

Keep going. Keep going. Understand their negative response is an expression of who they are. You do not let it affect you. They can’t reject you, they don’t know you. If they’re rejecting your idea, they’re rejecting the way you present the idea. Improve the way you’re presenting it.

Q:

How can I attract clients?

A:

See yourself with them.

Q:

I am a TIR Consultant and my question is what’s the highest return and most productive avenue for signing up clients? Is it webinars, seminars, or workshops?

A:

There’s not a real answer to that. That depends on you. Some people put on great webinars, some people put on great seminars, and some people put on great workshops. Some people are better one-on-one, just meeting with people and sitting down with them and talking to them, finding out what they want and then show them how to get it.

Children

Q:

What is the best, most effective way to teach little children these wonderful and valuable lessons? Also, how do we teach them about the workings of the mind, natural laws, and the creative process?

A:

How do you teach them how to get dressed? How do you teach them how to eat? How do you teach them how to talk? How do you teach them languages? Do you know that you can teach a kid four or five languages before they ever get to kindergarten? See, what we’ve got to understand is that a little child is in a little body, and they only lack experience and vocabulary. Outside of that, you can teach them anything. You can teach this to the little kids, but you’ve got to realize that they lack experience and vocabulary. That’s the only thing they lack.

Their mind is the same as your mind. There’s only one mind. There’s not two minds. There’s two different expressions of the mind. There’s multiple expressions of the mind. There’s one power, mind. Mind is the master power that molds and makes. Now, you see, when you’re dealing with a child, we let their size and their age dictate how much we can teach them, and that is wrong, and I think school has got us on that track. Madam Montessori put it very well. She says, “We send a little child to school as if they’re a cup, and we want the school to fill the cup up.” She says, “What they don’t understand is that the cup is already full. What we want to do is teach them how to bring it out of the cup.”

All knowledge, all power is 100% equally present in all places at the same time. You don’t get knowledge. You release it. Let me read it to you because we’re using it today. We’re working with it, so I wanted to make sure I had the wording perfect. “The missing link in all system of education known to civilization today may be found in the failure of educational institutions to teach their students how to organize and use knowledge after they acquire it.” He says, “Understand the real meaning of the word educate. The word is derived from the Latin, meaning to educe, to draw out, or to develop from within.”

“An educated person is not necessarily one who has an abundance of general or specialized knowledge. An educated person was one who has so developed the faculties of their mind that they may acquire anything they want, or its equivalent, without violating rights of others.” See, we’ve already got it. You can’t get knowledge. You’ve already got it. What you’re doing is becoming aware of what you’ve got. There’s perfection within you. Your spiritual DNA is perfect. You were created in God’s image. You’re God’s highest form of creation. People say, “Oh, I don’t believe that.” Well, then don’t. What are you going to believe?

You got to believe something, or you’re going to fall for anything. The truth is, we are loaded with power.

We’re wandering around like… If you just look at your hand, hold your hand in front of your face for a moment, there’s approximately 11 million kilowatt hours per pound of potential energy locked up in your electrons and the atoms of your body. You’re a walking dynamo. We have it all, so how do you teach the child the things I would teach you or teach somebody else? Expect them to get it, but keep in mind, the only thing they lack is experience and vocabulary, so you have to talk to them on their level of understanding. You know, I read where John Kennedy, when he was President of the United States, has his speeches prepared so a 10-year-old child would understand them. I think that was the work of a very wise man.

Q:

You refer to kids soaking everything into their subconscious mind. I have a 10 month old and work with students as young as two years of age. What specific strategies would you recommend could help optimize their paradigm to be more consciously aware as they grow up?

A:

Well, I always tell people if you’re working with kids what you’ve got to keep in mind is you’re working with the mind. The mind doesn’t know whether you’re two years old, or 22, or 102. The mind is totally wide open with a small child. When you’re talking to them talk to them the same as you would talk to me or anybody else just keep in mind the only thing they’re lacking is experience and vocabulary. So, you use words that they can understand and you don’t think that they’re operating with the same experience you are. So, you can take that into consideration. Children learn everything very fast. Look how fast they learn a language.

And if you’re living in some parts of the world it’s not uncommon where I have people that I work with who have kids that are three and four years old that speak four and five languages. They think nothing of that. Four and five languages is very common for a person to learn to speak at a early age in some parts of the world. Well, if they can learn it in some parts of the world they can learn it in all parts of the world because the mind operates the same way. So, that’s what you want to keep in mind with little kids. And you’re transferring images to them. When you get pictures in your mind it’s images that you’re transferring from your mind to their mind. Whatever you’re thinking that’s what you’re transmitting right into their brain, into their mind. So, think good thoughts. Think thoughts that are going to help them see what you want.

Q:

What would be the first step in helping kids identify their paradigms and combat the ones on the way? I see constant scrutiny that kids seem to face from adults trying to fix them.

A:

Well, I think if you’re working with kids, forget that they’re kids. They’re little people that have limited experience and limited vocabulary. And if you keep that in mind, understand their mind is the same as yours. There’s only one mind, there’s just many expressions of the same mind. And when you’re working with a child you just keep those things in mind and then communicate the same as you would to anybody else. Help them understand how the mind functions. They’ll understand it. They’ll learn many more complicated things.

Q:

What image should I help my children to plant in their subconscious to improve their grades?

A:

Have them see and get a blank report card from school and sit down and have them write their own report card. Get them to visualize it already finished and hold that image. That’s the report card they want. That’s what they want to receive.

Q:

Is there a typical age at when a child acquires his or her conscious mind? If so, what age does this occur?

A:

I don’t know the answer to that. I think it’s around three or four, something like that. You can start to tell when they become consciously aware of things. Watch a baby laying down and his hand goes past its eyes, and looking at it and trying to figure out what it is. And all of a sudden they realizes it’s their hand. When you watch the baby become aware, it’s rather interesting. That’s the conscious mind going to work. It’s an awareness being developed. It’s a beautiful thing to watch.

Dreams

Q:

Can our paradigms affect the dreams we have as we sleep?

A:

No I don’t think so.

Q:

When we sleep and dream, are our dreams a product of our conscious or subconscious mind? Do they tell something meaningful?

A:

That’s a good question. I read a couple of books on dreams but I’m certainly not an expert. I believe dreams are prophetic. I think it’s the working of the subconscious. I think it has something to do with the ideas you were thinking about when you went to sleep but I really don’t know. Go get a good book on dreams.

Q:

What is the difference between a dream and a vision?

A:

Well a dream is something that you’re circulating around in your head. Something you’re toying with. Might be doing it, you might not. A vision is a long range projection of a lot of things you want to do. You have a vision of your life. If you could see a funnel. It starts with the little tiny end in your forehead and as it goes over it gets wider, and wider and wider. This would be the graphic illustration of your vision. In that vision are all the beautiful things you want to have or be. You understand you’ve got it before you can do it or have them. You see it. Your goal is taking a bite of that vision. And then getting mostly involved, that’ll become the dream.

Q:

Belief must fuse with our goals and dreams. Can you please elaborate on this?

A:

Well when you believe, you’re on the frequency that your goal is on. Understand nothing is created or destroyed, ever. Everything’s already here. The way to create the cellphone has always been here, we just weren’t aware of how to do it, but when we moved our mind on to that frequency, the phone, the manifestation of it was the result. That’s the same with planes, and trains, and cars, and houses, and clothes, and everything else. So you’ve got to see yourself already in position of the good that you desire. When you do that, you move on to the frequency that your good is on. Everything operates on a frequency and that’s when you start to attract it.

Q:

After spending time visualizing my dream life, I find myself thinking of my dream life and what it would be like. Would you say this is an over-kill?

A:

Not at all. It’s good advice. I think it’s a good thing to dream.

Emotions and Fear

Q:

Please explain how to get emotionally involved with an idea.

A:

Get a hold of the book The Art of Acting by Stella Adler. Stella Adler was a great method acting teacher. Marlon Brando was one of her students. He wrote the forward to the book. Stella Adler never actually wrote a book -a man named Kissel took all her lessons, her acting lessons, and turned it into a book after she passed on.

So, when you read The Art of Acting you’re going to her acting classes. She teaches you how to get emotionally involved with ideas. If you watch great actors they get you emotionally involved with ideas. They will make you laugh. They’ll make you cry. They get you scared. They really get you involved.

You let yourself get emotionally involved. It’s an acting technique. Become a great actor. Shakespeare said, “All the world is a stage.”

Q:

How do I become less sensitive and less emotional?

A:

Quit worrying about what other people think of you. First of all it’s none of your business what other people think of you. Quit worrying about what people think. Don’t worry about being less emotional, being emotional is a good thing. Quit being less sensitive. Don’t take everything everybody says as gospel. Some of them don’t even know what they’re talking about. It doesn’t matter what they say, you say I don’t care what you think, I know I’m a nice person and know you’re a nice person. Keep things outside of you. Don’t internalize them so fast.

Q:

For the past few days I have been stressing out about how I can shift my energy and act like the person I want to become. What can I study or practice to help with the control of my emotions?

A:

Get the book, The Art of Acting by Stella Adler. It’s a great book. Stella Adler was a great method acting teacher. She was Marlon Brando’s teacher, in fact he wrote a forward in the book. Marlon Brando was the first actor to hit super stardom through method acting. Well, study her book. Now, she never actually wrote a book but after she passed away a man named Kissel took all of her lessons and turned it into a book. And so, when you read her book you’re actually going to her classes. And she will show you how to act like the person you want to become. And that’s really what we have to do. It’s a great book. I study it a lot myself and I have for years.

Q:

How do I deal with my emotions while going through all of the stages of a loss, denial, anger, acceptance? The law of nonresistance/increase, it feels contradictory, and is it okay to feel angry?

A:

It’s okay to feel angry, it’s not a good idea to stay that way. Loss, denial, anger, acceptance, let it go. There’s a three step approach. Michael Beckwith gave us this. “When anything happens in your life it is what it is, accept it. It’s either going to control you or you’re going to control it. That’s the first step.” It is what it is, accept it. It’s either going to control you or you’re going to control it. Number two, harvest the good. There’s something good about it, harvest the good. And number three, forgive all the rest. Forgive means to let go of completely, abandon anger. Now, let me repeat the whole thing. When anything happens in your life it is what it is accept it. It’s either going to control you or you’re going to control it. Number two, harvest the good. Look for the good, there’s good in everything. And number three, forgive all the rest, let it go, totally abandon.

Q:

How can we match another person’s frequency?

A:

Visualizing. That’s what love is called in the same frequency. When two people are in love, they’re both interested in the same ideas from an intellectual perspective or consciously. They’re both emotionally involved with the same idea, and they have a great physical relationship. That’s resonance. That’s when they’re both on the same frequency. I think you get on the other person’s frequency when you’re thinking of them. You’re giving them good thoughts, sending good energy their way. We don’t do enough of that.

Q:

How do I get to the point where I am super emotional about my goals?

A:

Well, that’s a good question. In fact, that’s a real good question. We don’t have any trouble getting super emotional if we’re hurt. Let’s suppose you catch your hand in a car door or something like that, or let’s suppose you hit your thumb with a hammer. Boy, you’re going to squeal and whine like a pig. I mean, you’re really going to have a tough time. And you don’t have any trouble getting emotionally involved with that. Instantly we’re emotionally involved with something like that. If it’s something good, we don’t seem to get emotionally involved with it.

You’ve got to be it. Get Stella Adler’s book, The Art of Acting. You’ve got to act like you’re already there, you’ve already got it. That’s what actors do. Watch them. They’re so good at it. They live the part. They take a script and they read it, and then they reread it, and then they reread it, and they keep rereading the script until they get to the point where they’ve memorized it. Then, they internalize it, then they become it. You’re watching them on TV or in a movie, they’ll get you upset, they’ll make you cry, they’ll make you laugh, they’ll get you angry. That’s because they’re emotionally involved. They’ve become it. You’ve got to become it. That’s how you get emotionally involved.

Q:

What is your advice on dealing with jealous people? Every time I tell a coworker of mine that I’m doing something she wants to do it, too.

A:

Jealousy is afraid of losing something you don’t have. You might write that down. It’s a very good definition. Somebody taught me that a long time ago: “Jealousy is being afraid of losing something you haven’t got.” It’s a sickness.

You know, in Emerson’s essay on Self Reliance, Ralph Waldo Emerson, he wrote, “There will come a time in every person’s education when they’ll realize envy is ignorance and imitation is suicide.” Now, he said “envy is ignorance”. That’s a form of jealousy. That’s like me looking at the results Mykie’s getting and I’m going to be envying her. “I wished I was Mykie. God, I wished I was her. I envy her. I’m jealous of her.” Well, what am I really saying? I don’t know that Mykie has used her marvelous mind and an infinite power that flows to and through her to get the results she’s getting.

I too have those magnificent mental faculties. That same power flows through me. If Mykie can do it, I can do it: same power. Well, envy is ignorance. It’s saying, “I don’t understand that.” That’s saying, “Mykie’s been favored by some emotional or capricious god.” Or, “Mykie’s got talent and ability I don’t have,” which isn’t true.

See? Ignorance. Envy is ignorance. And he said “imitation is suicide”. Trying to be like somebody else is a dumb game. You can’t be like anybody and you shouldn’t want to be. You’re unique. There’s nothing on the face of the Earth that’s like you. You want to celebrate your own uniqueness: “Wow! I am the only expression of life like me in the whole Universe.” That’s pretty nice. And so is the next person you’re talking to.

Q:

In psycho cybernetics, M. Maltz points out mistakes people make by habitually interpreting the feeling of excitement right before an important event as fear and anxiety, on page 243. How do we distinguish them?

A:

Well … fear’s not necessarily a bad thing. You can easily get them mixed up. You have to ask; is this move going to serve me? Is it going to improve the quality of my life? And ask yourself if you’ve ever done it before. If you haven’t, you’re going where you’ve never been, that’s going to cause some emotional upheaval. But that doesn’t mean you shouldn’t do it and you could very easily get, you know, excitement or enthusiasm and fear mixed together because they’re emotional states. But ask yourself is where I’m going, going to serve me? Is it going to improve the quality of my life? If it is, then you continue, you go ahead.

Q:

I frequently experience the terror barrier. What exercises can I practice when my positive thoughts are affected by doubt and fear?

A:

When you face the thing you fear, fear will leave you. Don’t run from fear, step into it. Say, I’m not going to let this control me. Understand that both faith and fear demand that you believe in something you cannot see. So I think I choose the faith over the fear every time.

Q:

How do I become emotionally involved to nourish my vision?

A:

Become an actress or an actor. Get the Art of Acting by Stella Adler, study the book. That’s what actors do. They take a script and they live it, and that’s what you want to do. Build a script in your mind and then live it the way you want to live. Watch the actors, watch them on television or in a movie; they’ve got very, very good. They’ll make you laugh, they’ll make you cry. I mean it’s just beautiful watching how they operate, and it’s all somebody wrote a script and they’re living it. They read it, they reread it, they write it, they rewrite it, they read it, they imagine it, and pretty soon they become it. That’s what you want to do.

Q:

I am fearful of the unknown. I feel that I will not have an answer to a problem or a situation. How do I trust and believe that it will be okay?

A:

All you have to do is look back in yourself and you’ve done it fine up until this point so there’s not reason to think you’re not going to in the future. Everybody is fearful of the unknown. The unknown is ignorance. Ignorance causes fear. But you know that if you just keep marching off into that darkness you’re going to turn out all right. You’ve got to keep going in the direction you want to go. You’re going to be living in the future so quit telling yourself that you’re not going to handle those problems, it’s no problem at all. What you’ve got to do is change your perception of your situation. Look at it differently. Ask yourself how would Proctor look at this.

Family

Q:

My dad is going through some dealings with the family that are uncooperative, demanding, and threatening. I have given advice of what I know in my limited understanding of the principles but I would like a deeper perspective on what he should do, whether he gives in to the demands or stands his ground on what he feels are false accusations against him.

A:

Absolutely never give in to demands if you figure they’re false accusations. I don’t care if it’s family or strangers. Hold your ground.

Q:

What would you say to someone who wants to live a life of adventure, traveling the world, but fears missing out on important things at home with their immediate family?

A:

I’d tell them to grow up. Listen, I was running around Brazil when I was 17. I enjoy my family, all my family, but I have lived all over the world. I’ve lived in England. I’ve lived in Los Angeles. I’ve lived in Florida, in Atlanta, and Kuala Lumpur, Chicago. Get out there. Expand your mind. You will have more to give to your family when you are around them.

It’s a self image concept. It has nothing to do with your family. You’re comfortable there. You’ve got to stretch.

Q:

I have two little children and I want to mold this information into them. How can I go about this? I am finding it hard to focus on my dreams and make sure that they have this knowledge. Any suggestions?

A:

Quit saying you’re finding it hard to focus on your dreams. Right now, your focus should be to earn sufficient money to set up your own place. And you’re going to teach your children what you do. You’re teaching them to be dependent. The children learn what we do.

There’s a poem that says I’d rather see a sermon than hear one any day. I’d rather one would walk with me than merely show the way. Get out there and make it happen. The kids are going to become an extension of you. Become really responsible… make a commitment that you’re going to make it happen now. Not next week, not tomorrow, now.

Q:

My client is married and wants a relationship that she is not certain she can get from her husband. How closely should her goal be tied to her husband?

A:

Well, her goal shouldn’t be tied to anybody. Your goal is your personal growth, and another person is not responsible for your growth. You’re responsible for your growth. She may not get what she needs from her husband to reach her goal. She doesn’t have to. You can get it from a number of different sources. You get stuff from people you work with.

Q:

My dream is to travel around the world by myself. I feel guilty that I am unable to bring the kids with me, they need to attend school. Is this okay to do?

A:

Anything is okay to do if you think it’s okay. Nothing is good or bad except your thinking makes it so. If your children are being taken care of well and you’re going to travel around the world, you’re going to expand your mind. You’re going to come back and then you’re going to share that with your kids, so the kids will benefit from it.

Q:

As I go through Bob Proctor Coaching, I have been making changes, forming new habits and new thoughts. How would you suggest I interact with my partner, close friends, and family? They all seem to think that I am acting weird.

A:

Well, that’s something you’re just going to have to live with because they don’t know what you’re doing, and they will think that. A lot of people thought I was crazy. I mean, some of the things I did, as I look back – I’ll give you an example. I was on the fire department. That was the best job I ever had, and it was very difficult job to get. I was fortunate that I got on. I quit to go and wash floors – to clean offices. Everybody thought I was out of my mind. The chief called me in every day, and said, “You know, Bob, you can’t come back if you leave.” I was the second person since 1934 to quit. Everybody thought I had lost it.

Then I built that business up, and it was real big, and I quit. I was earning hundreds of thousands of dollars a year. I quit and took a job for $18,000. Again, they thought I was right out of my mind. Five years later, I was earning $33,000. I quit to go to work with Earl Nightingale because he was the best in this business. I was prepared to pay them to let me work there, but each time I made a move, everybody outside of my immediate family, thought I had lost my mind. So, as you start changing, they’re not adapting to the change as you are. You just have to understand where they’re coming from. They don’t understand. They’re not studying what you’re studying. They don’t see life the way you see it.

Your perception’s changed, and that’s what your… Your life is going to change, and it’s not an easy thing to do. They’ll criticize you. They’ll go, “Oh, you’re crazy.” I mean, if you could just see what I went through, and still do from time to time, I’ve just got to the point where what other people think really doesn’t matter. First of all, Terry Whittaker wrote a book, Terry Cole- Whittaker. You might look it up. It’s an older book. What you think of me is none of my business. You’ve got to get to the point where you don’t care what other people think. You want to be very concerned with what you think, because we do become what with think about. I think you’re on the right track. Just keep going.

Q:

My life is full of doubt, and my family does not support my decisions. How do I reassure myself that I am doing the right things?

A:

Well, you ask yourself, “Am I doing the right thing,” and be quiet. Listen to the little voice within, and if you know you’re doing the right thing, it doesn’t matter what anybody else says. You can do it in spite of your family. It doesn’t matter whether they support you or not, and don’t argue with them. They’re entitled to be as wrong as they want. You’re just not going to let them control you. My whole family, thought I was right out of my mind, but you know something? There was a book written by my whole family, and they were all saying how I’ve inspired them and changed their life. This is over 50-some years, but I just got to a point where the only thing I would listen to is my coach, or Think and Grow Rich, the book, that’s all. And I didn’t care what anybody else thought.

You got to get to a point where you don’t care what anybody else thinks. What you’ve got to be very concerned with is what you think, because it’s what you think that’s going to make the difference. You need to be strong. Winning is not an easy thing. 3% of the population make it. 97% seem to be wandering in the desert. So, the odds of you getting a whole group of people supporting you is rather slim. You don’t need the support. You’ve got enough power within you. You’ll Never Walk Alone, listen to that song over a few thousand times.

Q:

How do I fit everything into my day? I’m going through a divorce, single mother of two children, ages 10 and 12. One child is special needs. I work full-time and every minute of my day is booked. I am very dedicated to studying all the materials in this Bob Proctor coaching course. I have no leisure time and only sleep about five to six hours per night. Anything you can suggest?

A:

Well, how do you fit everything into your day? First of all, you can’t manage time. You can only manage activities. If you’re going through a divorce, you’ve got to learn to balance your emotions, because divorce and death are two of the most stress filled things, and that’s because you’re breaking so many habits all at once and you’re not necessarily breaking them through choice. It’s the divorce that’s caused the habits all to break. So, that’s going to cause a little stress and you will work through that. It’ll pass. You’ll get past that.

You want to find time when the kids are sleeping to study this. And what that’s going to do, it’s going to help you maintain some semblance of balance. It’s important that you have time for you. I mean, it’s important you have time for the kids, certainly it is. But it’s also important that you have time for you, and you’ve got to realize that regardless of what’s going on, you can bring your life under control and you can keep balance. Conditions or circumstance don’t make you, you make them, and so let’s deal with what we’ve got, where we are, and we’re going to make the best of it. If you set aside a time, I think you can find an hour. You’re probably doing things that don’t have to get done in the time you’re doing it, so I just couldn’t buy into the idea that every minute of your time when you’re awake is taken up, because I don’t believe that.

There’s stuff that you’re doing that you could get done through neglect. You don’t even have to do them. Take the time to study this for at least 45 minutes and it will help you through all of what’s going and I’m going to tell you, you can end up in a very beautiful place. I saw my mother do that, so I know it can happen.

Q:

How should I handle family and others that do not see the value in these materials? They all believe that I am crazy for making a change in my life.

A:

Well, of course their opinion really doesn’t make any difference. It’s your opinion that makes a difference. And you want to ask them what kind of results are they getting? And, you’ve got to step out and bet on yourself regardless of what they think. When I first started everybody in our family thought I was out of my mind. I was on the fire department and I read Thinking About Rich and I was going to quit the fire department and go on to get a job. I was going to start my own business cleaning offices. Everybody told me I was crazy. The fire department called me everyday and said, “Bob are you sure you know what you’re doing? You can’t come back you know.” One person since 1934 had quit. No one quit that job and they couldn’t fire you. And I only worked seven days and seven nights a month and I could sleep all night. They had beds in the fire hall. And I quit to go and clean offices. They all told me I was crazy.

Within a year I had 10 percent of the fire department personnel cleaning offices for me. In under five years I was cleaning offices in Toronto, Montreal, Boston, Cleveland, Atlanta, London, England, and earning over a million dollars a year. And most of the people that told me I was crazy came to work for me. Quit letting your family and friends persuade you. If you’ve got a dream fall in love with your dream and you keep on going. And if they all think you’re crazy then you probably know you’re on the right track.

Q:

How can my wife and I best support each other as we go through the coaching program?

A:

Well, I think if you’re both in it you discuss it. What you hear is not going to be what your wife hears and what your wife hears probably isn’t going to be what you hear. Don’t listen to hear though listen to understand, there’s a difference. So, she will get some ideas and you’ll get some. Start to discuss back and forth what each one of you are learning and share your experience.

Q:

Why is it easier to control anger with others but not so easy with my family?

A:

Because you made it that way. Change your attitude on that. Every time you feel like getting angry with your family whatever member it is have two or three things that you really admire about that member of your family, two or three things. And when you start to get angry focus on those two or three things. You won’t get angry. Turn that into a habit.

Q:

My daughter is going back to school this month. She is in seventh grade. I homeschool her an am required to give her a balanced education in all subjects. How can I be the best teacher for her?

A:

Do the best you can everyday. Just make up your mind everyday. “I’m going to do the best I can.” And start doing the best you can. Ask yourself two or three times a day. Put a little note around in different places. “Am I doing the best I can do?” That’s the only way you can do it.

Q:

Experts suggest that one of the best ways to care for our loved ones is to listen to them attentively when they’re expressing their concerns to us. We do not necessarily need to offer help. At this time I am working on raising my level of consciousness and vibration. How can I do both effectively? Can I listen and help?

A:

Absolutely. See what you want to do, don’t listen to hear listen to understand. When you understand where they’re coming from you can help them. If you’re operating from a higher level of conscious awareness you can help them. If you’re operating from a lower level of conscious awareness you are not able to help them. You’re probably operating from a higher level so you can help them but listen to them carefully and understand where they’re coming from. You don’t judge them and you don’t criticize them. You listen carefully and then you attempt to help them.

Q:

Most people prioritize family over their dreams. Can you elaborate on what you think of that? Is providing for your family our ultimate purpose?

A:

Providing for your family is your ultimate purpose, yeah, but if you don’t look after your dreams, you’re not going to look after your family very well. I know some people spend a lot of time with their family, but they don’t do anything of any consequence because they don’t have any dreams. You know? I think you have to have dreams and you have to have great goals, and just by virtue, the fact that you’re doing it you’re setting an example for your family.

Q:

How can my parents get my 16-year-old brother to listen to them and respect their rules?

A:

Find out what the 16-year-old brother wants and help them get it. Help him get what he wants. Him sit down and build a goal, try and help him.

Q:

When you start to achieve big results, how do you handle family members that you love who become resentful and passive aggressive? These are people who don’t take action to improve, yet they act as though they do.

A:

I’m going to read you something. There was a woman that came to the seminars and she was a very attractive woman. She was a model, an actress, and she would go out to get a part and she got it and somebody else didn’t, they didn’t treat her very nice. There was a friend of her dad’s by the name of Hep, and she talked to him about it. This is a letter he wrote:

Dear Ann, once upon a time there was a fellow by the name of Al Capp who wrote a comic strip called Li’l Abner. That was very big a number of years ago in the comics. Many years ago, he had some characters in his strip who lived in a town near Dogpatch. They were town bums, the ne’er-do-wells, the failures whose whole aim in life was to pass judgment on others. Their criticism and ridicule became so vehement that in time, the rest of people in the town became acutely conscious of it. The boys down at the stable, as they were called because that’s where they spent most of their time, soon set the social standards of the whole town. Nobody can do anything without their sanction. Because they lived within the structure of their crummy little world, they would laugh and point their fingers at anyone and everyone who tried to be better than he was. As a result, the people feared the ridicule of the boys down at the stable so much so that they stopped trying. Soon everybody became bums and the whole town died.

In every social structure, Ann, whether it be family, town, country, or state, there are the boys down at the stable. The jealous ones. They’re too scared to try something different and they show their ignorance by laughing at those who do. Learn to recognize them, Ann, for what they are. Don’t let them hurt you. It takes a certain amount of toughness to succeed. Once you rise above those who would tear you down so they can laugh and say I told you so. There are too many of us who love you and want you to make it. I put myself at the top of the list. You’re not going to fall flat on your face as they would have you, you’re going to do a superb job. Remember, this show is only one small step in the direction of greater things you will do, many of which are beyond your wildest dreams. All you have to do is want.

One of the things I like about you best is you always give it Hell for try. The show will be a success because of you and others like you try. There are only winners in the cast. The losers are gathered down at the stable laughing and hoping for your failure. If we can dig down deep inside of them, I’m sure we’d find that they want to win also but are too scared to try. And they attempt to cover up their own failures as human beings by laughing at others. In a sense, I’m sorry for them. Their guilt must make them very unhealthy people. There’s your answer.

Goals, Success and Affirmations

Q:

As a Thinking Into Results Consultant, the people I have enrolled into TIR, has posed a challenge for me, as some of them are not using the program. Any advice on how to enroll them successfully?

A:

Don’t see this as a challenge … see it as an opportunity. It’s how you start them in it. If I were starting them I would say, “Listen … you’re going to have to start doing things that you haven’t done in the past. In other words, you’re going to form a new habit.” Now, in forming this new habit it’s not necessarily easy. It’s simple, but it’s not easy because you just haven’t formed the habit yet. You’ve got to study the same lesson every day for a couple of weeks, a couple of times a day. What you’re attempting to do is to get your mind working the way the video suggests. You’re switching, you’re changing your habitual way of thinking and that is essential if you’re going to change the results. In other words, if you want to earn more money, you’ve got to start training your mind to see money as a reward received for service rendered and you have to see yourself very good at it. That takes repetition, but you can do it. You’ll lay that on the line to your people, when you’re starting them with it. If they’re not doing it, get them on the phone and say, “Listen, let’s lay it on the line. You’ve spent the money, you’ve invested in this. Now, not using it is being foolish. It’s almost being childish.”

Then remind them, “The problem is you are not in the habit of using it. You’ve got to get in the habit. I want to help you. Let you and I make a commitment to one another that we’re going to do this come hell or high water, we’re going to do it!” Lay it on the line with them, be honest with them.

Q:

Is my life’s purpose statement supposed to be my primary C goal or can it be something else?

A:

No, your goal is not your purpose. Your purpose is your reason for getting out of bed in the morning. Your purpose is your reason for living. The goal is the reason you have the purpose. I want you to visualize that. Purpose comes first. That’s why you are alive. You have a purpose. It’s really obvious what my purpose is. My purpose is to help people stretch their mind, become aware of who they are. Now that’s the purpose. Then, the vision, there’s a long range, you could see a funnel coming from your forehead right out and the further it goes, the wider it gets. The vision is the multiplicity of things you want to accomplish that are all on purpose. All these beautiful concepts that you see in your mind, is your goal taking a bite out of your vision. That’s what the C goal is. That’s the first target and when you get there, you just go after one of the other concepts in your mind that are in that purpose, in that vision.

Q:

Are affirmations just goals without expectations or accomplishments dates?

A:

No, affirmations are positive statements from yourself to yourself. I always begin them with, “I’m so happy and grateful now that… “I’m so happy and grateful now that money comes to me in increasing quantities through multiple sources on a continuous basis. I’m so happy and grateful now that I’m becoming more aware of the perfect power that resides within me and how to use it. I’m so happy and grateful now that I’m attracting more interesting, dynamic, creative people in my life.” That’s how successes come into our life, it’s through these affirmations.

Q:

I have established two main goals. While I was working on the first one, it appears that it will take a long time to get. Due to the details of my first goal, I divert my attentions to my second goal which is opening my own company. The business should be bringing in my desired income, but it could complicate my first goal. As a result, I am feeling that I have the attitude of taking no action. What would you do in this case?

A:

I would go after one goal, establish that goal. Opening your own company may be a step in that direction. When Ed Hillary went to the top of Mount Everest, before he got to the top, he had to get to base camp. There are steps you take. If you’ve got a challenge in front of you, take a look at those lines on the note pad, and about three or four lines up from the bottom, place an X. I just did that on a pad and say, “That’s where I am.” Your C goal is way up near the top. You put a star up near the top. Now, each one of these lines represent a level of awareness. The only thing that separates you from the star, from your goal, is the level of conscious awareness that you require to get it. Nothing’s created or destroyed. Everything’s already here, if not in one state, in another. What we have to do is raise our level of consciousness up to that higher level.

Well, on each line or each level of consciousness, greater good is going to come into our life. These are new accomplishments. As we raise our consciousness, all the good on that level of consciousness comes to us. Opening the goal may be one step. Then, you have other steps and other steps. The one step isn’t going to stop each level of consciousness. The other one level is going to help you reach the next. Don’t question it. Just know it. You don’t know how you’re going to get to the C goal. You only know you’re going to get there. You don’t have to know how. You only have to know you will.

Q:

I was forced by outside circumstances to diminish studying Thinking Into Results. Can I still achieve the success I aim for?

A:

Absolutely, I’ve been forced by outside circumstances to change my study habits many, many times, but that never stopped me from studying. First of all, you’re in control of the circumstance. You don’t let the circumstance control you. Now, I don’t know what the circumstances are, they’re obviously personal, and that’s fine. That’s the way you should keep it but understand the circumstances don’t control you, you control them. Napoleon said, “Circumstance, hell, I make them.” George Bernard Shaw, great playwright, said, “People are always blaming circumstance for where they are.” He explains, “I don’t believe in circumstance. The people who get on in this world are the people who got to look for the circumstance they want. If they can’t find them, they make them.”

Now, I don’t know what the circumstances are, but if you have chosen to let them diminish your TIR, your study time, that’s okay, but still study. Do it at a different time, a different way, but do it. Just don’t stop studying.

Q:

My persistent desire is to be a philanthropist. I feel there is a lot of money to donate through this. Does this count as a goal if I clarify and envision it?

A:

Yeah, listen, philanthropy is giving, start with what you’ve got and give. You don’t have to give a lot, give a little. If you haven’t got any money, give up your time, give a smile, but start to see yourself as a philanthropist. I’ve been a philanthropist for a long time. I was a philanthropist when I didn’t have any money. Don’t see philanthropy as something, where you’ve got to be a billionaire or a multi-millionaire, something like that. Philanthropy is a philosophy. It’s a concept that I would suggest you adopt and incorporate into your life. If spirit tells me to give, I even give to some of these hobos on the street periodically, not often because I think most of them should be working, but every now and then, spirit says, “Give them something.” I may give them a 100 bucks. I’m a big tipper. I like seeing the energy change in a person. Start giving, be a giver. Jane Willhite’s company, PSI seminars, they teach Givers Gain, I love that Givers Gain.

Let me expound further on this. I wouldn’t see philanthropy as a goal. I see philanthropy as a self-image. I see philanthropy as a way of life. I don’t think it’s something you work towards. I think it’s something you are. Be generous. I have a reputation of being a generous person. Generosity is a wonderful thing, it’s giving. Willingly give and graciously receive. My mentor Val Van De Wall taught me that.

Q:

How do I keep my persistence and motivation up on a consistent basis?

A:

Just believe you do. I am a persistent person when I make up my mind about something. Nothing will stop me. You must keep your motivation up.

I’m motivated the second I wake up in the morning. I want to make things happen. Start to see yourself that way. Don’t think that persistence and motivation is something you have to keep up. You become known being persistent, being the motivator. Be that person where people say that you make them feel good. Other people don’t know what it is about you, but you always have a smile on your face. It’s just like good music, great energy. See yourself that way.

Q:

Is it okay to set completion of the BPC Program my goal? I feel if I do this, I will attract more of the little goals in my life and quality of life that I seek as opposed to making one of those the goal.

A:

Yes, you could if that’s your objective, but I would make it a very successful completion with a lot of good things, nothing but good things are going to happen because you are really taking it serious. For the next whatever number of months, you’re going to bury yourself into this. You’re going to do everything you’re capable of doing. Now, if you’re finding that there’s too much, we’re asking you to do too much at one time and some people do find that they slow down. Don’t go at the speed we suggest. Go at the speed you want to go. But, you’re going to make it a solid study. That could be the goal. Not the best goal, but it’s a good one.

Q:

What do you recommend I do if I am not sure what my big goal is? I can’t act towards it and it’s causing confusion.

A:

Well, of course, it’s causing confusion. There’s no target. You’ve got nothing but a hodgepodge of ideas, flying across the screen of your mind. Quit telling yourself that you can’t set a big goal. You can set a big goal. You can set it just as easy as I can, anyone can. I believe your problem is that what you want comes to your mind but, because you don’t know how to get it, you reject it. If you can think it, you can do it. Get away from this jazz that you’re not sure what your big goal is. Become sure of it, make a decision. An American General said, “Make a decision, if it’s wrong, well, you can always change it.”

Q:

I have two young children, one and three years of age. I want to teach them the information I’ve been learning. Where should I start? We listen to affirmations, my son’s favorite every morning.

A:

Look at your children the same way you look at adults. Quit thinking they’re children. They’re marvelous minds and I’m going to tell you something, at one and three, their mind is like an open cup. You can put anything in it you want. You can fill the cup up with earth. You can put flowers in it. You can throw butter in it. Their mind is wide open. Quit thinking they’re little children. Now, the only thing they lack that you’ve got is experience and vocabulary. Use a vocabulary that they will understand and you keep in mind the awareness that they have, but listen, they can learn so fast. Our problem is we think, “Well, they’re just little kids, I’ve got to slow down.” Speed up. Their mind is wide open. They’re like the earth, you can plant anything in it and it will return whatever you plant. See them as geniuses. See them as brilliant, wonderful expressions of life.

Q:

Is the following the correct way to create a picture of my goal? I see myself sitting at my desk, in my new home, writing programs or on calls for my PGI clients. Any recommendations?

A:

Well that’s an image of working towards your goal. What is the end result? You see yourself with a great list of clients, eager to learn. You see all your clients eager to learn. You’re eager to learn and I’m anxious and enthusiastic about helping you. You get anxious and enthusiastic about helping your clients. Anxious is the wrong word. You get enthusiastic, you really get into the spirit of it. You see yourself doing that and helping your clients. When I’m in my studio, I’m in the most magnificent place I’ve ever been in. I can broadcast all over the world from here. I can literally stream. I had some people in here from a TV station. I said, “It’s sort of like a little TV station.” The TV station representative said, “No Bob, it is a TV station.” I built a TV station in my back yard. There’s about a 1,000-1,200 square feet. Scott, my studio director was a guy that set a goal of working with me. He lived in Manchester, England. He started when he was 13 and he’s now 24 and he does work with me. I used to sit under an umbrella in my backyard and visualize this place. I’m in it now, so it’s a good way to do it.

Q:

What are the six best goal achieving activities for someone to do daily to become a TIR consultant?

A:

Every night, sit down and think of your goal and think of six goal achieving activities you can do when you wake up. I would suggest you start calling on people. If you are a TIR/PGI Consultant, see yourself as a very successful one with a list of happy, growing clientele. Start calling on people. Make appointments to go and sit down with them. Personal contact is the key to success.

Q:

Can you please expand upon what you mean by ‘Stay in the vibration of your goal.’ Do you have a special number or word or cue to really understand being in tune with your personal goal?

A:

Well, you’re in tune with your goal when you have that idea and you’re enthused about it. When you’re enthused about your goal, you are in the vibration. You see, the good that you desire is already here. Nothing is created or destroyed. Well, if nothing’s created or destroyed, everything’s already here, if not in one state, certainly in another. What we have to do is get into harmony with the good we desire. We want to get on the frequency of that goal. We do that when we see ourself with it and let that picture infiltrate every cell of our being.

Q:

Once I set my goal, how long do I continue doing visualization exercises? Are there any techniques you can recommend for when I have difficulty visualizing?

A:

Well, quit saying ‘you have difficulty’. Don’t even think you have difficulty. If you’re having some difficult times, it’s because your mind is busy on something else. You’ve got to stop and understand you are in charge of you. If you’re having difficulty, there’s confusion in your mind. Sit down, relax and say, “Peace,”… be still, be calm. See an energy flowing in through the crown of your head and it’s circulating through your whole being and you are totally relaxed. Then, start to let the picture come on the screen of the mind. You’re in charge of you, take control. When you feel that you’re having difficulty, it’s because you’re not in control. You’re letting the outside world control you. You’re letting uncontrolled thoughts control your consciousness. Just say, “Stop right now,” and move into a very relaxed vibration.

Q:

How do you distinguish the difference between, A, it’s not here yet because of the germination phase and B, it’s not here yet because one may be doing something that is causing a delay?

A:

First of all, you must understand that all seeds have a gestation and an incubation period. If you plant a seed, let’s say for a flower, you put it in a little flowerpot on the windowsill in your kitchen. You fertilize it and you water it. You know it’s going to be a period of time before that seed will break through the earth. You know that. You wait, as James Allen said, “Wait is one who understands, be not impatient in delay, but wait as one who understands. When spirit rises and commands then Gods are ready to obey. Now, he says that you’ve got to know that a period of time must elapse. When you’ve got the goal planted in your consciousness, it begins to move into form within and through you.

Now, are there going to be days when you’re not working at it the right way? Yes and when you become aware of that, correct it. A rocket going to the moon is off-course about 90 some percent of the time. You will be too, but the trick is correct, correct, correct, correct. Bring yourself back on course. You’re operating on the premise that whatever goal you set must move into form. You don’t have to know how to reach it, but you must know you will reach it. You correct every time you find yourself going off course.

Q:

My goal is to sell our company for $3 million in 2021. However, I have an interim goal, where I will earn $110,000 by October 2019. Which goal should I work towards now?

A:

The $110,000, definitely. That’s where your focus has got to be. You have an exit plan that your company is going to be sold for $3 million in 2021, when in 2021? There are 365 days, which one? Pick a point, pick a time that’s the target. Now, in the meantime, you get earning money because if you’re selling a company that’s earning money. You want to sell a company that is very, very prosperous, one that attracts everything that is necessary to earn the money. You want $110,000 by October 2019, yeah that’s not too much. That’s April, May, June, July, August, September, about seven months. That’s only $15,000 a month. It’s only $3,654 a week. I would focus on getting that every week and, I mean you make that happen.

Now, let’s suppose you only earned $2,654. Then, next week, you earn $4,000, still your focus remains at $3,654 a week.

Q:

When there are two areas of your life that you want to work on achieving goals, such as wealth and relationship, how do you prioritize? Must it only be one big goal at a time that you can manifest?

A:

These are not two goals, actually. The wealth can be a goal. The relationship is self-image. It’s how you see yourself. You see yourself in a loving relationship that just stimulates the daylights out of you, “I’m so happy and grateful now that,” and you describe this person to a T. Draw a circle and put in it “My woman,” or “My man,” whichever you have attracted. Then, put lines up from the circle like a starburst and you write all the qualities you want that person to have. You want them to be kind. You want them to be generous. You want them to be financially independent. You want them to be studious. You want them to be everything you want them to be. You write on these lines and then, you don’t put a face on this person. You have no right to mess with somebody else’s mind. You just see yourself with that person and you go around that circle and you see yourself with that person, generous, studious, one at a time and each one represents the image of you with that person.

You know what you’re doing? You’re putting yourself in that vibration and you can only attract what’s in harmony with you and that person will walk right into your life.

Q:

My 13-year-old son has special needs. I have been stating affirmations to him before bedtime such as, “I’m so happy and grateful now that I am becoming more focused, independent, better at reading, math, etc.” I explained to him that it’s good to state positive statements daily. He asked me to write something down for him to read daily. Please could you kindly suggest something? I’m trying to keep it manageable, simple yet valuable. I find it gets complicated and I want to add a lot to the affirmations.

A:

Well, you’re on the right track. First of all you want to understand, I don’t know what special need your son has, but I do know this. There’s no such thing as mind damage. You’ll often hear of mental retardation. That is a misnomer there is no such thing. The mind is perfect. There may be brain damage, but there’s so many healthy cells that are not doing anything and you can educate them to do what the damaged cells can no longer do.

I would suggest you look up Glen Doman’s material. They’ve done wonderful work for people that had special needs. Take something that he’s having real difficulty with and then say what would be the opposite of that? Well, the opposite of having difficulty with something, you will find that he does it and he does it very easily and naturally. So write down what the difficulty is. Then write it in all it’s negative nature and then say what’s the exact opposite of that and begin by writing, “I am so happy and grateful now that,” and you explain that it’s being done very well and easily and in the present tense. Keep repeating that to him and have him repeat it, every night as he’s going to bed. If he can write, have him write it out. One hundred times every day. And keep doing that until you start to see that new result manifest in behavior and in results. Then work on the next difficult action.

The repetition of the idea, when you put that idea in the subconscious mind, it has to express itself through the body. The body is an instrument of the mind. It’s like a dumb terminal. As magnificent as it is, it can only do what the mind tells it to do. True repetition… I don’t care how absurd it may seem, but true repetition – when you plan an idea, it’s got to be in the present tense. And keep feeding that idea through repetition and plant it over and over and over again. That idea ultimately must be expressed in behavior and so therefore it will get the desired result.

That isn’t sometime that’s every time. It might seem ridiculous, but I’m telling you it works.

Q:

I am wondering in TIR, why is the part about the life script placed in lesson six instead of lesson one? It seems beneficial to do this exercise in lesson one and imagine it in more detail in lesson six.

A:

Well, that’s probably true for some people. What we do is we want to get the person moving on a learning frequency before we get them to do that. That’s a very important part. We want to give them a bit of a base. If you’re building a house you have to lay a strong foundation and if it doesn’t have a strong foundation then you’re building on sand and it won’t stand. I think that would probably be the logic behind it.

Q:

What are you three biggest achievements and how low did you go before your first achievement?

A:

How low did I go? How low can you go? I have had some real down times, make no mistake. I have made a few errors and I’ve lost everything a couple of times, but I never let it stop me. I’ve got to the point now when I make a mistake, I know that that’s not bad I just didn’t know what I was doing. I made a mistake.

You learn from your mistakes you don’t learn from your wins. My three greatest achievements? I have never really measured it like that. I’ve had some wonderful things happen. I think the people I’m working with is one of the greatest things that have ever happened to me. I have some wonderful associates.

Sandy Gallagher has literally changed the course of my life and what I do because she’s so brilliant in the area of finance. But, we have other people that are every bit as brilliant in certain areas.

I think my biggest achievements was to attract the people that I’ve attracted into my life that I work with. I wouldn’t trade anybody that works in this company for anybody else. We have I think 60 people who work in the company and they are extraordinary individuals. I’m proud to be working with any of them.

Q:

All we need to do in life is to help ourselves for a change. How do you find help? Did you ask for help or did it just come to you?

A:

Somebody saw me and they saw me struggling and they knew how to win and so they told me in no uncertain terms to smarten up and he got me to look at his life. He was happy, healthy and wealthy. He was a big guy and always had a roll of money in his pocket. He was just a happy guy.

He said, “Look at those three areas. Happiness, health and wealth.” He said, “You’re losing in all of them.” He said, “Why don’t you smarten up?” He said, “If you’ll do what I tell you, I’ll show you how to get anything you want.” I didn’t believe that but I believed he believed it because he was very adamant about how he said it.

And so I started to work with him and that’s when my life changed. He was the one that initiated it, not me. I would like to think that I had the wisdom to do it but I didn’t.

Q:

Is it important to know what our limitations are?

A:

You don’t have any limitations. U.S. Andersen wrote, “When you fully realize that thought causes all you will know there’s never any limit that you yourself do not impose.” Look around you. I can see all kinds of things. I see chairs, lamps, pictures, computers, plants. Everything that’s been made by man was an idea in somebody’s mind to start off with.

Little boys and little girls start to think and they get older and they quit thinking, unfortunately. The smart ones keep thinking. And they know, they come to the conclusion that their thoughts can turn into a reality in their life because you become what you think about. That’s the one point that every great leader agreed on. They’ve disagreed on everything else. You don’t have any limitations. That’s why you should keep going bigger, better, faster.

Q:

I recently heard a teacher friend of yours say, “Keep your big vision/goal general as opposed to specific. So, thinking and feeling abundance and prosperity versus X dollars by X date.” What are your thoughts on that?

A:

I don’t know who that teacher was but they’re on the wrong track. You want to have a goal. You want to be very specific and to be measurable too. You want to zero in. You say, “I want to win.” Well, at what? Doing what?

No, your goal should be specific and it should be measurable. The more specific it can be the clearer the picture in your mind because what you’re doing is you’re building a picture. When you write a goal you’re painting a picture in words. You want to make it so clear that if I read what you wrote, I would have the same picture in my mind as you have in yours. And then you want to know that if you stay emotionally involved with that, it must move into form just the same as the stars are going to come out tonight. The stars are already out, but you’re going to see them tonight.

Q:

I am super awesome at making some great choices, and with others not so great. How do I make my highest choice in all situations with clarity?

A:

I make some great choices sometimes and others I don’t do so well. There’s a law of rhythm. Somebody was talking about an astronomer a little while ago, stating there’s a rhythm of light. There’s a biorhythm. Intellectually you’re going to be on a high and then as time passes you’re going to go into a low swing. Emotionally, you’re going to be on a high swing and then you’re going to be on a low swing.

Physically you’re going to be on a high swing and then you’re going to be on a low swing. There’s days that you feel like you could take on the whole world. You are just right at your peak. That’s when you’re at a critical high intellectually, emotionally and physically. There’s days when you’re on a critical low intellectually, emotionally and physically. There’s airlines that will not let their pilots fly when they’re on a critical low because they’re not performing well.

Well, you can have your biorhythm charted and see that. I’ve never wanted to have that done though many have tried to do it because I don’t want to know when I’m at critical low. I just want to be on a high as long as I can and as much as I can and I know I can control that to some degree. But, we do know that you’re not going to be on a real high all the time.

So, you’re not going to make the great choices all the time. You’re not going to make bad ones all the time. When you’re on a high swing you’re going to make better choices probably than you are when you’re on a low swing. But, that’s the rhythm process of life. The tide goes out, the tide comes in. The night follows the day. That’s rhythm.

You’re on a rhythm. You have a period of high and low swings. Everyone’s period of high and low swings are expressed in different ways, but that all has to do with rhythm.

Q:

How can I make me believe in my big dreams?

A:

Meditate on it. Re-write it. Keep writing it out over and over in the present tense. If you write out a lie often enough in present tense and always in positive terminology you will start to believe it. If you write… “I’m so happy and grateful now that,” and you keep writing it, you will start believing it.

Listen, early 1930s Hitler became a Chancellor in Germany. 1939 he invaded Poland. It was called Blitzkrieg and took over the whole country. Hitler came very close to ruling the whole world. He was burning people alive, gassing them. He was a very charismatic speaker. He was a phenomenal speaker. He was a smart person. He literally built the Volkswagen … the people’s car. He built the autobahn, fastest highway in the world in Germany, but he was an evil guy.

He wasn’t stupid he was very smart but I think he was evil. He had the people convinced they should burn the books. Then they started to be convinced they should burn the people. You hear a lie often enough and you’ll start to believe it. Now, you may say this is a lie this big dream of yours because you really couldn’t do that. You write it out often enough in present tense and you’re going to start believing it.
William James said, “Believe and your belief will create a fact.” Do not let yourself stop going after your dream. Do it.

Q:

I was raised as a Christian Scientist so I’ve studied metaphysics all my life. What would you say is a foundational quality that needs to be developed without which you cannot succeed? Would it be discipline?

A:

Not all Christian Science understood what they’re doing. I have worked with many Christian Scientists and they didn’t really understand what was happening. The practitioner will tell you to be very quiet, become very receptive at 3:00 p.m. eastern time every day and the practitioner will send a healing image to your mind. If you are not thinking, your mind, then, is in a deductive state. That’s called thought transference. It’s going on all the time. We think the practitioner’s healing but the practitioner can’t heal. The practitioner can only send the image, it’s the idea that heals.

Christian Science is a great concept. Mary Baker Eddy started it. But, a lot of people that are involved in it don’t really understand the mechanism or the science behind it. As you start to understand it, it takes discipline. It takes concentration. A practitioner has to concentrate. The person that’s receiving the treatment must be totally relaxed with their mind wide open and then the practitioner will transfer that idea right into their mind.

It’s just the same as if I go to my phone and I hit the directory and I put Tracy’s name in and the number will come up. If I hit that number Tracy’s phone will ring. How’d that happen? It’s called the transference of energy. It’s a frequency. I got on the frequency that Tracy’s phone is on. Well, the practitioner gets on the frequency that the patient is on or the subjective person is on.

So, discipline is definitely important. You’ve got to discipline yourself to focus on the good. Focus on the good and only focus on the good.

Q:

I can’t sleep I’m so excited. I found my dream home. Everything I want is included. The home is 3.7 million euros. Last year my income was around 20,000 euros. I would like to buy this home by May. What can I do to have this money?

A:

Well, you’re sure going to have to raise your level of consciousness. But, I can tell you this. You can earn the money to buy the home. First of all, you don’t need 3.7 million euros. That’s the full price of the house. You probably need maybe 20% of that as a down payment. Break that down. Now, you’re down to a smaller number. Then start to break it, reduce it to the ridiculous. Go to that home. Visit that home. Tell the real estate agent to leave you alone and you sit down in every room and you image yourself living in that room.

I don’t care if you have to get in the bathtub and image yourself maybe having a bath in there. Get into the various rooms. Sit there and image yourself living in those rooms and don’t let anybody tell you that you can’t have it – 3.7 million is not a lot. It’s only a lot compared to the 20,000 euros that you’re earning.

But, if you compare it to eight million euros that’s not very much. Start relating it to something bigger. Reduce everything to the ridiculous.

Q:

Two equally talented salespeople in the same company, same business, same number of daily customer calls, etc. One practices visualization, affirmations, the other does not. What will happen?

A:

It’s hard to say. One person could be an unconscious competent that doesn’t do any of those things and yet, they still win. The other person that practices the visualization is going to win. You could find a person winning that doesn’t do any of these things. There are all kinds of people that are winning, and they don’t know why. I was one of them. I was earning over a million dollars a year, and I had no idea what the hell I was doing that caused me to be so successful because I went from being just an abject failure, to starting to win, and I didn’t know what I had done. It took me nine years to figure it out. At first, I was just enjoying the win. I was having a heck of a good time. One day I asked myself how did this happen, and I couldn’t answer it. I knew I wasn’t lucky, I didn’t believe in luck! So, I thought somebody must know why I’m winning and so I started to study. That’s how these seminars came about.

It took me nine and a half years and I figured it out and all I wanted to do was teach it. You could have a person that doesn’t do any of those things and still winning. Now, they would be unusual, but that could happen. Odds are, the person that doesn’t do any of the visualization, doesn’t do any of those things is going to get poor results.

Q:

What would have happened if you started your floor cleaning business years ago without a goal card?

A:

I don’t know. Perhaps nothing would have happened. It wasn’t just the goal card, though, that was a part of it, that was a contributing factor. I really worked hard and I was working toward a particular objective all the time. I think the fact that I wrote the goal card made a difference but I might have done it without the goal card, I don’t know that.

Q:

Is there such a thing as destiny? If yes, then what is destiny and how is it connected with the way we think?

A:

Of course there’s such a thing as destiny. It’s where you’re going, it’s what you’re going to do, it’s what you’re destined to do. Create some big long term goal, really beautiful ones and start thinking like the person that’s already there.

Q:

I have a five year plan across all aspects of my life. It includes the things I want to pursue and achieve in life. My plan requires significant risk-taking and financing. How should I approach?

A:

Aggressively. if you’re gonna make it all happen this year. I don’t know how you plan five years in this world that we’re living in. It used to be pretty good, but the world was moving a lot slower than it’s moving now. I don’t know anybody who can predict where they’re gonna be five years now. Give it everything you got, really go at it. In a confident manner, by the way.

Q:

I haven’t come up with my goal. I still am unable to visualize a picture in my mind. Can you give me any advice?

A:

I think you can come up with your goal, I don’t think you’re doing it. See I think what happens, you sit down and something comes to your mind that you want, you immediately think “…well I couldn’t do that, because it’s out of reach.” You don’t have to know how, you only have to know – do you want it? Want is the only prerequisite to setting a goal. Now, if there’s something you want, get honest with yourself, and understand this. You don’t have to have the money, you don’t have to know how it’s going to happen, you don’t have to know when it’s going to happen. You only have to say do I want it? And, if the answer is yes – go for it. You’ll always get it.

Q:

What is your view on subliminal audio recordings created by others or text messages flashing on your laptop screen? Do you recommend using them to program one’s mind for affirmations and/or goals?

A:

They’re very good, they’re very effective. Subliminal advertising is outlawed in stores, they used to play it in stores. They’d play it in movies. They would take a frame out of a piece of film and they’d put the word thirsty in it about every few seconds and then flash that. It would go right past your conscious mind, go past your senses, you weren’t able to see that it was there. Then they’d have an intermission in the theater and you’d get up and be thirsty and go and get something to drink. They’d do it in stores. They’d have music playing and they’d have a message built into the music to buy certain things. That’s how they sold stuff. Well that was considered outlawed or it was outlawed so they don’t do it anymore.

A subliminal message is a message that goes past your senses so fast you’re not aware of it, goes right to your subconscious mind. Is it effective? Yes it is. Do I do it? No I don’t. I wanna be consciously aware of I’m putting in my subconscious mind. I just come up with the information myself and do it on a conscious level. There’s no such thing as sleep learning. Some people think you do it through sleep learning, that’s a misnomer. You don’t.

Q:

What specific techniques can be applied to rapidly overcome procrastination and take action in a sustained way?

A:

Get a hold of Think and Grow Rich and read the chapter on Decision every day, twice a day, for 30 days. If a person’s procrastinating they don’t know how to make a decision. Indecision is the cause of procrastination. The chapter on Decision in Think and Grow Rich is one of the best things on decision you’ll ever read.

Q:

If there was one thing that you wish everyone could know, the message you really want to communicate, what would that be?

A:

That they have infinite potential and it’s their responsibility to develop it.

Q:

How can I intensify the feeling that every desire that I have set for myself has already been accomplished?

A:

You need a new desire. You need a new goal. How can I intensify the feeling that every desire I have set for myself already, well you don’t have a pile of desires. Desire is an idea inside, it’s a goal that you’re going after- that you’re emotionally involved with. I think what you’re doing is you’re playing a game with your mind. You’re coming up with questions and think there’s no answer for them. Quit thinking so much, get busy and get out and do it.

Q:

Can you please explain the importance of persistence?

A:

Well persistence is vitally important. There may be no heroic connotation to the word but the quality is to the character of the as carbon is to steel. Napoleon Hill wrote a whole chapter on it. It’s a pretty good chapter. I have my book right here on the desk. Now listen, Hill said “There are four simple steps which lead to the habit of persistence. They call for no great amount of intelligence, no particular amount of education, and but little time or effort. Number one, a definite purpose backed by a burning desire for its fulfillment. Number two, a definite plan expressed in continuous action. Number three, a mind closed tightly against all negative and discouraging influences including negative suggestions of relatives, friends, and acquaintances. Four, a friendly alliance with one or more persons who will encourage one to follow through with both plan and purpose. These four steps are essential for success in all walks of life. They’re the four steps for developing persistence.” If you are not persistent you’re probably not going to go very far.

But I want to remind you, there’s a very fine line between persistent and being a pest. You’ve got to know where that line stops.

Q:

I understand better through studying SGR, the idea of creation versus competition. How would you suggest we apply this concept on a daily/weekly basis so we can better achieve our C type goals?

A:

Just incorporate it as part of your life. Just say this is how I’m going to live. I’m going to be a pro, I’m not going to compete with anybody.

Q:

How do you split up time for family, work, etc, between studying our material and taking actions, goal-related actions? I need to study for my goals too, so how can I best split my time?

A:

Listen, when you have a family, if they’re small kids you’ve got to look after them. That’s your first responsibility. The second responsibility is to yourself. At night, sit down and think what am I gonna do tomorrow. All you’re going to do is manage activity. You can’t manage time, so you’re going to manage your activities. You say I’ll do this now and I’ll do this then and I’ll do this at a certain time and then stick to it. It’s a matter of disciplining yourself.

Q:

What can I do to ensure I am continuously moving closer to my main goal every single second of every day?

A:

Well I don’t know how you’re going to do it every single second, every day. But, keep the goal on the screen in your mind as much as possible. Carry your goal card, review your goal frequently. You’re going to make mistakes and you’re going to get off course. The trick is to get back on course again, you’re not perfect. You will screw up.

Q:

Should I be making small steady progress towards my goal or take massive action?

A:

Well I think every now and then you’ll take massive action but persistence is the best thing. Steady, progressive, moving. Earl said success is the progressive realization of a worthy ideal. Progressive realization, in other words, continually moving in the right direction.

Q:

I’ve been working on my goal for several months. I just finished the Thinking Into Results Program. I have not yet achieved my goal. What can I improve in order to reach my goal soon?

A:

You’re the only thing you have to improve. As you improve you, your awareness expands. As awareness expands, you see things you weren’t able to see. You’d hear things you weren’t able to hear. Your whole world will change. Never finish the Thinking Into Results Program. Keep going through it. It’s the repetition that alters your consciousness. Understand nothing is created or destroyed, so everything is already here. One person can see something another person can’t see. And understand your goal must manifest. You hold the image. It must move into form. Not maybe, not sometimes, that is an absolute law, perpetual transmutation of energy. The image in your mind must materialize with and through you. It moves you into action and because of the vibration it moves you in, it attracts.

Q:

Previously when visualizing, I have been envisioning my goals. These essentially were my visions. Now that I’m learning about creating a larger vision separate from my goals, I’m wondering what I should be visualizing every day. Should I be visualizing the individual goals I want to achieve as part of my vision, or the vision itself?

A:

No, the goal, the goal. Listen, you start off with a purpose. The purpose is why you get out of bed in the morning. The purpose is why you’re living. This is what I am doing with my life, that’s your purpose. Your vision, if you could visualize a funnel coming from your forehead and going out. And as it goes out, it gets wider and wider and wider, that it’s like a big V coming out of your forehead. A vision, and it gets broader and there’s many pictures. All kinds of beautiful things in that vision, all the things you’d like to have, do, or be. That great big vision.

Now the goal is to take a bite out of the start of the vision. The goal is one thing you focus on. That’s where your focusv – on the thing you’re going to make happen right now. And when you accomplish it, then you pick another one off your vision, and you go after it. But you focus on the thing that you’re going after right now.

Q:

What if being a perfectionist and waiting to match this list makes me lose chances and opportunities?

A:

First of all, there’s no such thing as a perfectionist. That’s people that are just too critical of themselves. You want to start focusing on the good. Harvest the good. You’re looking at what you don’t want here. “What if being a perfectionist and waiting to match the list makes me lose chances and opportunities?” No such thing as losing chances and opportunities. Opportunities are around you everywhere. Opportunity comes in giving, not in receiving. Focus on the good. Harvest the good.

Q:

How do I internalize my goal?

A:

Live it. Let yourself feel it. Pretend. Pretend. Listen to Pretend by Nat King Cole. “Pretend you’re happy when you’re blue. It isn’t very hard to do, and you’ll find happiness without an end whenever you pretend.” Download Pretend by Nat King Cole and then do what the lyrics say. You pretend you’ve already got it. Feel it. Taste it. Make it real. Let yourself get emotionally involved in it. It’s a form of acting. You act like the person you want to become.

Q:

Do you have to raise your self image to internalize the goal or do you raise your self image by internalizing, through internalizing the goal?

A:

I think it goes back and forth. It’s like the chicken and the egg. It’s definitely a self image thing. You’ve got see yourself doing it. You’ve got to believe you can do it. See you need an image of yourself. In fact, you have two images of yourself. When you stand in front of a mirror, there’s an image that comes back at you. That is the physical. Then you have the intellectual, what you’re like. This is where you’re usually a little critical of yourself. Then you have the subconscious, the paradigm. Your self image was programmed into you at a very early age. It’s what causes us to think we can’t do this, we can’t do that. This company, PGI, we’re involved in helping people alter the self image and alter the results.

I think what you’ve got to do is feel worthy of the good you desire. You’re God’s highest form of creation, so see yourself already with these things. As you do that, what you’re doing is you’re upgrading your self image. You upgrade the self image and the self image will upgrade you.

Q:

I am 58 years old. I was raised in a hard working, but poor family. It is extremely difficult for me to change my paradigms. Am I too old to start changing them and become successful?

A:

I was 58 twenty-six years ago and I’m working at changing mine. I’ll be 84 in July and I think I’m just getting warmed up. That’s not too old. Forget your age. How old would you be if you forgot your age? Forget about the hard working family. Don’t live from your history, live from your imagination, like I just quoted Steve Cubby.

Your family wasn’t poor, they probably just didn’t have a lot of money. They were probably rich in other areas, so you want to have all that good stuff come to you. “It is extremely difficult to change my paradigm.” Don’t say that. Say I’m so happy and grateful now that I am improving everything I do every day. I’m talking about little things like pick up your socks, cut your nails, comb your hair. Little things. Things you’re putting off now, stop putting them off.

And you’re not too old for… my goodness. You know that medical science is moving is you’re probably only half way there. Change your attitude. Get the attitude going right, thoughts, feelings, and actions. Start to think how young you are compared to me. You’re just a kid, for goodness sake.

Q:

Each day I write down six action steps to take towards my goals. I am only able to accomplish one or two per day. Do you have any suggestions on getting more accomplished daily?

A:

Well, it depends on what you’re doing. Sometimes that’s all you’ll do. The idea of writing down six is a good idea. Make up your mind you’re going to work a little faster. You might start an hour earlier. Get up an hour earlier. You don’t need anywhere near as much sleep as you think you do. What you need is more rest. When you lay down, drop into a deep, restful sleep.

Speed up. You say how can I work a little a faster but don’t compromise on the quality of the work that you’re doing. You’re going along okay. Just keep it going.

Q:

How do I build up consistent habits to reach all my goals this year? Is creating the neural network to be very consistent the most important thing to reach my goals?

A:

Well, you create consistent habits one or two at a time. You might ask yourself, “What’s one or two things that I could do today that would make me more effective, more efficient at what I’m doing?” And then make up your mind that you’re going to do those two things. You’re going to focus on them for a week, ten days.

Maxwell Maltz in Psycho Cybernetics said approximately 21 days. I don’t know if that’s true. Jesus said it’s according to your faith it will be done. You just make up your mind you’re going to focus on these two new things. You’re going to do them, and keep in mind, when you focus on two new habits, you’re breaking old ones because all of your time is spoken for. Your subconscious mind keeps you busy all day long. You could waste time, you could be very effective, whatever you’re doing, it’s all programmed into your mind. When you go to set new habits, you’re breaking old habits. Now make sure that when you break an old habit, that you replace it with a good habit, because if you don’t, you’ll replace it with another bad habit.

Q:

When I set a goal and do not achieve it, I feel disappointed. What law can I focus on to help me overcome this feeling?

A:

Make sure that you do achieve it. You know there’s a story about a tribe off in a lost land. The tribes have what they call a rain dance. They dance to get it to rain. Geez, archeologists found this one tribe that it rained every time they did a rain dance, and they wanted to find out why did it work every time for some and not for others. So they did a lot of research and they found out that the tribe that always got rain when they danced, they got rain because they danced until it rained.

Well you got to keep going on your goal until you do achieve it. It’s not a matter that you don’t, that you may not achieve it on the date that you set. See, you’re not guessing at a goal, you’re guessing at how long it’ll take you to reach the goal. No one knows what the gestation or the incubation period is for a spiritual seed. That’s what an idea is, a spiritual seed. And it grows by the same law as carrots or roses grows by. It grows by law, because there is only one law. The laws govern the growth of everything. So, you get disappointed because you don’t reach the goal. That’s because you’re changing the goal. You think the plan isn’t working. If the plan doesn’t work, change the plan, don’t change the goal. Go at it a different way. Change the way you’re working at it, but understand the goal has to be reached.

Andrew Carnegie told Napoleon Hill, “Any idea that is held in the mind, that’s emphasized, that is either feared or revered, will begin at once to clothe itself in the most convenient and appropriate physical form available.” Change the plan, not the goal.

Q:

For what period of time should I repeat affirmations? Until I get the results I want or should I stop after 30 days?

A:

Just keep going until it becomes a habit. Keep repeating affirmations until they become a habit. See, what you’re doing when you’re doing that, but don’t just say it, feel it.

What you’re doing is you’re planting in your subconscious mind until it becomes fixed there. Then the affirmation becomes a habitual way of looking at things.

Q:

My client is married and wants a relationship that she is not certain she can get from her husband. How closely should her goal be tied to her husband?

A:

Well, her goal shouldn’t be tied to anybody. Your goal is your personal growth, and another person is not responsible for your growth. You’re responsible for your growth. She may not get what she needs from her husband to reach her goal. She doesn’t have to. You can get it from a number of different sources. You get stuff from people you work with.

Q:

Part of my C goal involves giving back and philanthropic work. A project that I am involved in helps women and children survivors of human trafficking. Some of the stories are quite disturbing to me. What recommendations do you have that can help maintain a high vibration and minimalize some of the sad and negative emotions that come up? I feel that your response will help me to better help them.

A:

Well, I wouldn’t even work there if I were you for a while until you are strong. You’ve got to be very strong to go in that environment without affecting your own emotions to the point where it becomes a negative force. I would not go around there until you’re very strong. Because the odds of you getting them into a positive vibration is pretty slim but they can get you into a negative one pretty fast. So, if you want to do some philanthropic work, that’s nice. Go and do it with, where the people and the environment is not so negative, where you’re not standing to get invaded with that kind of energy. I’m not telling you not to do this, I’m saying get stronger first.

Q:

If we are constantly trying to achieve more, does that mean that we are not satisfied with what we have and who we currently are?

A:

You should never be satisfied. You see when I was a little kid my grandmother used to always say that you should be satisfied with what you’ve got. Well grandma was wrong. She was right on a lot of things but she wasn’t right on that. You should be happy with what you’ve got. You should be happy with who you are. But you should be trying to improve it all the time. See your spiritual being – I believe – we’re here to do God’s work. Someone says well what’s God’s work? God’s work is creation. God’s work is greater good. And that’s the way the spirit works. Spirits are always for expansion, for expression. Now you are a soul, you don’t have one, you are one. And the soul is forever seeking it’s awareness of it’s oneness with God. You’re trying to become more aware all the time, so if you’re following God’s laws, you’re growing. And to grow, you’ve got to create things bigger and better. It’s not to accumulate because everything you want, at the time, you’re debt belongs to someone else, you never own it anyway.

Q:

On page 48 of You Were Born Rich workbook, you ask for risks I must take. Unable to, I am unable to think of any, I have thought about this for some time now. What are your thoughts on this?

A:

Well if you’re not taking any risks you’re not going anywhere. You’re going sideways. You need to go ahead. You don’t have a C-Type goal. If you’ve got a C-Type goal you don’t know how to get there. You know you’re going to but you don’t know how to get there. But you made up your mind you’re going to get there. And that’s going to cause some risks. Get out there, get out of that box.

Q:

Since practicing your teachings daily, my income has increased over 30% yet I still seem to have just enough. It seems to be a life-long pattern. What can I do to change this paradigm?

A:

Well start by earning more than you need. You see if you’re fixed to spend all you need, it won’t matter how much money you earn, you’re going to spend it all. You want to earn more than you spend. You’ll feel good about yourself when you do that. You take part of your earnings and you put it away. Really make up your mind you’re going to double your productivity. You can take 20% of all you earn and stick it in a savings account and watch it grow. Maybe set a goal of getting up to $50,000, and then $100,000 and then $200,000. You know? You can do this.

Q:

One of my C-Type goals is to open a premium health and wellness center this September. The financial resources have not come through and we begin building June 1, 2018. I can’t, I kept the plan moving forward. Do you think I messed up?

A:

You didn’t mess up at all. It’s not June the first. You don’t need it til June the first. But you sound like you’re entertaining doubt now. Doubt is not going to get you anything. It will get you more of the same. You got to see it happening. You got to get out there and hustle over the next month. You’ve got to get out there and get it. You shouldn’t have more than one C-Type goal. There’s one C-Type goal and that’s the point you’re going towards. You see yourself, it’s already happened in your mind. Don’t you even entertain any thought. Now June the first, it hasn’t happened, give yourself an extension of 30, 60 days. Keep pouring the coals on.

Q:

What is the difference between an affirmation on a goal and a habit?

A:

Well an affirmation is a statement. You could turn an affirmation into a habit. An affirmation is a concept, it’s a statement that you make. It moves you in the right direction. And if you just keep saying it over and over again, pretty soon becomes a habit to see that in your mind. Habits simply do without any conscious thought. The affirmation is a conscious decision you give yourself, an emotional level, positive energy.

Q:

How can I improve my motivation?

A:

Big goals. Goals will motivate you. Big goals.

Q:

How do I eliminate or block out memories of disappointment of not accomplishing a goal?

A:

Well. Let it go. Just forget it. Let the dead bury the dead. Michael Beckwith gave the answer to that, when anything happens doesn’t matter what it is. It is what it is, accept it. It’s either going to control you or you’re going to control it. Number two, harvest the good, there’s something good in the disappointment. And number three, forgive all the rest. Let it go.

Like I was doing a recording the other day and I said you know I’ve had a lot of successes in my life. I’ve done a lot of things right and then I followed it up and I said I did a lot of things wrong. I really blew it a few times. I never learned too much from my successes and usually enjoyed them and I felt good about them but I didn’t learn that much from them. I learned from my failures. See in every disappointment it doesn’t have to be a disappointment, in every miss, in every failure there is a lesson.

I can give you an example a few years ago we rented a ship, a cruise ship and we had a few speakers and we sold a seminar at sea. We went out to sea for about a week. And it was the first time I ever did it and it worked out very well. We earned about $100,000 on it. So next year we said we should do this again. So we got a bigger ship and you know something we lost two million dollars on it. I remember saying how do you feel about it and I said oh I don’t feel bad – we just learned. We just lost two million bucks and I said I’m not going to do any more cruises. You see I was wandering into an area I didn’t belong. I didn’t sell cruises. I sell seminars. I sell educational programs. So I didn’t let it bother me.

But you learn from it if it’s just a little loss, it’s a little lesson. If it’s a big loss it’s a big lesson. Don’t feel bad, if you have failures big enough they can be exhilarating.

Q:

I have been taking actions in line with my goal, writing a book, and leading workshops. What can I do to expedite the creative process? The next steps have not been obvious to me.

A:

You have to hold the image, and the next step will come to you. It sounds like you think you’re stuck. Quit thinking you’re stuck. You said you’re working on your goals, you’re writing a book, and you’re leading workshops. What can they do to expedite the creative process? Well, what is the goal? What is that picture working towards? Is it just writing the books and the workshops, or are you building a concept? See, when I started, I made up my mind I was going to build a company that operated all over the world, and that’s where we are today, and that was a long time ago. It was in 1973.

I actually started in the business in 1968, but I went to work for Nightingale Conant because I wanted to get an education here. I’d been studying it from 1961 to 1968. Then I went and spent five years there, I had a pretty good understanding by that time, so I made up my mind I would build a company that operated all over the world. I was all alone. I had nothing, no one, but I was going to teach this information to companies all over the world today. Things happen. You will move in the direction you want to go. You expedite the creative process by continually visualizing where you want to go. The goal is essential because the goal causes you to stretch.

First of all, you shouldn’t know how to reach your goal. You know you will, but you don’t know how, and as you hold the image, everything starts moving. Your perception of things change. You move into a different vibration. You move on to different frequencies. You attract different people. You attract different situations, but you’ve got to know that the image in your mind will manifest in form. You’ve got to build the image up. Like the book and workshops, I don’t know if that’s the goal. What is the goal? What is the end result? That’s what you’re going after. Then the process will start to unfold for you.

Q:

I’m a bit confused about an affirmation and a goal. It was noted that money should not be the goal, so the affirmation has to do with increasing amounts of money coming from multiple sources of income. How do I write the proper goal to reflect what I want, a passive income of $100,000 annually?

A:

Well, I don’t know where you heard money wasn’t the goal. Money generally isn’t a goal, but it can be money. I mean, no one said you can have an amount of money as a goal – $100,000 annually or a million dollars annually, whatever it is. A passive income of $100,000 annually – you can do that. That could be the goal. You see, you can set up a goal of money. The first goal I had was money. The first goal I set was to earn $25,000. Now, that was in 1961 when I was earning $4,000 a year, and I owed $6,000. So, $25,000 would be like saying I wanted a billion. I mean, I didn’t believe it, but I was told to keep writing it out, keep reading it, and I did.

It got me thinking of earning money. I didn’t see myself earning the $25,000, or having it. I didn’t even know anyone with that kind of money, but because I kept writing the goal out, and I kept reading it, I started to hear people talk about earning money. What I did when I started to think of money, I quit thinking of debt. If a goal is to get out of debt, you’ll probably stay in debt forever because that’s what you’re thinking about. So, you see, I turned it around. In a short period of time I was earning $25,000. Things came to me.

I heard somebody say there was good money cleaning floors. I said, “I’m not proud. I’ll clean floors.” I ended up cleaning floors in Toronto, Montreal, Boston, Cleveland. I mean, the thing just went like a rocket. I got caught up in it. Well, $100,000 annually from passive income is not a lot of money. Break it down. Just a second. What you’re talking about is $273 a day. Change the concept from $100,000 annually. Change it to $300 a day. How can I earn $300 a day in passive income? Reduce it to the ridiculous. That’s not that much money. That’s the way I would approach it. You can have that as a goal … it’s generally not a goal. The goal is generally what the money will do for you, but you can certainly set it as a goal.

Q:

My discovery process seems to suggest that I have more than one life purpose. Is this possible?

A:

I don’t think so. You might have more than one thing you want, but I think your purpose is why you’re here. I think you’re hardwired to do something. You could have two, I don’t know. You can only focus on one thing at a time. If there are two purposes, you want to make very sure they’re compatible. I haven’t met anybody that had two purposes in life. They may do two different things to feed their purpose. You have your purpose as the reason you get out of bed. It’s your reason for living. It’s why you’re doing what you’re doing.

Then you build a vision, and the vision, if you could see it like a funnel coming from the forehead and going out, and it keeps getting wider, it’s like a beam of light that widens as it goes out, and that vision then would be a multiplicity of things that you want to do that are all on purpose. Your goal then is to take a bite out of that vision. Get the first part to get it moving. So, I think probably if you’re thinking you have two purposes, you probably have two different ways of fulfilling the purpose.

Q:

How should I prioritize my goals? Is it better to execute these C Type goals one by one, or several at a time?

A:

One by one. You can only focus on one thing at a time, and the only thing you give energy to is the thing you’re focused on. You just focus on the one goal. That’s it. Prioritize what you want most. That’s what you go after. I’m very goal-oriented, and I’m also very productive. I probably one of the most productive people that you know because I’m so goal-oriented. I focus on the goal. It doesn’t matter what anybody else is doing. I never care what anybody else is doing. I’m only concerned with what I’m doing, and I want to make myself more productive. It’s got to be a C Type goal. If it’s not a C Type goal, you’re going sideways. C Type is you don’t know how to get there. You know you will, but you don’t know how. They’re the only kind of goals. Just have one. All the other things will fall in place as you go after it.

Q:

How do you prioritize what yo choose to study? Do you spend an hour on one book and an hour on another book?

A:

No. I just go to whatever book I feel like going to. I don’t read from the book for a while but I decide on … I wrote my goal down or I look at my goal card and then I start reading toward that end. I read for ideas. I’m not reading just to read. I read to expand my way of thinking, but I read to expand the ideas that I’m working on, is really what I do.

Q:

What do you suggest for managing all of these materials?

A:

Well, you’re not going to manage them all. What you’re going to do is study as much as you can of it. You may not get everything done we suggest you to do. What’s important is that you understand and apply what you are studying, and do as much of it as you can. It’s almost inconceivable to think that all of us are going to be studying at the same speed. We’re not going to do that. So, do the best you can with what you’ve got and let your heart lead you. But the trick is not just to study it. It’s understand and apply it.

See, no amount of reading or memorizing is going to make you successful. It’s the understanding the application of wise thought that make you successful.

Q:

I will be graduating from university this year. I’m feeling a bit overwhelmed about facing the real world. What advice would you give to a student like me about to graduate?”

A:

Oh, well, don’t feel overwhelmed. Decide what you’re going to do and don’t compromise. Make up your mind you’re going to do it. The important thing is to have a real clearly defined goal, and then find someone who’s already accomplished what you want to accomplish and start working toward it. Get to know people who are doing what you’d like to do and get advice from them. Follow their advice to the letter. If they’re doing something well, that’s what you want to do.

Q:

There are so many things I want to accomplish. I am looking to earn a higher salary at current employer, make more money outside of work, personal growth and more. I feel I’m out of focus. Should I just be focusing on one thing at a time?

A:

Yeah, I think you should. Every job holds a future just as every person does. What you want to do is ask how can you be more valuable to your employer, and really focus on that. If you want to do something outside of work, start an MSI. You could belong to a network marketing company and still do a very good job where you’re working and do it on a part-time basis, which most people do. That’s where your focus should go.

Q:

Thanks to this work, I’ve started a new business that will eventually lead to the achievement of the goals I have set for myself. When do I repeat the fulfillment of my large goal versus the fulfillment of smaller goals that lead to the larger goal? For example I’m so happy now that my finances are five million dollars.

A:

Okay. The question is, when do I repeat fulfillment of my large goal? Well that’s what it should always be about. It should always be about the large goal. You should always see yourself with that. Everything you’re doing is moving you towards that, but you’ve got to see it in your own mind. You’ve got to realize you’re already there. If you’ve got the idea in your mind and you can talk to me about it, then you’ve already got it. If you can share your emotions with me, you’ve already got it at an emotional level. The only place you probably don’t have it is on a physical level, so you can’t enjoy it there, nor can you share it with somebody in there. So just make up your mind that you’re going to see yourself the way you want to be now.

Q:

What is the difference between a goal, target and purpose?

A:

Well the purpose is your reason for living. It’s your reason for getting out of bed in the morning. Then you have a vision. If you could visualize a funnel coming from your forehead and going out. It keeps getting wider, going out further. That’s your vision. Your vision would be a multiplicity of goals and they’re all on purpose. They all help you live your purpose. Your goal is taking a bite out of that vision. It’s the first one. The goal should be on purpose. Goal and a target are the same thing.

Q:

If I set a goal and deadline but I have not achieved this yet, does that mean I did something wrong?

A:

No, it means you probably chose the wrong day. See, when you set a goal, nobody knows how long it’s going to take. That’s governed by the law of gender. The law of gender decrees all seeds have a gestation or an incubation period. No one knows what the gestation or incubation period is. We do know that a period of time must elapse, so what we’re doing is we’re guessing at it, and fortunately or unfortunately we don’t always guess it right. So you’re guessing at the date and if your time has come and you haven’t reached the goal, you would ask yourself, “Have I given this everything I’ve got?” If the answer’s yes, then you’ve obviously chose the wrong date. Choose another date and keep going.

Q:

How do I balance the burning desire for something when I keep thinking about it all the time? I really feel like I should relax and switch my mind off.

A:

How do you balance the burning desire for something you think about all the time? That’s the kind of thing you’re looking for. You want to look for something you do think about all the time. Now, I wouldn’t be worried about that. See, balance is an interesting word. Some people think balance is work eight hours, sleep eight hours, play eight hours. That’s nonsense. Balance is when you’re living the way you love to live, doing what you really love to do. Then you’re in balance. You’re in a good vibration all the time. Quit wanting to switch your mind off from something if you love it. I’m in love with what I do and it’s what I think about all the time.

Q:

How can I be clear about my C-type goal? How can I become connected with my emotions of my goal?

A:

Well, if you’re on a C-type goal, you’re going to be emotionally involved because it’s what you really want. It’s difficult getting emotionally involved with something you don’t want, and that’s what people have difficulty with, because they don’t pick the goal they really want. If you’re going after what you really want, you probably don’t know how to get it. Then you’re really on the right track. If you know how to get something, you’re not growing. Goals are made to grow. Goals are not made just to get stuff. They’re made to grow. Pick the C-type goal. You’ll get emotionally involved.

Q:

I’m enrolled in the coaching program and the consultant program. How should I prioritize my time to be more effective? I’m feeling a little bit overwhelmed.

A:

Well, you’re not just programming your time. What you’ve got to do is you prioritize your activities. You ask yourself six or seven things that you’re going to do that are super effective, and then you make up your mind you’re going to do them. That night, ask yourself what are six goal achieving activities? That’s what you focus on when you wake up in the morning. Time is a tricky thing. You can’t manage time. You can only manage activities. That’s the best way to do it.

Q:

Is it helpful to listen to your life script and affirmations while you are sleeping?

A:

Yes it is. There’s no such thing as sleep learning. That’s a misnomer. When you go to sleep, first of all, you go through a light sleep period when you’re neither awake nor asleep. That’s when your subconscious mind is wide open. Sometimes you think, “Did I wake up last night?” You probably didn’t. You come into a very light sleep period and everybody does that at some point. It’s in that light sleep period that your mind is wide open again. Just before you go back into a deep sleep. Just before you wake up, you come up into a light sleep, go back into a deep sleep, then come out of it again, and it’s in those light sleep periods that your mind is … your subconscious mind is wide open. That’s when you’re learning.

Q:

Should I be stating my specific goal? For example, I am so happy and grateful now that I have completed my first deal worth $30,000 or by December 31st, 2018, etc. Or, should I just be saying my goal in a more general state?

A:

Well, you should state your goal specifically and what it is and you should state it in the present tense. The only thing you put in the future is the date for it to manifest and you’re guessing at that. But you’ve got to state your goal, “I’m so happy and grateful”, and you put it in the present tense, “That I have completed my first deal worth $30,000.” Now, you want to put a date on that but you want to realize that you’re guessing at the date.

Q:

I have a goal of expansion within my current field, law business, how do I know if this is a genuine C type goal versus just an A or B type goal? I am a lawyer with dreams both within and beyond law.

A:

Well, it’s a C type goal if you have no idea how you’re going to do it. If you have doubts about it. You can’t see how it’ll happen. You don’t have the resource, you’re not sure how it’s going to happen. Then, that’s probably a C type goal. A C type goal is a goal that you really have no idea how you’re going to do it. That’s probably what you’re working with.

Q:

How do I break through and act? I am having a habit of flooding my mind with all of this valuable information but not taking any action.

A:

Right now say, “What should I do right now? When I get off of this call what should I do? What’s one thing I should do that’ll move me in the direction of my goal?” Better still think of three things you can do when this call is over that’ll move you in the direction of your goal. Write those three things down right now. And when that call is over you do right away.

Q:

Should we be setting time frames? I thought I should be setting deadlines for my goals but I was recently told that it will happen when it is supposed to happen.

A:

That’s true. It’ll happen when it’s supposed to happen. But I’ll tell you something else. Northcote Parkinson had a law and he said the law is that, “Work expands to fill the time allotted for it.” If you give yourself forever to do it it’s going to take you forever to do it. If you’ve got all day to clean the house up it’ll take you all day to clean the house. I heard a woman one time say she’d seen her house cleaned between the time she heard a car door close and the door bell rang. You’re guessing at the date to reach a goal. You don’t know how long it’ll take but you’re guessing. You’ll usually guess fairly accurately. Guess at the date. Work expands to fill the time allotted for it. You’ve got to have a date that you’re shooting at.

Q:

I am familiar with all of your videos online but a brand new student who just registered. What advice would you give me as someone new to the coaching program?

A:

Don’t rush into it. Do exactly what we suggest. If we suggest you do something in it do exactly what we suggest. The repetition of listening to the material is really the secret to it. You cannot listen to it too often. Every lesson you should do at least twice a day if you can.

Q:

If you could tell your 30-year old self one thing that relates to business, spiritual, family, etc. what would it be?

A:

Well, I would tell you to do what I did. Get a mentor who’s already doing what you want to do, who’s already accomplished what you want to accomplish, and do exactly what they tell you. As long as you’re involved in our program do exactly what we suggest you do in the program. We’ve been doing this for a long time and although it might not make sense to you some of the things we’re doing you should do them because we know why we’re telling you.

Q:

I don’t know what I really want. What can you suggest I do to figure this out?

A:

Take the time every morning. Get up a little early. Take a pad and a pen and sit down and be totally relaxed and think, “If I could do anything I want with my life what do I really want to do?” You’ve got to get serious about this. You get real serious about it. “If I could do anything I want with my life what would I do?” You might have to do this for a month everyday for a half hour or an hour in the morning. Sit down, put a pen and a pad beside you, and leave the pen and pad sitting there until an idea comes.

I watched a woman on television one time and she told a story about she was a chorus dancer in Las Vegas. In other words she danced in a chorus line. She knew that she wasn’t good enough to be the star of the show. She would never be the star of the show. So, she decided she was going to quit dancing and go and do what she loved doing. She loved baking pastries. She went to France, got a job working with some of the best pastry chefs in the world. And at the time I was watching her she was one of the best pastry chefs in the world. That’s what she loved to do.

When you’re doing what you love you’re going to automatically get better at it and that’s really what you want. So, you’ve got to sit and figure out, “What do I really love doing?” The fact that you don’t know hot o do it or you’ve never done it before doesn’t mean anything. What would I really love to do? If I could wake up every morning and do what I love for the rest of my life what would it be?

I went to visit Earl Nightigale way back around 1964 or ’65 and I was in his office looking for the better part of an hour I guess. And when the meeting was over I was leaving. I said Earl what is the real secret? I mean what is the real deal, the secret of life? He said, “Well there isn’t any secret.” He says, “It’s simply the matter of a person sitting down and asking themselves what they’d love to do and then dedicate their life to doing it.” He said, “The problem with most people is they don’t know what they love doing.” Well, at that moment I started to get excited because I knew exactly what I’d love to do. I wanted to do what he was doing and I made up my mind right then that I was going to do what he was doing. And in 1968 I went back and I started to work with him.

Q:

When presented with numerous options how do you know which one is the correct decision to make? I am unable to decide if I should start my own business or keep working in sales which I enjoy.

A:

Well, I think you should start by asking yourself what do you really love doing. You do what you really want. And don’t back away from something because it scares you. That would be an error. Do what you really love doing.

Q:

What would you suggest to somebody who wants to improve their life?

A:

They have to have a definite goal. They should sit down and ask, “What aspects of my life do I want to improve?” And then, write out how you want it improved, what you want. See the end result and write it in the present tense, “I’m so happy and grateful now that, money comes to me in increasing quantities through multiple sources on a continuous basis.” Or, “I’m so happy and grateful now that I’m doing the thing I love to do everyday all day.” Decide on what aspect of your life you want to improve and then start working on it.

Q:

My goal card contains the two most important intermediate destinations that I reach on December 31st, 2018 and August 31st, 2020. Normally I would have limited myself but no more. My second date is a very clear targeted image. Is there anything wrong with having two dates or goals set?

A:

Well no but I would say your goal is the one in 2020. If you compare 2020 to the top of the mountain, Mount Everest, the summit then 2018 would be base camp. Now, if they’re in harmony with each other. As long as they’re not taking you in two different directions. You’ll probably reach the first one first and then go to the second one but your objective is the 2020 one.

Q:

Do you immediately set another goal after you achieve your current goal?

A:

Absolutely. You’re like a ship sailing for harbor. When you get there you may rest for a bit and replenish the ship and then you set off for a new port otherwise you just sit dead in the harbor going nowhere.

Q:

I have set a goal to earn more money in my business. I am having difficulty finding a clear way to visualize a dollar amount. Do you have any suggestions?

A:

Quit visualizing and just ask yourself, “How much do I want to earn?” And write it down. How much do you want? That’s the target. And just see yourself earning it. Start to repeat you’re already earning it. Mentally if you’ve got the idea you are intellectually. As you get emotionally involved you are emotionally. It only takes spirit and time then for that to move into form.

Q:

I am using the daily affirmations to get out from under my paradigm. My situation is getting better but I still face the same full circle every month. I am unable to pay rent and my staff on time.

A:

Well, I don’t know what you’re doing but I do know that you should be doing it better than you’re doing it. There’s certain things you’re not doing. You’ve got to focus on the money earning side of your business. You’re letting the business control you. You’ve got to control the business. You say you’re facing it every month. You probably expect it. You’ve got to stop that and start asking yourself, “What can I do today to make certain I bring in revenue today?” That is a law with entrepreneurs. That’s what you have to do. And that is the only way you’re going to change your situation. You’ve got to change your perception of money, how it’s earned, and you’ve got to get earning it. You’ve got to do the thing. There’s a lot of things you’re doing that are not going to bring in money. Your first responsibility every morning is what am I going to do today that’s going to bring revenue in.

Q:

How do you deal with conflicting goals? For example finishing a PHD and earning money?

A:

You can finish a PHD and earn money, they’re not conflicting at all. It takes a certain amount of time to do your PHD and it takes a certain amount of time to set up sources of income. But get rid of the idea you have to go to work to earn income. You don’t have to go to work to earn income at all. Riches come if they come at all in response to definite demands based upon the application of definite principles and not by chance or luck. So, start to study multiple sources of income. As I say go back and check out these affiliate programs. There’s all kinds of sources of income, any number of them. And there’s all kinds of people working on a PHD that are earning money. I was earning money when I was sleeping last night. If I can do it you can.

Q:

I feel like I am in a fog. I believe what is going on is that I take on too many projects and then not able to give them justice. Please advise.

A:

Well don’t take on too many projects. Understand that no is a complete sentence. You may be in the habit of saying yes to everybody that wants you to do something. If you don’t feel you can do it just say, “No.” And realize that is a complete sentence. Don’t take on more than you know you can do. And then, prioritize what you are going to do. And start with number one and don’t go to number two until number one is finished. And when you go to number two forget about number one. Don’t think about number three, focus on number two. And when you get to three forget one and two, focus on three and don’t think about four, just focus on three. See it’s a matter of controlling where your focus goes.

Q:

If I listen to affirmations during sleep does the subconscious mind still absorb it?

A:

Yes and no. You, draw two horizontal lines. Draw a line and then about two inches down draw another one. On the left hand side at the top put 11:00 p.m. On the right hand side at the top put 6:00 a.m. Now, you’re going to go to sleep. Take and draw a line, go down through those two lines. Go right down past the bottom line. You went through what’s called a twilight state, when you went past the bottom line you went into a sleep state. Sometime through the night you come up and you almost go to the top line and then you go back into a deep sleep again. Just before you wake up you come back up into a real shallow sleep, back into a deep sleep, and back out of it, and you wake up. It’s while you’re in between the work and the sleep. It’s in what we call a twilight state. That’s where you’re learning. You do not learn when you’re sleeping. There’s no such thing as sleep learning, that’s a misnomer. You learn in a twilight state. So, can you learn while you are asleep? Well, when you’re in that twilight state you do but in the sleep state – no. So, if you put on something and it just kept on playing there would be part of the night you would be learning something.

Q:

James Allen in As a Man Thinketh wrote, ‘In the bark of your soul reclines the commanding master. He does but sleep wake him.'” What should we do every day to awake this commanding master?

A:

I think you should get into your goal and get into the spirit of it. In other words, live it. Live your goal. See, you’ve got your goal. The second you set your goal you got it in your conscious mind. That’s an intellectual level. Then you turn it over to the universal mind. That’s your subjective mind – your subconscious. And let yourself feel yourself already with it. That’s what you have to do if you want it to move into form. That’s what James Allen’s suggesting there. It’s a magnificent little book, by the way.

Q:

Up until now I have been hesitant to send in my weekly form as it seems to repeat itself for the past three weeks. She’s a BPP member. I have been working diligently on getting my eCommerce business going, but it is taking longer than expected, because I am not savvy with technology. Trial and error is the way I am getting things done. Do you suggest I keep repeating the same goal and forms each week?

A:

Yes, absolutely. You see, you’re starting a business. And the thing can go like a rocket once you get it going. It’s a matter of getting it going. eCommerce is pretty good. You’ve got a global business starting from scratch. And I know a number of people that are starting up. And sometimes they’re slow to start because you’ve got so much to learn. But if you stay with it and keep learning every day you’re going to move.

Q:

How can someone who does not speak English learn a PGI program?

A:

Well, we have it in French. We have it in Spanish, some of them. We have programs in German. We’ve got them in different languages. Not all of them, but some of them.

Q:

Can you please explain the following. The common denominator of success is calling habits. Does this mean that I’m supposed to contact people who are unwilling to listen?

A:

Common denominator of success … Well, the common denominator to success is informing the habit of doing things failures don’t like to do. It’s your job to get them to listen. That’s why one of the first steps is get the person’s attention. Now, a good way to get their attention is talk about what they’re interested in, not what you’re interested in.

Q:

I have set a goal and have had some success using techniques from the program BPC. I had a specific date that money was needed, and it has now passed. Do I reset the date, or what am I doing wrong?

A:

Yes, reset the date. See, when you set a goal, it’s like a spiritual thing, a a non-physical thing. When you set a date, you’re guessing at the date. No one knows how long it takes to reach a goal. Now, oddly enough you can guess pretty accurately. But if the date comes and you haven’t reached it, it’s because you chose the wrong date. You have to ask yourself, “Did I give it everything I’ve got that I expected to happen?” If the answer’s no, there’s your answer there. If the answer’s yes, then you chose the wrong date. But regardless, give yourself an extension of time and keep going.”

Q:

How can I raise my motivation towards new goals?

A:

Well, it’s got to be something you really want or you won’t be motivated. That’s why goals, you don’t have to know how to get there, but you have to want it. You don’t set goals for what you need. You set goals for what you want. There’s no inspiration in needs. You set a goal for what you want, and the motivation will be there. But it’s got to be something you really want.

Q:

How can I stay focused and clear for the next steps I need to take and get things done on time?

A:

Take control of your mind. Just focus. Make up your mind you’re going to focus. See, that’s really the key. Take control. I mentioned a minute earlier some people are play things for what’s going on around them. Don’t let that happen. Take control. Before you go to bed at night write down six goal-achieving activities. When you wake up the next day, make up your mind you’re going to work on those six goal-achieving activities. Now, your mind may want to wander and have you do other things. You got to bring it back, focus on those six things.

Q:

My mind has opened up too many ideas. How do I choose which one to focus on? They all take my breath away. Should I only focus on one at a time?

A:

Yes, I think that’d be a good idea. Pick the one you like the most. Write them down and look at them and make a decision. Say, “This is the one I’m going to work on,” and then do it. Ideas are a dime a dozen. A person that acts on them is worth a fortune.

Q:

I have invested in the Science of Getting Rich program. I am enjoying it and learning a ton. What is the best way to utilize the program for ultimate results?

A:

I would study every day chapter five … No, chapter 4, 14, and 7 in that order. Everything, you study the program in any kind of an organized manner you want, but every day take 4, 14, and 7 and study those three. Four puts you in control. 14 elevates everyone with an impression of increase, and number seven is gratitude.

Q:

If I change my mind about a goal, is that my paradigm keeping me from fulfilling my end goals?

A:

Yes, it very likely is, Bonnie, yeah. Okay, if you’re going after what you want, you’re not going to change your mind on it. But the paradigm could try and talk you out of it. Don’t let that happen.

Q:

What do you do when you have reached your weekly goal ahead of time? I am not sure what to do next.

A:

Raise the weekly goal. It’s too low.

Q:

I have been studying every morning, meditating, and visualizing. My goal includes increasing my income and developing more revenue streams. Are there any other practices I can do?

A:

No. I think you’re on the right track. Most people when they get into this if it’s relatively new they’re fairly impatient. They want to do it overnight. It doesn’t happen overnight. See, the first thing you’re doing is you’re changing your perception of your life and how you’re living it. You’re changing your perception of how you spend your days and how you earn your money. And that doesn’t change overnight, but you keep working at it, and it does change. And pretty soon the new way is very commonplace. That’s just the way you’re going to live. Now, that’s based on my own experience.

Q:

I’m working with a marketing coach. She practices LOA. How do I manage conversation where she wants to be realistic about goals so that I don’t blame her if I don’t meet them in the timeframe?

A:

Well, what is realistic? You see, logic is quite a barrier for the imagination. The Wright brothers weren’t very realistic as far as the rest of the world was concerned, as far as appearance were concerned. They were bicycle mechanics, and they’re going to introduce us to the kingdom of flight. They were considered very ridiculous, not only unrealistic, crazy. Ed Hillary was considered unrealistic. He was a beekeeper. Nobody had ever been to the top of Mount Everest. That’s where he was going. He failed twice, 1951-52. But in ’53 he did it.

Well, if a person’s practicing law of attraction, do they really understand it? Because most people don’t really understand it. Law of attraction’s the secondary law. Primary law’s the law of vibration. Now, the vibration you’re in is controlled by your thinking or by your paradigm. And whatever vibration you’re in, whatever frequency you’re on, that’s going to dictate what you attract into your life. You can only attract into your life what you’re in harmony with.

And if you’re not in harmony with it, it isn’t going to happen. But I would be very cautious if somebody tells me I’ve got to be realistic. I think I’d probably move a little ways away from them. Because I don’t want to be realistic. I want to be unrealistic. I want goals that are crazy.

Q:

I have been having a great deal of success with your teachings. How do you recommend maintaining the successful mindset? If you go backward, what do you recommend to back on track?

A:

Well, if you go backwards, it’s because you’ve lost sight of your goal, and you’re not listening to the material. You see, I never went backwards. I had problems with [inaudible] going backwards, but I never let the problems bother me. I really never did. I’ve never stopped studying this. I study it all the time. And that’s what you have to do. You have to keep studying. You cannot stop studying it. Spend time every day listening to recordings, reading. And you’ll find it’ll start to fall into place for you.

Q:

My goal is to be making annual cashflow of $650,000 by 2019. I currently earn $72,000 fixed salary. Is my goal realistic? What are your suggestions for manifesting this goal other than visualization?

A:

Well, your $650,000 probably is not going to come in a salary. Earning $72,000 on a salary, somebody else has decided what you’re going to earn. And that’s what happens when you have a job. If you’re going to earn $650,000, I would suggest you get into a business for yourself, and that’s where you decide what you’re going to earn. You see, since I was 26 years old I’ve always decided what I was going to earn. I don’t want anybody telling me what I can earn. Now, prior to that, I didn’t have any awareness of this. I didn’t know that you could actually start a company and decide what you’re going to earn. I just didn’t know that. You know? I think you know that now. So it’s a matter of how you’re going to do it.

Q:

I am 40-plus years old, financial stable, but not really enjoying life. I set and do one goal on top of another, which keeps me busy, and I feel burned out and very tired. How should I change myself?

A:

Well, first of all, I would start relaxing. I would train yourself to relax, Robina. And your goals, it sounds like you’re doing this to keep busy. Quit doing it to keep busy. Set a goal to really wind your stem, to add excitement and joy to your life. It sounds like most the goals you’ve set are ones that you know you can reach if you do certain things. You need to set a goal that you have no idea how you’re going to reach it. You really have to stretch. And you do that, and I think you’ll add something to your life.

But the big thing you’ve got to do is relax. And your age has got nothing to do with this. Absolutely nothing. It’s your state of mind. You can do this at 40 or 20 or at 80. It doesn’t matter. You take control and put your mind and body into a very relaxed state. You’re not like the pregnant mother, but you could take any of those recordings that we’ve just recommended and download them. Practice relaxing. Take control.

Q:

What is the fastest way to get emotionally involved with my goal?

A:

Act like you’ve got it. I tell you, watch television or watch a movie and pay attention to how fast the actors can make you angry. They’ll get you uptight. They’ll make you laugh. They’ll get you emotionally involved. What you want to realize is that the person took a script, took a bunch of printed material and read it, and then they re-read it, and they re-read it, and they memorized it. And they internalized it. And they became it. And that’s not really the person that you’re seeing. That’s the actor you’re seeing. Well, you want to act like the person you want to become. So write out how you want to be, and then be it. Let yourself get emotionally involved. Become the actor.

Q:

What would you say to someone who is having trouble with consistency?

A:

Well, I would say that person probably doesn’t have a goal. If you have a goal and you’re really going after it, you got to become consistent. Otherwise there’s no growth.

Q:

When discovering a purpose, is that like an aha moment that occurs, or is it searching for what is wanted?

A:

Well, it could be. It could be an aha moment. It’s when you ask, “Why am I here?” Well, you’re here because, I believe, you’re hard wired to do something very special. And that’s what your purpose is, and you love it. Our purpose is doing what we love doing. That’s why you love it, because you’re programmed to do it. So it could come at an aha moment. It could come because you just sit down and think it through, “What do I really love doing?” See, most people are not doing what they really love doing. They’re doing what they think they have to do. The truth is they don’t have to do anything. Everything we do we choose. You say, “Yeah, but there’s certain conditions or circumstances.” You can’t change that, but you can change your perception of those conditions or circumstances.

Q:

You can read in the program, Science of Getting Rich: ‘You must be active in order to receive what you want when it is ready to come to you.’ What does ‘be active’ mean in detail? Can you please give an example?

A:

You must be working. You’ve got to be doing it. You’ve got to get out there and get into action. Sitting … contemplating will never do it. It might do it if you’re a guru somewhere in the Himalayas in a cave, but for you and I, we’ve got to be active. Action is the name of the game. Get into action. Move into action. Thinking isn’t going to do it. Thinking never does it. You’ve got to move into action. You’ve got to be out there making it happen.

Q:

How do I balance my dream of becoming world champion in Latin American dancing? It takes a lot of practice and my intention is to ear/receive on million Denmark Krone a year for my services.

A:

Well, you’ve got to become the world champion now. Every time you go on stage, onto a dance floor, you’re the world champion. You have to see yourself as the world champion. You become the world champion and $150,000 is going to be a piece of cake. It’ll be nothing.

Now, I don’t know where you are now. Let me tell you a story about Milt Campbell. He was a good friend of mine. God bless him, he’s gone now. He was such a good friend that he had a key to my house. It didn’t matter whether I was in town or not. If he came to town, he could find a home in my home. He and I were just great friends.

He won the gold medal in the decathlon in the Olympics in 1956 in Melbourne, Australia. Now, he had won the silver medal in 1952 in Helsinki, and he made up his mind when he was standing on the second step that he was coming back in four years and that gold was going to be his.

He and Rafer Johnson, who was also competing in ’56 in the Olympics for the gold medal as a decathlete, were running around the village in Melbourne, Australia, and Rafer said to Milt, “Milt, what do you think is going to happen?” And Milt told Rafer, he said, “Rafer … ” Milt told me this a thousand times. Every time he’d visit he’d tell me the same stories, he said, “Rafer, you’ve wasted your time coming here. This one’s mine.” Milt was already the gold medalist.

See, people that win the gold medals, people that become world champions, when they get the medal and they get the decree, when they get the championship, it’s second nature to them. They’ve had it for quite a while. You’ve got to see yourself as the world champion. You’ve got to see it now. You’ve got to repeat it to yourself, you’ve got to visualize it, you’ve got to see it. You’ve got to hear people calling you the world champion. Every time you go on a dance floor, every time you put your foot on the dance floor, you’re going out there as the world champion. You don’t see yourself as anything else. You don’t need to tell anybody. Your actions will tell them. You just go out there and you train. You train like you know you have to. And you are the world champion. That’s the only way you can look at it.

The $150,000, that would be a piece of cake. See, I’m the world champion of what I do. I could earn $150,000 on a bad day, and so could you. Go ahead.

Q:

How do words of affirmations become images in our mind after repetition?

A:

They don’t become images after repetition, they become pictures immediately. I’m just going to say the one word. And when I say the one word, an image is going to come onto the screen of your mind. I’m going to say a word. Here it comes. Are you ready? Car. Car. Now, you didn’t see “C-A-R” on the screen of your mind. You saw an image of a car.

Now I’m going to say another word. Dress. Dress. You don’t see “D-R-E-S-S”. You don’t see a woman’s dress, you see … or, you see the dress. You don’t see the “D-R-E-S-S”.

Now I’m going to say another word. Phone. Now, you’ve probably got an image of a cellphone. Well, words are symbols. Every symbol has a corresponding image. See, that’s what a language is. When I say, “Pick up your phone,” those are words. You see your body taking your hand, and I just did it, and I picked up a phone.

Words are symbols. Every symbol has a corresponding image. Every image has a corresponding emotion when you get emotionally involved. You’ve got to let yourself get emotionally involved. We don’t have any difficulty getting emotionally involved with bad ideas. If you’re hurting, you get emotionally involved with it. I mean, your emotions are hooked in, “This hurts! This really hurts!” But when you tell yourself, “I’m the world’s champion Latin dancer,” you can do that … just in cold words there’s no image, because you can never get emotionally involved. You’ve got to be emotionally involved.

So, you see, the affirmation are the pictures that come together that you let yourself get emotionally involved.

Q:

Do you believe it is important to go over your goals or to affirm them and write them out first thing in the morning? I usually do this in the evenings.

A:

No, the evening is a good time to do it. In fact, your mind will work on the last thing you give to it all night long.

I’ll give you an example. Let’s suppose you have trouble getting up early in the morning and you make up your mind, “I’m going to change that. Tomorrow morning, I’m going to get up early. I need to get up early and study.” Just before you go to sleep you think, “But I can’t.” The subconscious mind is like the army. It always follows the last command: “But I can’t.” And you don’t.

So maybe the morning isn’t best. Maybe the night’s best. Whichever is best for you, whenever you feel best. I study in the morning. I love to study in the morning. Now, you know, funny thing, I used to do it at night. I don’t know if it has anything to do with my age or what, but I go to bed earlier now than I used to. God, I used to be a nighthawk. I’d be up 1:00, 2:00 in the morning, and I’d still get up early. I mean, I’d be operating on three, four, five hours of sleep for months. I don’t do that anymore.

Q:

When I am setting my goals, I have so many of them. I need to fine tune them, but should I separate as individual goals or group them into one large goal?

A:

No, you don’t group them. Put them all down and say, “Which one is really important?” And then prioritize them. If you’ve got a lined pad in front of you, put “1”. Go up about five lines from the bottom and put a number “1”. Then, go way up to the top and put “21”. Now, there may be more than 21 lines. That’s okay. But I’ve got “1” and “21”. Now, if I put a number down, “2, 3, 4” up until “20”, “21”. And let each number represent one of your goals that’s in your group.

Let’s suppose you’ve got them prioritized perfectly, and you probably won’t have, but let’s suppose you do. Well, each one of those lines represents a frequency, and each time you raise your level of thinking to a higher frequency, the good that’s on that frequency is going to come to you.

See, nothing is created or destroyed, everything’s already here. You can only attract to you what’s in harmonious vibration with you. Well, as you raise your level of conscious awareness, you’re raising your frequency that you’re operating on, the good will come to you that’s on that frequency.

So let’s suppose you’ve got them prioritized properly and the most important one is the last one, it’s the top one, number 21. That’s the one you focus on. You see yourself getting that. You see that coming to you. And you do everything that comes to you as a result, every idea that comes to you as a result of seeing yourself with that big goal, let it come to you. All the other things are going to come as you move towards that. They’ll just happen in your life. You don’t need to even think about them. They’ll just be there. The big one is the one you want to focus on.

Q:

How do you believe in yourself and a goal to the point where you know you will achieve it? I doubt myself often.

A:

So do I. Don’t feel bad about that. I’ve doubted myself many times. I still do. You see, if you’re going after a goal and you don’t got any idea how you’re going to reach it, and let’s suppose there’s some real bad stuff going on around your life right now, and you happen to let your guard down and you start to let it bother you, you’re going to doubt yourself. No wonder you’re going to doubt yourself, because you’ve let the bad stuff that’s going on around you start to get into your head. And so you’ll start doubting yourself.

You’ve got to kick it out of your mind. Say, “I’ve got to quit this nonsense.” But I still doubt myself. But I don’t do it very often. I’ve got a pretty big sales goal and I don’t have many doubts about it anymore, but I used to have. I haven’t reached the goal. I’m a long ways from it yet, but I know we’re going to do it. I mean, I see it. It’s already happened in my head. It’s only a matter of time. I’ve just got to get the salespeople, every one of them to understand this is the way, eventually it’ll work.

Q:

What is the best thing I can do to get things done on time and stay on track?

A:

Go online and look for a book, The Technique of Getting Things Done by Donald and Elanor Laird. Now, this is an old book, so it’ll be out of print, but you can get it, you’ll find it: The Technique of Getting Things Done by Donald and Elanor Laird. It is one of the best books I have ever read. And I remember when I was reading it I thought, “Where in the name of goodness did they get all of this information? They must have ate an encyclopedia.” On the next page it says, “You’re probably wondering where we got all this information. We have read an entire set of encyclopedias.” They write this. This is in the book.

But they wrote marvelous books, the Technique books. The Technique of Getting Things Done was one of them. It helped me enormously. And I’ll tell you one thing I learned from it. There’s some things you don’t have to do. You think you have to get them done. You don’t have to get them done at all. They’ll get done through neglect. They don’t have to be done. You’re conning yourself telling you you’ve got to do these things. Some of the things you’ve got listed that are piling up in your mind you’re not doing, they don’t have to be done. Other things, they do have to be done. So start asking yourself, “How important is it that this get done?”

Now, I’ll tell you what to do. Every night write down four, five or six things that are goal-achieving activities. They get priority. All the other things, they come after that the next day. Goal-achieving activities always get priority. But some of the stuff you think you have to do, you don’t have to do at all. And you just make up your mind you’re going to become really good at getting things done.

When you start something, finish it. When you start it, finish. Don’t say, “I’m going to put it off.” Don’t say, “I’ll do it later.” If you start it, finish it. You become very disciplined in your mind. See, I’m a very disciplined guy. I get a lot done. If anybody followed me around they’d go, “Whew, how do you do it all?”

Well, people that do it, they just make up their mind they’re going to become super effective. I’m a very productive guy. I take pride in being a very productive guy. Productivity increases your amplitude of vibration in so far as attracting money is concerned. You are a more valuable person.

Q:

How do you achieve a goal that involves four people, and one of these people do not practice your teachings? I feel as if they are messing with our frequency.

A:

Yeah, they are. Get divorced. “Get out of here.” Don’t spend a lot of time with that person.

I would sit down and have a talk to them. “If you’re going to work with me, if you’re going to be part of this group, you’re going to have to change a couple of habits. Otherwise … ” Because they’ll drag you down.

Let me ask you a question. If you had a barrel full of apples, and sitting right in the center about four apples down was a rotten apple, would you leave it there? I’m going to tell you something: the whole damn barrel will soon be rotten apples. You’ve got to get rid of it. When you’ve got somebody that’s dragging you down, you can’t afford it.

I was reading a quote the other day by Einstein. He said, “Don’t hang around with negative people. They’ll create a problem in every solution.”

Q:

My main goal I had at the start of the program has changed. Should I still focus on the main goal that I had and then turn my energy to the newer, bigger goal or shift and start focusing on this bigger goal now? Is it okay to focus on more than one goal at a time?

A:

Well, I think … Well, first of all, you can’t focus on more than one goal. That’s not true. You just can’t do it. I want you to look at this money, see if you can read it. Now, there’s something written on this pen. I’m going to hold it up. I want you to see if you can read what’s written on the pen. Can you read it. See if you can read what’s written on the pen as it comes closer. Can you read it? Now, while you were trying to read what’s on the pen, you forgot about the money.

You see, you cannot focus on two things at once, you can only focus on one thing at a time. So what should you do? Well, I think you should only have one goal.

Now, that doesn’t mean there’s not things you want to accomplish, and we talked about that earlier; everything you’re going to want as you move towards the goal that’s up there is going to fall into place as you move toward it.

See, your goals are rewards received for awareness that you develop. And as you become more aware, you develop more, you attract more good stuff into your life. What you’ve got to understand is that people are not making these decisions.

Like, young Scott Edwards kind of hogged on that, but he said that. He said, “She just didn’t understand she had nothing to do with it, and she thought she was the one that was making all of the decisions about that.” He said, “This all had to do with the law.” Well, this has to do with the law.

So you just focus on the one big one that you want, and the others will fall into place as you move towards it. See, you don’t do goals to get, the goals are to grow. And so as you work towards a bigger number, you grow. You become a much more bigger person, wiser.

Q:

How do you keep a student mindset after studying one thing for so long?

A:

Well, you’ve got to understand what you’re studying. I don’t have a difficult time keeping a student mindset, I’m dealing with infinite knowledge, there’s no end to it. It doesn’t matter how much you get, you know that you’re only scratching the surface. So it’s a sincere desire to want to learn more. I want to do more and I know if I’m going to do more I’ve got to be more aware. I’ve got to learn more.

Q:

I rarely achieve any of my C-Type goals, and this leads me to frustration. I lose faith in myself. One of my goals is to join the 13-month Bob Proctor Coaching Program. Is this considered a C-Type goal?

A:

No. You can easily get into the coaching program. The idea that … A C-Type goal, you shouldn’t get frustrated because you don’t reach them. You don’t reach them because you don’t know how to get there. And it’s the getting there that’s the journey, that’s the exciting part. I haven’t reached my C-Type goal and I’ve had it for quite a while. That’s why it’s a C-Type goal, you’re creating, that’s what the C stands for, you’re creating. You’re going after something you have no idea how to get there. You’re comparing it with these piddly low things like cars or houses or things. Those are goals for some people but you got to understand you’re trading your life for your goal, so you better make it worthwhile. But you shouldn’t let that bother you.

And I’m going to tell you if you talk about one of my goals is to join the 13-month coaching program, just make up your mind you’re going to do it. And that’s it. You can go ahead and do it. You don’t spend five seconds thinking of why you can’t.

Q:

Is it okay to have multiple goals on multiple goal cards or would you suggest to just do one at a time?

A:

Let’s suppose you’re going to go to multiple places. Which one are you going to go to today? If you go and talk to a captain of a ship, it’s in a harbor and ask them, “Where’s the ship going?” He can tell you exactly where it’s going. He’s going to one specific port and he doesn’t wonder whether he’s going to get there, he knows he’s going to get there. Because he’s going to follow a plan that will take him right to that port.

He won’t say, “I’m going to a few different places.” He’s not. He’s going to one port. And that’s where you want to go. You want to go for one goal.

Now think of this for a moment. The goal is what you’re doing is raising your level of conscious awareness. I don’t know if you can see here – it’s a pad and there’s lines on it. There’s an X here, that represents where you are. There’s an X up here, that represents where you’re going. Now between here and up here, there’s all kinds of different lines. Well, these lines represent levels of awareness. And as you go from one level of awareness to the next, the things that will come to you are going to come to you as you develop that level of awareness.

You see that’s the purpose of a goal is to develop a higher level of conscious awareness. So, as you move ahead, you’re going to keep attracting more things. So the trick is go after the thing that you don’t know how to get that’s the highest, and you’re going to find all the other things will fall into place as you move towards it.

Q:

Can you suggest some strategies to easily overcome procrastination?

A:

Absolutely I can. Tell you exactly what to do to overcome procrastination. Get the Napoleon Hill book, “Think and Grow Rich.” Read the chapter on decision every day for 30 days. And I’d recommend you read it with someone. You don’t have to be with them, get somebody on the other side of the country if you want. And the way you start, you agree when you’re going to read it, and you read a few lines and say, “Pass,” and then they pick it up and they start reading.

They read a few lines and they say, “Pass.” Now because you don’t know when they’re going to stop, you got to read along with them. So even when you’re reading out loud, they’re reading it because they’re watching and they’re going along with you. So you’re reading the whole chapter, both of you are reading the whole chapter. But that way you’ve got a support system.

The opposite of procrastination is decision. People procrastinate because they don’t make decisions. Learn how to make decisions. It tells you right on the first page, all successful people make decisions very fast, change their decisions very slow if and when they change them at all. Boom, make the decision. There you go.

Q:

I decided to focus on one business, real estate, I do not know how I will reach my goal by selling accommodation properties alone. Should I look or another type of income as well?

A:

No. Become the very best at what you’re doing. You see, we’re dealing with a world of amateurs really. There’s very few people who master what they do. The ones who master what they do, they write their own ticket. They don’t wonder what they’re going to earn, they decide what they’re going to earn, they know exactly what they’re going to earn because they’re so good at what they do. And they never stop getting better at what they do. Master what you do. Get so good at it people come to you, you won’t have to go to them.

Q:

I have been working part-time as a consultant, I have not made any sales. What affirmation can I use to move my desire to be a great salesperson into my subconscious mind?

A:

I’m so happy and grateful now that I find it easy to help other people get excited about improving the quality of their life. I am so happy and grateful now that I find it easy to help other people get excited about improving the quality of their life. Because that’s what you’re doing.

Q:

I have a very big goal, 97% of the world’s people would say that it is not something that can be achieved. How do I know that I am thinking properly to be on track for my goal?

A:

Well, it doesn’t matter whether anybody thinks it can be achieved. What matter is do you believe it can be achieved? Can you see it in here? Think of the Wright brothers, they’re bicycle mechanics, they weren’t aeronautical engineers. Can you imagine what the world thought of them? They thought they were a couple of crackpots. Imagine the neighbors, what are those boys doing? They’re going to kill themselves. Their dad should stop them. They introduced us to a new kingdom.

Think of anybody that did anything for the first time. Think of Edison. A reporter asked him one time, “How do you feel after failing 3,000 times at building a light bulb?”

He said, “I didn’t fail 3,000 times, I succeeded. There was 3,000 steps to building a light bulb.”

It doesn’t matter whether anybody’s ever done it. What matters is can you see you doing it? Study the lives of people that have made breakthroughs.

Look at Hillary. I had the good fortune of working with him two or three times. He was the first guy to stand on top of the world. Nobody had ever climbed Mount Everest, and most people that did or tried they failed miserably or they died. There’s people up there encased in ice that are never coming down ever.

They’re there forever. But he did it. He didn’t care that everybody said it couldn’t be done.

What’s important is that you see it being done. In fact, it’s already going to be done in your consciousness, ipso facto right now.

Q:

The house of my dreams is my goal and I see it but very far away. I look at my bank account and I see it even further away. What can I do to eliminate my negative thoughts and beliefs so that I can achieve my goal sooner?

A:

Quit letting your bank account, other people or past results dictate how soon it’s going to take you to reach your goal. If you don’t own it already, get the book, “You 2,” this is what it looks like. “You 2.” You with a red 2. It’s by Price Pritchett. If you’re in North America, the phone number is 800-992-5922, or it’s pritchettnet.com.

Q:

I struggle with finding my definite purpose. What can I think and do when I don’t know what I want the most?

A:

Well you’re not spending time at it, you’re just … you’re not spending enough time at it. First of all, it’s something you’ll probably find that you do very naturally. You’ve got a talent, you’re hardwired to do something. You really enjoy it. There’s things you really enjoy doing. You’re going to find your purpose there. I’ll tell you, in the Goal seminar, I’m working on it right now. We’re just putting the finishing touches on it and we went to that. You just want to be registered in the Goal seminar because it is really powerful, and that’s where you’re going to get help on that.

Q:

Six years ago, I made the decision to turn to my annual income to monthly income. I did it for two months, and the rest of the time I tried and have only been able to pay my bills. What do I need to do exactly to make this happen?

A:

Well I think you have to look at how you’re spending your days. Are you involved in goal achieving exercises? Are you involved in exercises every day, first thing in the morning that are profit making? You see, money doesn’t just happen; money is the reward of service rendered. You want to start early providing the service and you want to give all you’ve got. It’s just constant vigilance. I mean, you’ve got to be working on it constantly. It doesn’t happen by accident, I can tell you that. It happens because you wake up in the morning and you’ve already got your plan of action for at least six goal-achieving activities and you get busy doing them.

Q:

Affirmations in the present tense or asking yourself powerful questions. Which one do you think works better? Or when is it better to use one or the other?

A:

Well you should be going through affirmations all the time. It’s just a positive thought that you’re giving to your subconscious mind. See, it’s when you impress the positive thought, you’ve got to do it with emotion, though. You don’t just say it or make a noise. You’ve got to mentally get involved in it, and when you do that, everything starts to change. Positive statement is a good statement. A positive statement, present tense, from yourself to yourself, but you’ve got to let yourself get emotionally involved. You live it.

Q:

What do we do when we have manifested results that are not great? The present reality is hitting us in the face. How do we remain focused and make the shift quickly away from these results to what we desire with Faith? Can you please provide powerful action steps for this?

A:

What do we do when we manifest results that aren’t great? Not great. Present reality is hitting us in the face. How do we remain focused and make the shift quickly away form those results. Well, the answer is you don’t let the results control your thinking. You get the thinking to change the results. You cannot change conditions or circumstance. You can’t change the results that exist. They exist because you manifested them, okay? But if you want to get different results, don’t let the results control your thinking. You get your thinking to control your results. You see what you want. You act as if you’ve already got it.

Q:

What should I be handwriting each day? I have a four-page self-image, a one-page personal goal, and a one-page business goal, and this doesn’t include my paradigm shift writing. How do I prioritize these?

A:

Well a four-page self-image, it probably far too long. I think you can make the self-image very short and very powerful. You probably got far too much in there. You want just a very positive statement about yourself to yourself. A four-page self-image, a one-page personal goal, it’s probably too long. A one-page business goal, doesn’t include any paradigm shift writing. How do I prioritize these? Well I think your personal goal and your business goal are probably very closely aligned. How do you prioritize them; well first of all, I think they’re far too long. I don’t think they should be that long. You should be able to put your goal on a card. Now you might want to write it out in full detail and I recommend you do that at least once a day and visualize it in present tense. A four-page self-image, I would cut that down to half a page and you have to get the same picture in your mind. You’re using too many words.

Q:

When I do visioneering or holding pictures in my mind during the day, do I want to hold a picture of my primary goal or of my vision?

A:

Oh, your goal. Your goal. Definitely your goal. You see your goal in the present tense and act as if you’ve already got it. You’re acting like a person that’s already has a good … your desire.

Q:

How do I reinstate my affirmations when the date for my goal has expired?

A:

Well the date for the goal is expired, you guess at the date. You don’t know how long it takes for an idea to manifest. No one knows what the gestation period is for an idea. An idea is a spiritual seed. An idea is energy, and it’s a spiritual seed, but it grows by the same laws as the physical seeds grow by. We didn’t always know how long a physical seed took to manifest. Not too far in the distant past that we learned that, but we don’t know yet. No one is developed the awareness of how long it takes for a spiritual seed to manifest, a goal. So we guess at the date.

Now what you want to do, if the date is come and you haven’t reached the goal, ask yourself, “Have I given this the best I got? And did I expect to reach it?” If the answer is no, give yourself an extension, a time, and start expecting it and give it everything you’ve got. If the answer’s yes, I give it everything I got and I did expect it, do the same thing, give yourself an extension and keep going. You’ve guessed at the wrong date. But don’t let the past affect how you’re going to operate in the future.

Q:

I am new in the program and would like to know how I use my primary goal on the card. Do I read it every day and how many times per day?

A:

As often as you can. Carry it loose in your pocket. When you touch it, the light message is sent through your nervous system, activates the cells in your brain, the picture that’s on it will come on the screen of your mind. Carry it loose in your purse or your pocket, read it as often as you can. The more you see it, the better it is.

Q:

When handwriting the self-confidence formula, I have been alternating days between cursive and print. Would it be prudent to write it out by memory and then go back and fill in the blanks?

A:

Yeah, that’s a good idea. Sure.

Q:

Do mastermind group members have to be in the same field that I am in?

A:

Not at all. No. Sometimes it’s better they’re not. They’ll bring fresh perception of what you’re doing.

Q:

I am new to the program, and I would like to know how to calm the terror barrier when it wants to stop me from moving forward?

A:

The best way to calm it is just to act on it. Realize you’ve got more power than the terror. The terror barrier is nothing but your imagination working against you. Change it. Start to see all the good that can happen. Absolutely refuse to let the terror or the negative fill your consciousness.

Q:

How do I become emotionally involved to nourish my vision?

A:

Become an actress or an actor. Get the Art of Acting by Stella Adler, study the book. That’s what actors do. They take a script and they live it, and that’s what you want to do. Build a script in your mind and then live it the way you want to live. Watch the actors, watch them on television or in a movie; they’ve got very, very good. They’ll make you laugh, they’ll make you cry. I mean it’s just beautiful watching how they operate, and it’s all somebody wrote a script and they’re living it. They read it, they reread it, they write it, they rewrite it, they read it, they imagine it, and pretty soon they become it. That’s what you want to do.

Q:

What are the specifics for creating affirmations? Should I be using I-N-G verbs? For example: Now that I am refereering in the NHL. Also, should I be affirming my one-year goal or my overall goal? Now I am refereeing in the NFL.

A:

I think it’s your overall goal. Your overall goal. Your affirmations, you’re always in the present tense, and you see yourself where you want to be. You’re already there.

Q:

Belief must fuse with our goals and dreams. Can you please elaborate on this?

A:

Well when you believe, you’re on the frequency that your goal is on. Understand nothing is created or destroyed, ever. Everything’s already here. The way to create the cellphone has always been here, we just weren’t aware of how to do it, but when we moved our mind on to that frequency, the phone, the manifestation of it was the result. That’s the same with planes, and trains, and cars, and houses, and clothes, and everything else. So you’ve got to see yourself already in position of the good that you desire. When you do that, you move on to the frequency that your good is on. Everything operates on a frequency and that’s when you start to attract it.

Q:

How can I find the balance between visualizing my goal and being extremely productive without stressing myself?

A:

Well I think you’re stressing yourself when you’re trying to do something you don’t believe you can do. Change your belief system. Understand you’re quite capable. You’re God’s highest form of creation.

Q:

I would like some advice on how to balance doing my best and the time for raising my energy. How can I identify if I need some rest or if it’s just my paradigm trying to bring me back?

A:

You’d know if you need rest, it’s just … you know it. You don’t need anybody to tell you. You know when you need rest. Then you go and rest, and what you’re doing is preparing your body to be more productive. You’ll raise your energy the more involved you get with your goal, the energy automatically goes up. You’re moving yourself on to a higher frequency.

Health and Death

Q:

What is your recommendation when it comes to food and health? It appears everything is unhealthy these days. This creates fear in me. How can I view this, these things in a better way?

A:

Well, eliminate the fear. There’s enough infomation online on how to have a healthy diet. Google healthy diet and then female or male, 24, 48, 62 years in age, or whatever. You’re looking for a healthy diet. You’ll find plenty of information on the internet.

Q:

For about two years now, I have been feeling pain in my chest. I try not to focus on it, but at times I am fearful that it could be something serious. Both the doctor and the emergency room have said that I’m fine. Do you have any advice?

A:

Oh, get a real good relaxation exercise. You got to practice relaxing. You’re probably experiencing some stress or something. You’re putting pressure on yourself. I would practice relaxing. You may practice meditation.

You might practice some yoga, practice meditation, get into meditation, study some meditation. You’ve got to put yourself in a very calm state. Start mentally practicing relaxing, and quit thinking about that.

Start to affirm to yourself that you’re calm, you’re calm and confident.

Q:

The image I have of myself is a slim person. Due to menopause, my body has changed. When I see my reflection in a shop window, I do not recognize myself. How can I use this image to lose weight?

A:

Well, you see, you think you need to lose weight. You’ve got an image of yourself as being heavier than you want to be. Your body is an instrument of your mind. That’s why any weight loss program is useless if you don’t change your image. You may take a little bit off, but you’ll put it right back on again. People that go on diets usually gain and lose tons in their lifetime. What you have to do is build the image of what you want. You may take an old picture of yourself when you weighed maybe what you want to weigh, and take another picture of yourself, a recent one, and take the head off the recent one and put it on the old picture, maybe one where you’re in a bathing suit or something.

You can do this through Photoshop today, and if you don’t know how to do it, get somebody that knows how to Photoshop in a computer and put the recent head on the old picture, and then carry that picture, and look at it, and stare at it, and just keep focusing on it. Write out the image you see yourself in present tense, the way you want to be. It’s got to be in present tense. This is the way I am, so happy and grateful, now that I am, and don’t put pounds on it or kilos or stone or whatever weight you weigh, because your body responds to pictures, images, so you see yourself the way you want to be.

Now, as you get emotionally involved in that, that’s going to dictate the way your body’s going to go. Your body can only do what your mind tells it to do. It’ll do whatever you tell it. You’re holding an image of being overweight, and you’re trying to lose weight. Well, you’re fighting against yourself. It’s like we were just talking a few minutes ago with the person that’s having all the conflicts. That’s going to be a conflict. You’ve got an image in your subconscious mind of you being overweight. You’ve got to replace that image with one of you being the size you want to be, but it’s an image.

Now, if you can take an old picture and doctor the picture up in Photoshop or get somebody to do it for you, put those in different places. Carry them around. Sit and stare at it. Let yourself get emotionally involved. You’ve got to get that picture in your subconscious mind. Now, if you have a thin image, you’re not going to want to eat a lot of food. You just won’t. I’ve always had a thin image. I will never, ever be fat. I just won’t be because I have a thin image. Now, I don’t have difficulty with the weight, and could say that I’m fortunate or whatever, but there’s a lot of people like that, and if you build the image of yourself weighing what you want, that’s when you’ll start moving in that direction.

But it’s not going to change overnight, because you’ve got to get that planted in the subconscious mind and place it in the other one. That takes repetition, and it takes some time, but if you keep doing it day after day, you’re going to have conflicts that’s going to say, “This isn’t going to work either. This is silly. Don’t believe it that it isn’t going to happen.” Yes, it will happen. It’ll happen as sure as it’s going to get dark tonight, because it gets dark by law, and you’ll weigh what you’ll weigh by law.

Q:

Do you believe that Alzheimer’s disease can be prevented, and if so, what would you recommend?

A:

I don’t know the answer to that. I think it can be. I think everything can be changed. When I was a little boy, infantile paralysis was strong. Then they started to call it polio, and I had a couple of kids at school that died with it, and a couple were crippled by it, and now it’s almost wiped out worldwide. So, yes, things will change. All things are possible. I don’t know the answer to that question, though, really.

Q:

I have a minor but painful health issue. I am doing a lot to improve but how do I keep believing I will restore my body to perfect health?

A:

By focusing on the health. Quit focusing on the imperfection. The body is the instrument of the mind. Visualize yourself in a perfect healthy state. It might not be easy but it’s worth your time.

Q:

Can you explain how we can get rid of health-related fears caused by comment from family members and doctors? For example, cancer is genetic and because your mother had such and such, you have a possibility of getting it.

A:

Well, you see it’s both right and wrong. If things are genetic they can be passed along but you can change all that. You can change the genetic structure because you have the ability to create, you have the ability to alter the vibratory rate of the body that you’re living in. And you get rid of these health-related fears through understanding, through study.

Remember I said understanding is the opposite of doubt and worry? Well, understanding, that’s why Solomon, the wealthy king, he said, “In all you’re getting, get understanding.” You go into Forbes magazine, that’s what Forbes got and all you’re getting get understanding. Understanding is the key to everything. Let’s understand how these things all work. This is what we’re explaining in everything. Let’s understand that you’re going to attract what you see yourself attracting. Now you may attract stuff that you don’t see and you don’t think about that has been genetic. You can alter that. Just know you’ve got awesome powers locked up within you, and the more you study the more you’re going to understand, and that’s really the key.

Somebody said, “How do you keep a student-like attitude?” That was an early question. Well, there’s so much to learn, my goodness. I feel I’m just scratching the surface and I know a lot about this. Relative to the population of the world, I’m in the very top small percentage of people that understand this. Now but I don’t understand hardly anything else because I don’t want to do anything else. I don’t study anything else. This is all I study. I want to know more about it and I want you to know more about it, so I’m going to study more and teach you.

Q:

My friend’s daughter is four and she was diagnosed with leukemia and is doing chemotherapy. I was wondering if you could give me an affirmation that she can listen to all the time and when she is sleeping.

A:

I’m so happy and grateful that every fiber of my being is vibrating in harmony with God’s laws. I’m getting happier and healthier and wealthier every day. Straight positive idea.

Q:

How can I pray for someone that is sick or having problems and makes bad decisions using the principles that you teach?

A:

Well quit thinking that they’re making bad decisions and quit thinking they’re sick. You see them as being healthy. You only hold a vision of health. You hold a vision of them being in a very positive vibration. When you’re not thinking, your vision is going right into their subconscious mind, that’s how you help somebody else. That’s how you pray for somebody. Prayer is the movement that takes place between spirit and form with then through a person. It’s not getting on your knees and saying, “God, help me.” That’s making a noise on your knees. It’s the image you’re holding. There’s a powerful and into your consciousness, it flows to and through you, and as it flows to and through you, it flows to them. So you want nothing but the best energy going to them. Don’t let their state control your thinking.

Image and Confidence

Q:

I’m in deep with the self-image right now and you mention the image of perfection that lies in the center of our consciousness. Is that different from our inner self-image?

A:

No, that is your inner self-image. There’s perfection that lies within you. You’re created in God’s image. Our problem is we got that in reverse and we created God in our image. There’s perfection within you. You have creative mental tools. You have perception, the will, reason, imagination, intuition, memory. These are all higher faculties.

Well, through the use of these higher faculties, we can tap into this perfection that’s within us. The perfection within us always wants to express itself in a greater way. It’s spiritual. The spirit is always for expansion and further expression. We must permit it to express itself freely with and through us.

Q:

How do I change my self-image and paradigm and begin to see results in all of the areas of my life? That’s what I need the most. I am overwhelmed with tackling all areas at once.

A:

Don’t try to change all areas at once. Just make up your mind you’re going to change the image you have of yourself. So, you see yourself as a much more effective person. If you do that, it’ll work. It works like magic for you. Always has as always will.

Q:

Do you think our souls decide when and where we are going to be born? If so, why do some people decide to be born in unpleasant conditions?

A:

I have a theory on that. I don’t know if it’s right or not. Personally, I do believe in reincarnation. I think we’ve been here before. I think when we leave we know everything that we have learned and we know everything we have to learn, so we choose to incarnate into a situation that’s going to help us. It’s going to give us the opportunity to learn what we have to learn.

Now, that doesn’t mean we’re going to learn it. But, at least we have the opportunity to.

Q:

What if someone truly one hundred percent believes that what they did is good and most people would consider it bad. What energy is returned to them, good or bad?

A:

Good. It’s what you put out, it’s what you think. If you believe ou’re putting good out that’s the energy you’re sending out and that’s the energy that will come back. The only energy that comes back to you is the energy you’re putting out.

Q:

My best friend was abused when she was six. Her biggest desire is a happy marriage and remains unsuccessful in fulfilling that. In the past, she fell back to her own image. What should she do?

A:

I think she should go to a professional and get help. If I had that problem I would go to a psychiatrist and get help.

Q:

Do you have to raise your self image to internalize the goal or do you raise your self image by internalizing, through internalizing the goal?

A:

I think it goes back and forth. It’s like the chicken and the egg. It’s definitely a self image thing. You’ve got see yourself doing it. You’ve got to believe you can do it. See you need an image of yourself. In fact, you have two images of yourself. When you stand in front of a mirror, there’s an image that comes back at you. That is the physical. Then you have the intellectual, what you’re like. This is where you’re usually a little critical of yourself. Then you have the subconscious, the paradigm. Your self image was programmed into you at a very early age. It’s what causes us to think we can’t do this, we can’t do that. This company, PGI, we’re involved in helping people alter the self image and alter the results.

I think what you’ve got to do is feel worthy of the good you desire. You’re God’s highest form of creation, so see yourself already with these things. As you do that, what you’re doing is you’re upgrading your self image. You upgrade the self image and the self image will upgrade you.

Q:

How important is higher self activation and which methods are preferred?

A:

Higher self activation is very important. This whole program that we’re involved in moves you into a higher self activation. See what you’re doing is improving your actions, improving your behavior patterns. As we mentioned earlier, self image is vitally important and there’s many, many methods.

What we recommend here, we found is very, very effective and that’s what PGI is all about. We’ve got a team of people that work at this every day, long hours, from the time they wake up to the time they go to sleep, because they’re so involved. We’re forever improving and letting better people in.

It’s very involved higher self activation. What you’re doing is talking about… I’ll tell you what you want to do to work on that. Go and get Ralph Waldo Emerson’s book on Self Reliance, his essay on self reliance. It is so good.

Q:

Successful people sometimes have big egos and pride. I know because I have been there. I have a feeling that too much pride and ego can be negative. Where do ego and pride fit: negative or positive?

A:

Well, I think they can actually be either. I think you should feel proud of what you do because I think that improves your self image, but I think you should also realize you did not do it. You did not do it, so don’t get carried away. You were merely chosen. God does all the work with and through you. You’ve got to get that straight.

I think you have to… I think I have to have a fairly strong ego or I wouldn’t be doing what I was doing. The problem is you can have a strong ego, you don’t need to have an ego problem. It’s like there’s different kinds of confidence. There’s confidence, there’s false self confidence, and then there’s a divine self confidence. There’s a very real confidence: the guy is good and he knows he’s good. But he’s letting everybody else think he’s good, telling everybody how good he is. That kind of confidence people don’t really appreciate.

There’s a false self confidence where a person thinks, “Well, I can’t do it,” and then there’s a divine self confidence where the person says, “I’m good. I know I’m good and I know why I’m good, because I work in harmony with God’s laws.” That’s when you’ve got a strong ego, but you don’t have an ego problem. You should be proud of what you’re doing because you’re doing great work, and that will lead to greater work.

I think you can go either way with it. Like the law of polarity points out, everything is both positive and negative. It’s what we make it. The truth is everything just is. It’s neither positive or negative. We make it what it is.

Q:

How do I develop confidence?

A:

Confidence comes from knowledge. You’re probably very confident you can drive a car. You’re probably very confident you can get dressed. You’re probably very confident that you can walk across a room. All these things, confidence comes from doing it. So if you want to gain confidence in a certain area start doing it and get good at it and the better you get at it, the more confident you’ll become.

Q:

What are some quick and easy tools you can suggest for speaking with confidence? I have heard that it helps to know your subject forward and backward.

A:

You speak with confidence when you do know your subject forward and backward. You show a lack of confidence when you don’t know what you’re doing. It will express itself. Your ignorance will be advertised with everything you say and do. Your confidences are advertised with everything you say and do. Confidence comes from knowledge. The more knowledge you get about a particular situation the more confident you become about that situation.

Q:

How can I enrich the feeling of abundance to help me reach my goal?

A:

I would suggest you get started on a book called The Art of Acting, and start to act like the person you want to become, it’s a great book on acting written by a method actor teacher. And you start to become that person. Act like you’re the person you want to become. William James gives that advice – he was in Harvard way back in 1900. That’s how you do it.

Q:

How does the Stick Person interface with the ideas in Leadership and Self-Deception?

A:

Oh. It’s everything. I want you to imagine two stick people side by side. They both have senses. They have intellectual factors. One’s talking to the other one. I’m talking to you. We can be the two stick people. How do I communicate to your conscious mind from my conscious mind. I do it through words, gestures, and writing. Now keep the two of us side by side, put the heart in your subconscious because that’s where your heart is. You communicate heart to heart. Through vibration. Your feelings are being projected right into their heart. This beautiful poem says, “If I knew you and if you knew me, then both of us could clearly see with an inner sight divine the meaning of your heart and mind. I’m sure we differ less, we clasp our hands in friendliness and certain we pleasantly agree. If I knew you and if you knew me.” See the problem is we don’t even know ourselves, let alone anybody else.

So on a conscious level you communicate your words, gestures and writing, on the subconscious level and you communicate through vibration. Now you want to make sure your vibration is not your paradigm that’s being vibrated that you’re communicating. You get emotionally involved with something good about that person, you say I can help you. I really can. You feel like you can help them and then you’ll act like it.

Q:

How does the Stick Person interface with Tom White’s, excuse me Willhite’s Trinity Consciousness diagram?

A:

Perfectly. You’re a spiritual being. Spirits omnipresence. Spirit flows to and through you. I’m very familiar with Tom’s material. He and I are on the same page, we just come at it from a different angle.

Q:

How do you imagine the person you want to be when there are certain things out of your control that constantly remind you it can’t be? Immigration issues are out of my control.

A:

Well, you only change the thing you can change, and that’s you. You can’t change anything outside of yourself. Forget immigration. You can’t change the person beside you. You can’t change the date. There’s all kinds of things you’re not able to change, but you can hold the image in your mind of what you want. You’re going to find that you will effect all kinds of things outside of yourself, because it all happens by law. You’re working with one power, and the power operates by law.

Your spirit flows to and through you, and as it comes into your consciousness, you can make any image out of it you want. Now, if you’re going to let something outside dictate what the image will be, you’re going to lose. You have to ignore all the things outside of you and hold the image of what you want. You’ve got to believe it, though. What you really have to do is gain an understanding of the law. See, your belief system is based upon your evaluation of something. The more you reevaluate a situation, the more your belief is going to shift.

We believe that we have limits. And we don’t. But that’s programmed into us, and although this sounds a little preposterous, that things could change, things can change, and they do change. They change all the time. All we have to do is take a look at what’s going on today. If someone had suggested, when you were a little girl, that you could be doing what you’re doing with a cellphone right now, that would’ve been just absolutely ridiculous. Nobody would’ve believed it, but it’s happening, and it’s happening because somebody held an image of us doing that.

That’s how we got in the air. That’s how we illuminated the world. That’s how we got to the top of Mount Everest. It’s how we’ve done everything that’s happened. It starts out with thoughts – and thoughts are things. It starts in your mind. So, you have to ignore those outside situations, build the image of what you want, and that image will drive you or cause you to do things differently. Because the image changes the vibration you’re in, and the vibration in the body dictates how you act, or also dictates what you attract.

Q:

I have been taking actions in line with my goal, writing a book, and leading workshops. What can I do to expedite the creative process? The next steps have not been obvious to me.

A:

You have to hold the image, and the next step will come to you. It sounds like you think you’re stuck. Quit thinking you’re stuck. You said you’re working on your goals, you’re writing a book, and you’re leading workshops. What can they do to expedite the creative process? Well, what is the goal? What is that picture working towards? Is it just writing the books and the workshops, or are you building a concept? See, when I started, I made up my mind I was going to build a company that operated all over the world, and that’s where we are today, and that was a long time ago. It was in 1973.

I actually started in the business in 1968, but I went to work for Nightingale Conant because I wanted to get an education here. I’d been studying it from 1961 to 1968. Then I went and spent five years there, I had a pretty good understanding by that time, so I made up my mind I would build a company that operated all over the world. I was all alone. I had nothing, no one, but I was going to teach this information to companies all over the world today. Things happen. You will move in the direction you want to go. You expedite the creative process by continually visualizing where you want to go. The goal is essential because the goal causes you to stretch.

First of all, you shouldn’t know how to reach your goal. You know you will, but you don’t know how, and as you hold the image, everything starts moving. Your perception of things change. You move into a different vibration. You move on to different frequencies. You attract different people. You attract different situations, but you’ve got to know that the image in your mind will manifest in form. You’ve got to build the image up. Like the book and workshops, I don’t know if that’s the goal. What is the goal? What is the end result? That’s what you’re going after. Then the process will start to unfold for you.

Q:

The first, I am at peace with the knowledge that I am getting cutting-edge information, and I am excited about the future. I am also nervous and have self-doubt at times. Is this an expected state of mind when going through changes?

A:

Absolutely. Listen. That happens to me, and I’ve been at this for years. So, don’t be surprised if that’s happening. First of all, you’ve been programmed genetically, and then environmentally. This is before you could even walk, probably, or certainly before you could go to school. The programming was done genetically. That’s why you look like your relatives. That’s why you have all the little idiosyncrasies that maybe Mom or Grandpa or Uncle George has. I mean, it’s programmed into him your genes. Then you’re programmed environmentally.

Now, all this programming is what you’re changing, because if you didn’t change it, you would just stay in one place, and that’s what happens to most people. They don’t change anything. Well, there’s a conflict. They’re getting this information, and the program inside’s saying, “Don’t do it.” So, that’s where the self-doubt comes from. Ask yourself this. Your behavior is generally controlled by your paradigm, to a large degree, so you want to change your behavior… You have the ability to … in fact, we’re the only creature on the planet, I believe, has the ability to do this.

We can get outside our ourselves and look at ourself like a stranger can. We want to look at our own behavior and see how we’re acting, saying, are these actions serving me? Where am I going to be if I keep doing this, if I keep going like this? Then you listen to some of this information, and some of the things it tells you to do, and say, “If I change and did it that way, would that be serving me? Well, yes. I’d be so much better off.” Well, you see, the self-doubt comes in from the paradigm. The paradigm’s trying to talk you out of it. So, what you’re experiencing, it’s very normal, and everybody on the line is aware of… They’re all going through the same thing.

Q:

The image I have of myself is a slim person. Due to menopause, my body has changed. When I see my reflection in a shop window, I do not recognize myself. How can I use this image to lose weight?

A:

Well, you see, you think you need to lose weight. You’ve got an image of yourself as being heavier than you want to be. Your body is an instrument of your mind. That’s why any weight loss program is useless if you don’t change your image. You may take a little bit off, but you’ll put it right back on again. People that go on diets usually gain and lose tons in their lifetime. What you have to do is build the image of what you want. You may take an old picture of yourself when you weighed maybe what you want to weigh, and take another picture of yourself, a recent one, and take the head off the recent one and put it on the old picture, maybe one where you’re in a bathing suit or something.

You can do this through Photoshop today, and if you don’t know how to do it, get somebody that knows how to Photoshop in a computer and put the recent head on the old picture, and then carry that picture, and look at it, and stare at it, and just keep focusing on it. Write out the image you see yourself in present tense, the way you want to be. It’s got to be in present tense. This is the way I am, so happy and grateful, now that I am, and don’t put pounds on it or kilos or stone or whatever weight you weigh, because your body responds to pictures, images, so you see yourself the way you want to be.

Now, as you get emotionally involved in that, that’s going to dictate the way your body’s going to go. Your body can only do what your mind tells it to do. It’ll do whatever you tell it. You’re holding an image of being overweight, and you’re trying to lose weight. Well, you’re fighting against yourself. It’s like we were just talking a few minutes ago with the person that’s having all the conflicts. That’s going to be a conflict. You’ve got an image in your subconscious mind of you being overweight. You’ve got to replace that image with one of you being the size you want to be, but it’s an image.

Now, if you can take an old picture and doctor the picture up in Photoshop or get somebody to do it for you, put those in different places. Carry them around. Sit and stare at it. Let yourself get emotionally involved. You’ve got to get that picture in your subconscious mind. Now, if you have a thin image, you’re not going to want to eat a lot of food. You just won’t. I’ve always had a thin image. I will never, ever be fat. I just won’t be because I have a thin image. Now, I don’t have difficulty with the weight, and could say that I’m fortunate or whatever, but there’s a lot of people like that, and if you build the image of yourself weighing what you want, that’s when you’ll start moving in that direction.

But it’s not going to change overnight, because you’ve got to get that planted in the subconscious mind and place it in the other one. That takes repetition, and it takes some time, but if you keep doing it day after day, you’re going to have conflicts that’s going to say, “This isn’t going to work either. This is silly. Don’t believe it that it isn’t going to happen.” Yes, it will happen. It’ll happen as sure as it’s going to get dark tonight, because it gets dark by law, and you’ll weigh what you’ll weigh by law.

Q:

Do you ever have times where you feel stuck in all areas of your life? What have you done to overcome this feeling, or what can you suggest?

A:

I have, but not for a long time, probably a number of years now. Every now and then I feel stuck for a few minutes. But if you’re stuck in all areas of your life, you’ve really got to shake it up. What you got to do is say, “Wait a minute. This is stupid. I’m doing this to myself.” Stuck is just a word for not thinking, letting outside forces control you. Have a real good talk to yourself. Give yourself help. Say, “Come on. Wake up. Get out of this.” Now start doing something really smart, and make up your mind.

If you’re feeling stuck, you’re letting something outside control you. It could be someone or something, and just say, “I’m not going to do this anymore. This is really stupid. I’m going to take control of my life, damn it. I’m going to make it interesting. I can start doing something interesting right now.” Go do something you really feel like doing, something that you’ve been wanting to do for a while. Go buy yourself something. Get yourself a nice shirt or something. Go buy a pair of shoes.

I often tell people, and some of the people in the company, I say, “Go and have a spa day. I’ll even pay for you to go and have a spa day. Get your nails done. Get a facial. Do whatever to make yourself feel good.” Absolutely refuse to stay stuck. Stuck is just a word for not thinking. Give yourself a good talking to, and then go do something creative. Do something for somebody else. Go help somebody. That’ll make you feel good.

Q:

How can I convince myself that this new learning is the truth?

A:

By doing it. When you hear the truth, you’ll know it. You say, “What does that mean?” Let’s think of this for a moment. In the room you’re in, there’s music playing. There’s music playing in the room I’m in too. I don’t hear it and you don’t hear it, and that is because we’re not on the frequency that the music is being broadcast on. The broadcasting company is sending out music on a frequency and that is in the room I’m in. There’s movies. There’s all kinds of movies going on in the room I’m in, but I don’t see them either, because my eyes and ears don’t operate on that frequency.

If I turned the radio on, it would pick up the music on the frequency that it’s being broadcast on by the receiver. It would speed it up a few million times onto a much higher frequency and I would hear it because it would broadcast. Then it would be raised to the frequency my ears operate on and I would hear it. When you hear the truth, the truth resonates with the essence of who you are. Your receiver is the essence of who you are. There’s perfection within you. It’s just that all this old stuff is piled on top of that perfection and it’s controlling us. We call it a paradigm. We’ve got to get rid of that.

When you hear the truth, the truth resonates with the essence of who you are, and on a conscious level, it’s called knowing.

Q:

What is the difference between a paradigm and a self-image?

A:

Well a self-image is part of the paradigm. A paradigm is a multitude of ideas that are fixed in your subconscious mind that you automatically act on. One of those ideas is your self-image. It’s what you think of you. It’s an idea that’s fixed in your mind, and if you don’t like yourself, then you’ve got to change that self-image and that’s changed by changing that part of the paradigm.

Q:

I’m having trouble communicating to my girlfriend when I feel jealous or bothered. What can you suggest?”

A:

Be honest. Tell you how you feel. You should be honest with her. But don’t worry about being criticized. Jealousy is afraid of losing something you haven’t got. It’s a silly thing. But I would suggest you be honest with her. It’s an insecurity on your part. It’s got nothing to do with her. You’ve got to become more confident in yourself.

Q:

I am making eczema products. Am I contributing to my child’s eczema because I’m studying and thinking about it?

A:

You could be. But I think if you’re looking to clear it up, you start to see the child with nice, clear skin. Clear, pink skin. That’s all you see. But if you’re thinking about it all the time, you’re transmitting that idea, so you could be. So stop doing that. See the result of the eczema product. Clear skin.

Q:

Is there a specific way that you would recommend studying The Science of Getting Rich or would you suggest completing Winner’s Image first, or is it okay to study both at the same time?

A:

You could study them both at the same time. It’s the repetition of the information that you’re going to really find beneficial. You can start studying them both at the same time. That is not a problem. With The Science of Getting Rich I think you’d be wise if you read chapter four, fourteen, and seven, every day in that order. I did that myself for years. But you can study them both at the same time. One is The Science of Getting Rich is a general overall program on prosperity really, consciousness, prosperity consciousness, and The Winner’s Image is strictly on self image, how you see you. So, you can benefit from both sides.

Q:

How do I boost my confidence? This fear of confidence is stopping me from making plans and achieving goals.

A:

First of all you have confidence. Don’t say you haven’t got confidence because that is not true. You’re probably confident you can drive your car. You’re probably confident you can get dressed. You’re probably confident you can walk around the block. Confidence comes with knowledge. And if you lack confidence in a particular area it’s because you lack knowledge of that area. As you gain the knowledge you will gain the confidence. People look at doing something they’ve never done before and they are afraid to do it because they don’t have any confidence. They don’t have any confidence because they lack the understanding of how to do it. How do you gain the confidence? By doing it. Experience and you will develop the confidence. So, quit saying you haven’t any confidence and know that you’re boosting your confidence all the time. As you learn things you become more confident. You want to start, sit down and say, “What am I confident in now?” All kinds of things you’re confident in.

Q:

I am a shy and uneasy guy. This is my biggest challenge, shyness. How can I overcome this?

A:

Take your mind off yourself. You’re shy because you’re thinking of yourself. Your energy’s inverted. Start getting interested in other people. I don’t care who you’re talking to. The next time you’re talking to them have three or four standard questions that you’ll ask them and listen real carefully to them. Get three or four standard questions. When you start talking to somebody get them to repeat their name and then you repeat their name so that you’re going to use their name. When you start talking to them ask them, “Are you from this area? Oh where are you from?” Pay attention. “How did you happen to come here? How did you happen to move here? What do you do? Do you work? Do you have your own business?” Ask questions. Listen really carefully. You do that for awhile you’ll overcome the shyness. Shyness is when you have your energy inverted. You can’t be shy and be uneasy if you’re thinking of the other person. It’s only when you’re thinking of yourself.

Q:

Knowing both paradigm and self-image have a direct impact and shape on our results, what are their differences? Which one has a stronger impact on our results, and how can we change both?

A:

Well, first of all, the self-image is part of the paradigm. Self-image is an idea. It’s the idea and how you see you. It’s how you perceive yourself to be. That was probably created by someone else. And it is part of the paradigm. Remember, the paradigm is a multitude of ideas that are fixed in the subconscious mind that have almost exclusive control over our habitual behavior, and almost all of our behavior’s habitual. So self-image is part of that paradigm. As you change your self-image you’re changing your paradigm. Change how you see yourself. You may start to comb your hair different or do your hair different, dress different, walk and talk different. I mean, create a whole new persona for yourself.

Q:

Why did you want your kids to go to school?

A:

Well, first of all, when my kids started school, I had just been studying this for a short period of time. I think you learn things at school that you’re not going to learn outside. I don’t think school is gonna prepare for life properly, but I didn’t go to school. My kids did, because I wanted them to. But I didn’t tell them they had to go. I didn’t say they didn’t have to go. I just asked them where they were going to go and where they decided they were going to school. Because I think you develop a social intelligence in school that if you don’t go to school you won’t develop. That’s primarily why I wanted them to go.

Q:

Please explain weight release and how it works.

A:

Well, weight release is just what it says. See, most people try and lose weight. They go on a diet to lose weight. Stop and think of how you’re programmed. If you lose the keys to your car, what’s the first thing you automatically do? You automatically start looking for them. Let’s suppose you had three $50 bills in your purse and all of a sudden they’re not in your purse – you’ve lost them. What is the first thing you’re going … You’re going to look for them.

Well, when you lose weight, the first thing you do is look for it. And that’s exactly what people do: they look for the weight they lost. They don’t understand it. It’s all done on a subconscious level, but that’s what they’re doing. And they find it. If a person loses 15 pounds, they usually gain 20. Then, they’ll shave off the 5 or 3 of it anyway.

Weight release is a mental concept. You hold a picture in your mind of your body being the way you want to see it, because that’s the way it’s going to be anyway. Your body is an instrument of your mind. And it’s a dumb terminal, it’ll only do what you tell it. The intelligence that the body has is what you give to it. There’s intelligence in every cell of your mind, and it’s in every cell of your body.

So if you say, “I’m going to lose 10 pounds,” you probably will, but you’ll gain 12. And you say, “I now see myself at my perfect weight. I will release anything that will obstruct the manifestation of my image,” there you go. And mean it.

Q:

How do you believe in yourself and a goal to the point where you know you will achieve it? I doubt myself often.

A:

So do I. Don’t feel bad about that. I’ve doubted myself many times. I still do. You see, if you’re going after a goal and you don’t got any idea how you’re going to reach it, and let’s suppose there’s some real bad stuff going on around your life right now, and you happen to let your guard down and you start to let it bother you, you’re going to doubt yourself. No wonder you’re going to doubt yourself, because you’ve let the bad stuff that’s going on around you start to get into your head. And so you’ll start doubting yourself.

You’ve got to kick it out of your mind. Say, “I’ve got to quit this nonsense.” But I still doubt myself. But I don’t do it very often. I’ve got a pretty big sales goal and I don’t have many doubts about it anymore, but I used to have. I haven’t reached the goal. I’m a long ways from it yet, but I know we’re going to do it. I mean, I see it. It’s already happened in my head. It’s only a matter of time. I’ve just got to get the salespeople, every one of them to understand this is the way, eventually it’ll work.

Q:

What is your advice on dealing with jealous people? Every time I tell a coworker of mine that I’m doing something she wants to do it, too.

A:

Jealousy is afraid of losing something you don’t have. You might write that down. It’s a very good definition. Somebody taught me that a long time ago: “Jealousy is being afraid of losing something you haven’t got.” It’s a sickness.

You know, in Emerson’s essay on Self Reliance, Ralph Waldo Emerson, he wrote, “There will come a time in every person’s education when they’ll realize envy is ignorance and imitation is suicide.” Now, he said “envy is ignorance”. That’s a form of jealousy. That’s like me looking at the results Mykie’s getting and I’m going to be envying her. “I wished I was Mykie. God, I wished I was her. I envy her. I’m jealous of her.” Well, what am I really saying? I don’t know that Mykie has used her marvelous mind and an infinite power that flows to and through her to get the results she’s getting.

I too have those magnificent mental faculties. That same power flows through me. If Mykie can do it, I can do it: same power. Well, envy is ignorance. It’s saying, “I don’t understand that.” That’s saying, “Mykie’s been favored by some emotional or capricious god.” Or, “Mykie’s got talent and ability I don’t have,” which isn’t true.

See? Ignorance. Envy is ignorance. And he said “imitation is suicide”. Trying to be like somebody else is a dumb game. You can’t be like anybody and you shouldn’t want to be. You’re unique. There’s nothing on the face of the Earth that’s like you. You want to celebrate your own uniqueness: “Wow! I am the only expression of life like me in the whole Universe.” That’s pretty nice. And so is the next person you’re talking to.

Q:

Sometimes I become aware of low-frequency vibrations in specific areas of my body. For example, shame in the stomach and fear in the chest. I feel as though they are stuck there. What can I do to change this?

A:

Whoa! That is really good! “Sometimes I become of frequency vibrations in specific areas of my body. Shame in my stomach, fear in my chest. I feel as though they’re stuck there. You know, everybody listening can benefit from this. You eliminate them. You love your stomach. When you feel shame in your stomach, you love it, and you just think, “Where would I be without it? I love my stomach. My God, I love it.” Put your hands on it and send it just nothing but love.

And fear in your chest, say, “No, that’s where … my heart is there. That heart of mine is circulating blood through my body every 33 seconds. It circulates the body through hundreds of miles of passageway, carries all the food in and all the garbage out in one sweeping change. I love my heart, and I’m going to eliminate … I’m just releasing all that fear, and I’m replacing it with love; love in the heart.”

“Love in the heart wasn’t put there to stay. Love isn’t love until you give it away.” That’s the lyrics from a song [inaudible] I think wrote.

Q:

Can you please elaborate on the guidelines of writing a self-image statement?

A:

Sure. Sit and think, what would I really want to be like? And you may think I like the way he does this, I like the way she does that. I like the way this person dresses. I like the way this person walks. I like the way this person talks. I like the way this person meets and greets other people. Pick people that you admire. It’s not the person, it’s something about them that you admire. And you will see various aspects of their personality. Say, I like that, I like that.

Now, I’ll give you an example. When I started to build a self-image, and you build a self-image, you pick examples. When I was a kid there was a young guy that I hung out with now and then, his name was Donny Miller. Now this was during the Second World War, and none of our fathers were around, they were all either in Europe or in the South Pacific shooting guns at each other and in the middle of a war. Donny’s dad was home, he wasn’t well. Now we never went around Donny’s house, and I think it was because his dad wasn’t well. They came around our house but Donny’s dad had had a heart attack and he was really not in good shape. But Donny’s dad dressed very well, he always wore a suit, shirt and tie, and he walked. He’d walk up and down the street. I’d see him walk up and down the street every day. And he had a very casual walk, it was so relaxed. This stuck in my mind from when I was a kid.

And so I’m making an image, how do I want to be? And I thought I want to walk like Donny’s dad. And that’s the way I walked. I even built an image of how I’m going to walk. I built an image of how I’m going to dress, how I meet and greet people, how I treat people. And it’s got nothing to do with what anybody else is doing. It has to do with the way I want people to perceive me. I’m not who I think I am, I am not who you think I am, I am who I think you think I am.

So you see, build a picture of yourself of how you’d like other people to perceive you. And you start by writing it out. I am so happy and grateful, now that. And you write it all out in the present tense. The way you walk, the way you talk, the way you meet and greet people, the way you dress. There you go.

Q:

I often feel that I can read another person’s thoughts or intentions. When I express this, they say that it is not true. How do I know if what I am feeling about a person or their situation is a paradigm that is running me or if it is my intuition?

A:

That’s probably your intuition. Just don’t talk to them about it. Keep your mouth shut. If you feel another person is thinking something, they’re probably thinking it. You watch, you’ll get feedback. If it’s somebody you’re very close to, somebody you’ve got a real strong rapport with, somebody you’re in love with, or it could be somebody that you work very closely with, so you’re on the same frequency of thought often. And you think they’re thinking something, ask them. If they say, “Yeah, how’d you know?”

That’s positive feedback. The more positive feedback you get, the more confident you will be.

I tell people that in seminars. I’ll read people’s energy in a seminar and sometimes they say, “No, that’s not what I’m like.” I know they’re lying to me. I know exactly what they’re like. I don’t need anybody to confirm what I know. I know it. I’m very intuitive and I work at developing my intuition. You’re probably very intuitive. Keep going.

Q:

What is meant by know that you know?

A:

You got to know that you know. When you know something you want to know that you know. I know this whole universe operates by law and I know that I know it. That’s called awareness.

Q:

What are the differences between visioneering, your self-image statement and all the other descriptive writing exercises suggested in “Thinking Into Results,” as well as some of your other programs? I feel that they are similar but different. Can you please clarify?

A:

Well, the similarity is that you’re making it in present tense and you’re seeing things the way you want them to be. You bring them into present tense, you don’t make it in the future. The visualization, we use that on the goal and that’s to plant the idea properly in your subconscious mind. You visualize, you get yourself emotionally involved with it. And when you do that you’re stirring the higher side of your own personality. There’s a part of you that’s a part of the whole universe. Spirit is omnipresent, operates on frequencies, the frequencies are all connected. If you see my fingers as frequencies they’re all connected. There’s no line of demarcation where one stops and the other starts. They’re all tied together.

Do you know what that means? That means everything is connected. It doesn’t appear that way to our eyes but if we start to think and study we’ll find that everything is connected. Everything is an expression of the same thing.

You and I are different in that we can cause things to change. We’re creative beings. I think I’ve said this many times on calls. We’re the only creature on the planet, so far as we know, that’s totally disoriented in our environment. All the other little creatures in the environment are completely at home in their environment, they blend in. We’re totally disoriented. We don’t blend in and that is because we’ve been given the mental, creative faculties to create our own environment. The others blend in to their environment. We create our own environment.

Now, I don’t know about you, but I like a nice environment. I’m working in a beautiful studio. At the click of a button, boom. Hear the music? I have it playing all the time, even when I’m not here. Now, I just turn it off when I’m broadcasting, but I have a beautiful studio and I have nice calming music playing all the time. I had somebody decorate this that really understood decoration, a woman who understood color. So it’s very pleasant. This is a beautiful place for me to work so I can be creative. But I visualized it before I ever saw it. I had it in my mind before it was ever built. That’s what the vision is. You’re seeing what you want.

Q:

How important is it the way we dress when running a public event? Is casual or business dress code better?

A:

Well, I think you should dress in a manner that’s conventional yet acceptable. I don’t think you’d wear a three-piece suit if you’re calling on a farmer in a field. Personally, I think you should always be dressed as the best dressed person there. You know? If you’re going on business, you dress for business, look like you are in business.

Q:

How can I pray for someone that is sick or having problems and makes bad decisions using the principles that you teach?

A:

Well quit thinking that they’re making bad decisions and quit thinking they’re sick. You see them as being healthy. You only hold a vision of health. You hold a vision of them being in a very positive vibration. When you’re not thinking, your vision is going right into their subconscious mind, that’s how you help somebody else. That’s how you pray for somebody. Prayer is the movement that takes place between spirit and form with then through a person. It’s not getting on your knees and saying, “God, help me.” That’s making a noise on your knees. It’s the image you’re holding. There’s a powerful and into your consciousness, it flows to and through you, and as it flows to and through you, it flows to them. So you want nothing but the best energy going to them. Don’t let their state control your thinking.

Q:

Self-image, I don’t enjoy standing in front of a group of people. Can you advise how can I grow on this area?

A:

I’d go and join Toastmasters. Go and join Toastmasters. When you learn to speak in front of a group, you’d be amazed how your confidence will grow. It’s a marvelous self-image building concept. Look up Toastmasters, go and join the group.

Q:

I seem to intimidate more than influence. I am confident with myself because I have been told I am handsome my entire life, but I am not arrogant. How do I influence people instead of intimidating them?

A:

If you think you’re intimidating them, that’s probably the attitude you’ve got. Change your attitude. From the attitude you want to help people. Quit thinking of yourself, just think of them.

Q:

What is your recommendation for a morning routine using the curriculum we have in BPC? Currently, I am using your meditation, writing my vision, and then watching the winners image video.

A:

That’s fine. Make sure you’re doing it, though. No amount of reading or memorizing is going to make you successful; It’s the understanding and application of the wise thoughts that make the difference.

Meditation

Q:

What are your thoughts on the Transcendental Mediation? I have learned this method recently from a certified teacher.

A:

I think it’s excellent. I’ve been doing it everyday for a long time. Twice a day. It’s excellent. Cleans the pipelines out. It renews, rejuvenates the cells of your body and your brain. I don’t know how people get along without it.

Q:

For about two years now, I have been feeling pain in my chest. I try not to focus on it, but at times I am fearful that it could be something serious. Both the doctor and the emergency room have said that I’m fine. Do you have any advice?

A:

Oh, get a real good relaxation exercise. You got to practice relaxing. You’re probably experiencing some stress or something. You’re putting pressure on yourself. I would practice relaxing. You may practice meditation.

You might practice some yoga, practice meditation, get into meditation, study some meditation. You’ve got to put yourself in a very calm state. Start mentally practicing relaxing, and quit thinking about that.

Start to affirm to yourself that you’re calm, you’re calm and confident.

Q:

I have been studying every morning, meditating, and visualizing. My goal includes increasing my income and developing more revenue streams. Are there any other practices I can do?

A:

No. I think you’re on the right track. Most people when they get into this if it’s relatively new they’re fairly impatient. They want to do it overnight. It doesn’t happen overnight. See, the first thing you’re doing is you’re changing your perception of your life and how you’re living it. You’re changing your perception of how you spend your days and how you earn your money. And that doesn’t change overnight, but you keep working at it, and it does change. And pretty soon the new way is very commonplace. That’s just the way you’re going to live. Now, that’s based on my own experience.

Q:

What are some affirmations that you can recommend to help mentally during a pregnancy and delivery?

A:

Well, we’ve got relaxation tape. You have a meditation tape that we can send you if you write in to [email protected]. What you want to do is practice relaxing. Just practice taking control of your body. There’s an app. It’s a apparently good one I am told. Now, I haven’t used it, but hold on. It’s an app called Calm, C-A-L-M. It’s an app you can download.

Money

Q:

I attended an event where there was an exercise where we had to physically burn cash. They prepared everyone mentally to do it by previously repeating a declaration several times, “I rule money, money doesn’t rule me.” Just before the first person began they stopped the game and asked who was about to burn the money? I was about to burn it. They said “That’s wrong. You have to honor and respect money. If you burn the money how would you expect to get more. With this act you are saying that you don’t need the money and don’t care about having it.” What I thought was, money is energy and it’s always present everywhere in a different form and I could always earn more than I need. A hundred dollars is only a number so I’m not attached to it. Some people were talking about how much money a hundred dollars is to them. It was too much for some but not for others. From a millionaire’s perception, I would have burned it as a piece of paper. How would you explain it from your point of view?

A:

Well I think it was a silly exercise and, I don’t necessarily agree with it. But I could take and burn a hundred dollar bill, it’s not going to affect me one way or another. It’s just going to make me a hundred dollars less from what I’ve already got. So, I have no intentions of burning it. Sometimes I spend it like I’m burning it but I don’t agree with the exercise. I think you do have to respect it. I think money goes where it’s invited and it stays where it’s welcome, but it’s also earned. You don’t get it for nothing. So you’ve got to become creative and you have to give it your best.

Q:

Is it normal to ask for money upfront? I find it’s too much work to deal with unpaid invoices, and it gives me the greatest amount of unhappiness. How can I ask for money before I deliver the results?

A:

Well first of all I don’t know what you’re doing. You can ask for it upfront, sometimes you can ask for some of it, you certainly should ask for some of it. You don’t have to ask for it all. If you find a problem asking for money, you’ve got a problem with money. I don’t have any trouble at all asking a person for money. If you’re selling, that’s something you have to get good at or you’re not going to sell very much. First of all, you shouldn’t be going after the unpaid invoices. Hire somebody to do that for you. You should get a good part of it upfront and hire somebody else to do your collections.

Q:

How do I find a good financial planner? Do you have any recommendations for a good financial planning company?

A:

No. I formed a partnership with mine. It’s very important if you don’t know how to handle money get somebody that does. Find a real good lawyer, and a real good bank. Ask if they can advise you. Don’t just go to the first person that comes along.

Q:

I want to book a 5-star hotel for a spring break trip. It will cost 5,000 dollars. Do I go ahead and book it and have faith that I will receive the money even though I do not have the money? Should I have faith in the unseen?

A:

That depends on the person. I wouldn’t wanna recommend either way. Would I do it? Yeah I probably would but I’m very good at earning or manifesting money. I mean I can come up with money faster than you can turn around because I know where it’s at and I know how to get it. If you’re not really good at it, what’s your record like. How long does it usually take you to come up with five grand? See I can come up with five grand within the next 20 minutes but I’m not everybody – I’m very good at this. That would depend on you. It’ll be done on your faith.

Q:

I am about to rent a new apartment. I did not look at the cost at first like you always say. I found one which I really like but it is two thirds of my monthly wages. It is big with a garden and an extra room where I can have my office in the future. What do you recommend I do in terms of the cost and money?

A:

Well if that were me I would rent the place and I would give myself a raise right away. Money is reward received for service rendered. I’d figure out a way to provide more service. I’d provide enough service to pay for that place. Start living the way you want by no longer living as you don’t want.

Q:

I have visualized a job with a monthly income of 20,000 Euros. I did achieve this. I now have an opportunity for an even larger income. This job will be more than full-time and my paradigm is blocking me. What do you think this is?

A:

Well maybe you don’t feel worth of the good that you desire. Maybe it isn’t the right move for you. The job will be more full-time. Well you’re not more full-time. You only have so much time. It’s what you’re going to put into it. Your paradigm could be blocking you because you may think you put the pinnacle at the 20K, but understand that that’s nothing. You can multiply that and if the opportunity is there, you want to step up and grab it.

It’s not according to anything that’s happening. What’s happening is all developed in awareness. Awareness is not something you lose. It’s not memory. You don’t forget.

Q:

It is said that money must circulate the whole time. How can I differentiate between wasting money and bringing it into circulation?

A:

Well, money should be in circulation. It should be working. Everybody has a certain amount of money, or at least should have, probably, that’s not in circulation, where they leave it sitting in the house or sitting in a wallet, or something like that, but wasting money is just getting rid of it. That’s a perception problem. I get rid of a lot of money, and I don’t ever think I’m wasting it because I’m doing something with it that I want to do. You want to see yourself using money properly. See, giving is a prosperity law. Most people don’t understand.

There’s a great book, The Magnificent Obsession. It was written by Lloyd C. Douglas. W. Clement Stone read that book years ago, and on the weekend, and then he started to practice what the book taught. By 1970 he was the wealthiest man in the United States. He’s gone now. He outlived his whole family, though. He lived to be over a hundred. He was a chairman of combined insurance companies. Well, you want to learn how to use money. Most people don’t understand money. They get it, and they hold it. You don’t want to hold it or hoard it. You want to use it, and the more you give, the more you’ll receive.

Our company gives away a lot of money, and I remember we were giving a certain amount of money to a foundation for building schools in Africa. And my business partner, Sandy Gallagher was up, and they were thanking her for what she did, what we were giving, and on the stage she says, “I’m going to double what we’re giving.” And she almost choked while she was saying it because she wasn’t quite sure how she was going to do it, and she said, “The first week or so it was a little difficult. Then it got easy. Now you don’t even miss it.”

It’s a law of receiving/giving. You don’t give to receive. You give to give, and the universe sends it back to you. That’s circulating money. Start to see money coming to you. I believe money goes where it’s invited, and it stays where it’s welcome. Money is energy. Money, as somebody said, is God in action. Money is a phenomenal tool. Money will enable you to extend good far beyond your own physical presence. I love earning it. I don’t like counting it or looking after it, but I just love earning it because earning money is a creative process, and the more creative you become, the more you can earn, and then get it moving. Just keep studying it. You’re on the right track.

Q:

I have a one million goal that I have had for years. I study Born Rich and … Excuse me. I study Born Rich and practice paradigm shifting daily for over six months now. I even wrote Serenity for over 90 days. Things have not improved. What am I doing wrong?

A:

Well, are you doing anything that is profit earning? You’ve got to do something that earns a profit. You’ve got to do something that earns money, and you might look at setting up more than one source of income. We’ve started something new called the Entrepreneurial Marketplace, and people who join that, I see the biggest benefit. We’re just really getting it into high gear. It’s a great thing to belong to. You’ll see people that have multiple sources of income, and you could set up joint ventures with them. You’ll get ideas of how to set up multiple sources of income. You want to mix with people. You’ve got to get different ways of money coming in. And that’s multiple sources of income.

Now, it sounds like you’re letting the results control you and you’re looking and it’s not happening. Well, you don’t know it’s not happening because there’s all kinds of things happening that you don’t know are happening. There’s an unseen world that we’re a part of. Things go on there that you can’t see until they do manifest, so it’s what you believe in in your consciousness, that is really the big thing.

Q:

My goal is to become a multi millionaire and earn my annual income monthly. I currently earn approximately a $100,000 per year. I am going through a divorce and I am a single mother with two children, one with special needs, so medical insurance through employer is critical. How can I make my goal happen when I am not an entrepreneur and I work for the public sector? I do not have a business idea or any plan to start a business.

A:

Well, first of all I think your idea of earning a million dollars a year working for the public sector is an illusion. I don’t think they’ll pay you a $100,000 but I think you can earn a million dollars. You want to look at becoming an entrepreneur. And as far as the medical insurance you can earn enough money to do that so don’t think you can’t. What you want to do is start seriously entertaining entrepreneurial concepts. We’ve got a beautiful one. In fact I was just with a man who has become a consultant with us and you can earn a million. In fact I know women that are doing it in our business. You want to inquire about this. If you want to earn a million dollars a year the odds of you doing it working for somebody else is rather slim. It can be done but you will greatly increase your odds as an entrepreneur. And you see the idea that you have to have a job because you need the insurance, you can pay for the insurance yourself and don’t think you can’t. Start to entertain the idea of why you can and how you can. You want to send in and get somebody to talk to you about the opportunity as a consultant with our company.

Q:

I understand the value of act as if strategy but when my income is less than my desired standard of living what would you suggest I do?

A:

I would suggest you change your income. I would suggest you stop and think how can I add income. There’s all kinds of sources of income. You can set up as many sources as you want. Ideas will come to you on how you can earn more money. Start earning it. Really listen carefully. Look at affiliate programs. We have affiliate programs. Send a letter to [email protected].

Q:

What actions do you recommend that I implement daily to experience a quantum leap in standard of living and in annual income?

A:

Well, first of all I would have to know what you’re doing. But I do know that if you want to substantially increase your income you have to add sources of income. You can have multiple sources of income. You don’t just have one. You can have many sources of income. And that’s what you want to look into. You can write in to our customer service team, and ask for information on the affiliate programs. You can recommend these programs to people and you can earn money on it. There’s all kinds of affiliate programs.

Q:

How do you stay focused on the belief of prosperity in the present moment? When the bills need to be opened and paid, how can we manage these thoughts?

A:

Listen, I’ll be the first to tell you that’s not an easy thing to do, but it’s something you’ve got to do. If you go in to Born Rich into the second chapter, I talk about a debt repayment program. You’ve got to get the debts into an orderly state and maybe pay more than you should be paying to do this. You get your debts into an orderly state, and then you focus on prosperity. You can be saving money. You can be focusing on prosperity while you’re heavily in debt if you set up an orderly debt repayment program. And it’s all outlined in the second chapter, How Much is Enough in Born Rich. Get it and do it.

Q:

Is there a difference of tithing 10% of your earnings or buying gifts that I feel would be helpful to uplift someone who is down?

A:

No, I think you’re both on the track there. You’re giving, and giving is a good habit. But you want to make sure you’re not trading. There’s a difference. And I think there is a bit of a difference there. Tithing should be consistent. What we do, the company does, we do as individuals, because it’s a great idea. It’s much the same as a farmer. A farmer brings in the crop and saves part of the crop so he can plant seeds for the next crop. Well, this is like seeding, and that’s the way it works. You’re working with universal laws, what you put out comes back, the more you give the more you receive. It’s worth studying. I think tithing is one of the best ideas to ever come down the road.

Q:

Is it best to visual net monthly or annual sales? I’m envisioning a certain amount of money in my possession, but it is tricky when the flow of money is constantly in and out of the account.

A:

Well, stop thinking it’s going to be in and out of the account. Build a target in your mind, and then work towards and hit that target. It doesn’t matter whether it’s monthly or annually. You live by the month, live by the week. So probably a month you’re going to leave something there every month. So over 12 months you’re going to have a nice little nest egg.

Q:

My husband and I have been to visit and decided on the house we want to buy. How do I move forward with the next steps? We are unsure where the money is coming from to afford this house.

A:

Well, you don’t have to know where the money’s coming from, you only have to know it’s coming. You could talk to the owners about owner financing, get a real good real estate agent, get them to brainstorm with you. You just make up your mind you’re going to get it. I’ve seen all kinds of people buy houses when they didn’t have any money. There’s all kinds of ways of doing it, but you’ve got to make up your mind you’re going to get the house, you’re not going to entertain why you can’t, and you’re only going talk to people about how you’re going to do it. And the way will show itself.

Q:

My goal is to be making annual cash flow of $650,000 by 2019. I currently earn $72,000 fixed salary. Is my goal realistic? What are your suggestions for manifesting this goal other than visualization?

A:

Well, your $650,000 probably is not going to come in a salary. Earning $72,000 on a salary, somebody else has decided what you’re going to earn. And that’s what happens when you have a job. If you’re going to earn $650,000, I would suggest you get into a business for yourself, and that’s where you decide what you’re going to earn. You see, since I was 26 years old I’ve always decided what I was going to earn. I don’t want anybody telling me what I can earn. Now, prior to that, I didn’t have any awareness of this. I didn’t know that you could actually start a company and decide what you’re going to earn. I just didn’t know that. You know? I think you know that now. So it’s a matter of how you’re going to do it.

Q:

What are some tips or suggestions that one can practice regularly to become respected and to become financially free?

A:

Make up your mind that you’re going to do what you’re doing better every day. Keep getting better at what you do, and you will grow into something very, very good. Most people never do that. The people that earn the big money are the people that are very good at what they do. And if they’re not very good, they don’t last long. But they become very, very effective. The amount of money you earn is direct ratio to the need for what you do, your ability to do it, and the difficulty there is in replacing you.

So if there’s a great need for what you do, and you just work at getting better at it, you’re going to be very difficult to replace. That’s when your stock goes up. And people will respect you for your ability to do such good work.

Q:

Can you please share your first experience regarding changing your paradigm?

A:

Ray Stanford told me if I would do what he tells me, do exactly what he told me, that I could have anything I wanted. I really didn’t believe that.

But then he said, “Now, what do you really want?” All I wanted was some money. Well, he said, “How much money?” And I just said, “$25,000.” I mean, I might as well have said $25 million. I really didn’t believe I was going to get it. Well, he had me write it on a card, and he said, “Carry the card in your pocket.” That’s where the goal card that we hand out comes from. “Carry it in your pocket, and every time you touch it the sensory factor of touch is affected, that’ll send a message to your brain and it’ll activate the cells in your brain that have been impregnated with the picture of what you wrote on the card. Because when you write, writing causes thinking, thinking creates an image, and the image is impregnated into the cells in your brain.”

And so I wrote, “$25,000.” I didn’t believe it. I really didn’t believe it. But it happened. So I’m convinced you don’t even have to believe it to start. You have to believe it before you get it, but you don’t have to believe it to start. So write out what you want. You don’t have to believe it, but you’ve got to want it.

And what happened was, and although in retrospect, I didn’t realize this at the time but it was happening. I stopped thinking of debt and I started to think of earning money. Now, you’ll say, “Well, weren’t you thinking of that when you were in debt?” No, I was just thinking of debt. There’s a difference. And if you’re thinking of your debt, that’s what you’re going to get. That’s why I say having a goal of getting out of debt is a bad goal, because you’ll attract more of it. And I started to think of earning money, because when I started to think about it I heard people talking about it, because I could hear people talking about it, it caused me to think about it. So I got myself into a new cycle of thinking.

That was when the paradigm really started to shift. Now, at the time, I didn’t realize it, because I didn’t have somebody explaining what I’m explaining to you. I mean, Ray was just a motivational guy. I mean, he was an upbeat guy, and he’d just tell me to do things and I’d do them. He would just tell me to do what he thought would work. He didn’t explain it like I’m explaining it. Like, he hadn’t studied it for 50 years like I have. But he had studied enough to know that anyone can do better than they’re doing.

So looking back, that’s when the paradigm really started to change for me. And, you see, the view of it changing motivated me. I started to realize things were changing. I started to earn an extra few dollars a month, then it got up to $100 a month, pretty soon I was earning an extra $400 or $500 a month. God, I was only earning $400 to start with. Then, it got up to $15,000 a month before the year was out.

So, you see, the change was dramatic for me. It was really dramatic. So when somebody says, “Do you believe this?” Yeah, I believe it. I’ve got good reason to believe it.

Q:

Can you please give some examples of images to hold in our mind regarding bank accounts and credit cards? I can easily see the lifestyle I would live with improved income, but not my bank account.

A:

Look here. Now, that’s a gift I got. That’s a gold paperclip. It’s a money clip. But you see that? It’s money. It’s a $100 bill. I don’t know how many there are, 10, 15 of them.

Do you know what I did when I first started? I got one $100 bill, and I put monopoly money inside it, or just paper money. And you just feel it. You feel a thick wad of money. Your mind can’t tell the difference. If you tell yourself, “That’s all $100 bills.” That’s what your mind will start to accept. So you can do physical things to trick yourself. And it works.

Visualize yourself with it. Take a bank account and doctor it up. I remember one time Sandy Gallagher had checks written to herself, she had a couple of them. They were pretty big ones, too. We were coming back from the Bahamas. We came from the Bahamas to Toronto. Well, any plane coming in from the islands, from the Caribbean, the Mounties are on top of it.

They took our bags apart like you would not believe. They took them apart, they took her wallet apart, and they came across this check. Now, if you’re carrying more than $10,000 in cash or in a check even, you’ve got to report it. You’ve got to mark on your slip when you’re entering the country that you have it. Well, she didn’t put that down. They wanted to know, “What is this?” “Well,” she says, “it’s a make-believe check I’ve made out to myself.” Man, she had to really convince them of it. I’ll never forget that.

I saw her cash that check, too. I did see her get to a point where she cashed that check, and she cashed it. But at any rate, that’s what she was doing. She had a check made out to herself and she carried it around.

Listen: Jim Carrey said he was on the Ellen Show, a couple of times. But at any rate, Ellen’s manager was Jim Carrey’s manager. And I asked him about it and he said, “No, that’s true.” Jim Carrey’s manager said that Jim came to him when he first started to manage him, and he took out this old wallet out of his pocket, and he took a check out of it … I forgot whether he said it was $10 million or $20 million. He said, “I want you to get me a job where they’re going to pay me this much.” And the manager said, “Yeah? Well, good luck, fella.”

Do you know something? He got him a job that paid him that much. I think it was $20 million. That’s right. Jim Carrey was carrying that check when he was a nobody. He lived outside of Toronto here. He was just a stand-up comic from a little place, I think called Burlington, just about 50 miles from Toronto. Carried it around in his pocket because he believed he’d get it.

That’s what you do. You do different things like that. You read The Magic of Believing by Claude Bristol. Liberace, great star. He’s gone now, God bless him, but very flamboyant guy. He was reading that book, that made him the star. Wayne Newton was developed by Liberace. Wayne Newton was just a fat little kid that played a piano, played a guitar. Liberace molded him. Now, he’s Mr. Vegas. Phyllis Diller was an ordinary housewife, became an international star as a comedian from reading The Magic of Believing. Get the book The Magic of Believing by Claude Bristol. Read it. Memorize it. It’s a powerful book. That’s what you’ve got to do.

Q:

I am $7,000 in debt, $1,000 per month expenditure and not earning at the moment. My experience is in online marketing and servicing accommodation properties. I am very hungry for success. Is it okay that my main focus is on money that I don’t have for starting a business or should I be focused on something else?

A:

No, that’s fine. You’re $7,000 in debt and you have expenses of $1,000 a month. You’re not earning anything. Well, you better be getting instructions from somebody that’s online. The Morrisons are very good at that, they run courses every now and then. Don’t let this debt scare you. First of all, it’s not very much. $7,000 is a little bit. You can knock that off in nothing flat when you get this business rocking.

The only way you can lose is to quit. You make up your mind, you will not quit. You get discouraged, you might get upset, but you will not quit. And if you have to borrow some money to keep it going, go borrow some money to keep it going. And you should be hungry for success, we all should be. Hungry for growth is what you’re talking about. Success is growth. Success is the progressive realization of a worthy ideal. You’re going somewhere and you’re going to keep moving in that direction. So make up your mind you’re going to do that.

You’re on the right track. Don’t feel bad about it. If you’re getting by on $1,000 a month, you’re doing very well.

Q:

I decided to focus on one business, real estate, I do not know how I will reach my goal by selling accommodation properties alone. Should I look or another type of income as well?

A:

No. Become the very best at what you’re doing. You see, we’re dealing with a world of amateurs really. There’s very few people who master what they do. The ones who master what they do, they write their own ticket. They don’t wonder what they’re going to earn, they decide what they’re going to earn, they know exactly what they’re going to earn because they’re so good at what they do. And they never stop getting better at what they do. Master what you do. Get so good at it people come to you, you won’t have to go to them.

Q:

On Saturday my phone app for the Secret stated, “When you need money it is a powerful feeling with you, and so of course through the law of attraction you will continue to attract needing money.” I have lived most of my life this way, needing money. Can you please explain how it looks to not need money?

A:

That’s great. It’s really a good way to live. Don’t think of needing money, love it. But understand you got to get it in its right place. Money is something you use. Don’t let it use you. Money is something that you use, you do not let it use you. You love people and use money. Don’t get that reversed. Most people love money and use people. When I say love it, feel comfortable with it, feel very comfortable with it. Stop thinking that you need it. You want it. Wanting it is a normal thing. Want comes right from the center of our being, that’s our spiritual essence of who we are, spiritual DNA is perfect.

Well, spiritual DNA wants to express itself in a greater way. Start to see yourself. Do you know the strange thing? All the books on money that teach you how to earn money very rarely talk about money. It’s all about consciousness. It’s developing a prosperity consciousness. Get into “The Science of Getting Rich,” I got a copy sitting right here on my desk, “The Science of Getting Rich.” Getting into “Think and Grow Rich.” Get into Catherine Ponder’s book … “Dynamic Laws of Prosperity.” There’s all kinds of books.

Start to see it. Don’t think lack and limitation, think prosperity. See yourself with it. Get yourself a $100 bill and put a bunch of paper in behind it and wrap it with … Look it. There, there’s a $100 bill. I’ve got a paper clip with it. I had something like this and it had all kinds of false paper behind it so I had a wad of money in my pocket and that’s what I did. And your subconscious mind doesn’t know. You just feel all that money in your pocket. When you start impressing that upon your subconscious mind people say, “That’s silly.” Well, it worked for me. Helped me earn millions of dollars and I didn’t have a whole lot of the gray matter working at the time. It works.

Start to see yourself with it. Don’t think you need it. Think you got it. See yourself already in possession of it. Go visit nice places. When you go out for lunch, go to a real good restaurant, leave a good tip. If they’ve got valet parking, use the valet. Don’t park the car yourself. When you go to clothes stores, go to the best clothes stores. Pick out the garments you’d like to wear. You don’t have to buy any of them. If you haven’t got any money, just go shopping there mentally. But go into the place. Get into a prosperous environment mentally.

Q:

Does the phrase, “the love of money is the root of all evil,” mean that we are not allowed to give love and appreciation to money for its services, and how can we attract it if we don’t love it?

A:

Well I think what it’s saying is you don’t let money control you. I wrote in Born Rich that you should love people and use money. Most people love money and use people. So, you know, money’s not the root of all evil, it’s what people do with it. Money is just energy. That’s all it is. It’s your thinking of it. It’s how you see it. I see money as a wonderful tool. I never have enough, I always want more because it enables you to extend the good you do far beyond your own physical presence. So see it as an obedient servant. You attract it when you’re in harmony with it. Money goes where it’s welcome, where it’s invited and stays where it’s welcome.

Q:

I’ve been involved in development programs from PGI, TIR, Brian, Tracy, Tony Robbins, and John Assaraf for some years now. The result of learning is very good and I am grateful for what I have achieved so far and confident I am going to achieve much more in the coming years. I recently joined BPC and have a goal of an amount of money I would like to achieve. I know it is possible, but how quickly can this happen and does this come from multiple sources of income? My current annual income is about $500,000 US, and I would like to be $5 million US in the same time frame. Is this asking too much?

A:

Not at all. Not at all. I think if you can earn half a million, you can earn 500,000 … or 500,000, you can earn five million. Not at all. How did you go from nothing to 500,000? You just follow the same process. Understand that $500,000 is the amount of money you receive for service that you rendered. The five million’s going to be for service, you just got to figure out how to provide more service. That probably will be through multiple sources. Almost all high-income people are receiving it through multiple sources.

Q:

In You Were Born Rich, you suggest that there is an important difference between squandering and wise spending. Could you outline a reference please?

A:

Well, squandering is buying anything, you know, just spending the money. I used to do that. It was silly. And I realized one day it didn’t make any sense, so I decided to pay more attention to what I was doing. And I think I spend wisely today. I think if you read Born Rich, attempt to give it the best you’ve got of following it, you’re going to find that you’re going to be making some wise decisions with respect to money.

Paradigms

Q:

Can the reason that you are not reaching your goal be a paradigm that you are not consciously aware of? How do you recognize paradigms that you are not consciously aware of?

A:

By looking at your behavior and your results. There’s all kinds of paradigms or ideas in your paradigm that you’re not consciously aware of. A paradigm is a multitude of ideas that are fixed in your subconscious mind. Habit is an idea that’s fixed in your subconscious mind that you act on without any conscious thought. So, the paradigm is a multitude of them. Now, the paradigm, if it’s stopping you from reaching your goal, you may not be aware of what it is, but you can certainly see the symptom or the effect of it by looking at your results and looking at your behavior. So, you say, that’s a result I want to change, well what’s causing that result, and whatever’s causing the result is your behavior. That behavior is provoked or caused by an idea in your subconscious mind. So, write out the behavioral pattern that’s causing the problem. Write it out, all its negativity, write it out. Then say what would be the polar opposite to that and in the present tense write it out. Say something like, “I’m so happy and grateful now that…” and you write it out in the present tense, the polar opposite to the problem.

Take the problem and burn it, literally burn it. That’s just symbolic, but it helps. It would be like lighting a candle in a church, that’s symbolic. That’s how you change it. Now when you get it written out, a positive one, you have to understand that it isn’t fixed in your subconscious mind, you have to plant that a number of times before it gets fixed. So, you start to write it out, write it out about ten or 20 times every day for 90 days and you’re gonna find that behavior will start to change, and your results will start to improve.

Q:

Apart from the repetition of information to change one’s paradigm, are you familiar with how effective Psych-K, EFT and similar methods are in doing so? I am wondering if the repetition of information alone will be enough to override traumatic childhood experiences that negatively impact one’s paradigm.

A:

Well I’m not familiar with Psych-K, EFT so I couldn’t comment on that. I do know that repetition works.

Q:

I am 58 years old. I was raised in a hard working, but poor family. It is extremely difficult for me to change my paradigms. Am I too old to start changing them and become successful?

A:

I was 58 twenty-six years ago and I’m working at changing mine. I’ll be 84 in July and I think I’m just getting warmed up. That’s not too old. Forget your age. How old would you be if you forgot your age? Forget about the hard working family. Don’t live from your history, live from your imagination, like I just quoted Steve Cubby.

Your family wasn’t poor, they probably just didn’t have a lot of money. They were probably rich in other areas, so you want to have all that good stuff come to you. “It is extremely difficult to change my paradigm.” Don’t say that. Say I’m so happy and grateful now that I am improving everything I do every day. I’m talking about little things like pick up your socks, cut your nails, comb your hair. Little things. Things you’re putting off now, stop putting them off.

And you’re not too old for… my goodness. You know that medical science is moving is you’re probably only half way there. Change your attitude. Get the attitude going right, thoughts, feelings, and actions. Start to think how young you are compared to me. You’re just a kid, for goodness sake.

Q:

It seems to be much easier for a young person to shift their paradigms than it is for a 60 year old. What method can an older person use to shift a paradigm more effectively?

A:

Well you want to shift your paradigm more effectively when you’re working on changing your belief system. And you start on one or two things at a time. When you shift your person, shift your paradigm then you begin forming new habits. Pick up after yourself if you don’t now. If you go to bed and leave the house untidy, start tiding up so when you wake up there is order in the house. Start doing things you’re not doing. Do it until it becomes a habit that is a paradigm shift.

Q:

Can a person have physical symptoms of a paradigm shifting?

A:

There’s no question about it. Make a big change and the form of their body begins to change. The body is an instrument of the mind. As you make dramatic changes in your paradigm, you’re making dramatic changes in the vibration. The body is the manifestation of it.

Q:

The first, I am at peace with the knowledge that I am getting cutting-edge information, and I am excited about the future. I am also nervous and have self-doubt at times. Is this an expected state of mind when going through changes?

A:

Absolutely. Listen. That happens to me, and I’ve been at this for years. So, don’t be surprised if that’s happening. First of all, you’ve been programmed genetically, and then environmentally. This is before you could even walk, probably, or certainly before you could go to school. The programming was done genetically. That’s why you look like your relatives. That’s why you have all the little idiosyncrasies that maybe Mom or Grandpa or Uncle George has. I mean, it’s programmed into him your genes. Then you’re programmed environmentally.

Now, all this programming is what you’re changing, because if you didn’t change it, you would just stay in one place, and that’s what happens to most people. They don’t change anything. Well, there’s a conflict. They’re getting this information, and the program inside’s saying, “Don’t do it.” So, that’s where the self-doubt comes from. Ask yourself this. Your behavior is generally controlled by your paradigm, to a large degree, so you want to change your behavior… You have the ability to … in fact, we’re the only creature on the planet, I believe, has the ability to do this.

We can get outside our ourselves and look at ourself like a stranger can. We want to look at our own behavior and see how we’re acting, saying, are these actions serving me? Where am I going to be if I keep doing this, if I keep going like this? Then you listen to some of this information, and some of the things it tells you to do, and say, “If I change and did it that way, would that be serving me? Well, yes. I’d be so much better off.” Well, you see, the self-doubt comes in from the paradigm. The paradigm’s trying to talk you out of it. So, what you’re experiencing, it’s very normal, and everybody on the line is aware of… They’re all going through the same thing.

Q:

Do our paradigms have feelings? If so, how do I differentiate my feelings versus my paradigms’ feelings?

A:

That’s a heck of a good question, by the way. Your paradigms cause feelings. Feeling is a word we use to describe our conscious awareness of the vibration we’re in. If you were to look at your body, let’s say you put your body in front of an infrared television camera in a completely dark room, you’d see your body is a glistening, radiating, gleaming form. Back in 1934 someone perfected a form of photography that’ll photograph the energy coming from the body. The body glows. You just don’t see it with the naked eye. You could train your eye to see it, though.

But the body is a mass of energy in a high speed of vibration. Well, the vibration it’s in causes us to feel. We say, “I feel.” If you don’t feel good, you’re in a bad vibration. If you feel really good, you’re in a real good vibration. Your paradigm is the program in the subconscious mind that generally controls the vibration you’re in. If you’ve got a real bad paradigm, you’re going to feel sort of crappy most of the time, and if you’ve got a real good paradigm, you’re going to feel pretty good most of the time.

Now, when you consciously think of something and get emotionally involved that’s turning it over to the subconscious, that causes you to move into a new vibration. That is a new feeling. So, if you concentrated on something really pleasant, you would start feeling real good because the concentration on the pleasant thought will put you in a pleasant vibration. Feeling is a word we use to describe our conscious awareness of the vibration we’re in. How do I differentiate between my paradigms and your own thinking? Well, you just ask yourself, “Do I like the way I feel,” and consciously start to change it. You can change it. You can be in control of your own feelings, make yourself feel the way you want. Get happy songs, and sing them.

Q:

The question is, what is the best way to change old paradigms? I currently have a goal card, and I recite the many things that I would like to change multiple times per day.

A:

Oh, don’t try and change too many. You try and change too many things, you generally end up not changing anything. First of all, understand what a paradigm is. Paradigm is a multitude of ideas that are fixed in your subconscious mind. It’s a multitude of ideas that are fixed in your subconscious mind. They’re called habits. So, you take a look at your habit patterns. Pay attention to what you do, starting when you get out of bed in the morning. There’s probably something you can work on early, maybe what time you do get out of bed in the morning.

I was in my kitchen at 5:00 this morning. It’s a habit. I didn’t always do that, but it’s a habit I’ve done for a long time. So, you may say, “What do I do,” and you start paying attention to your own behavior. Start in the morning, and look at all the different things you’re doing, and then say, “Is this really serving me? Is it helping me? Is it improving the quality of my life?” If the answer is no, say, “What would be the exact opposite of this?” Let’s say you sleep in. Exact opposite, don’t sleep in. Get up. When you wake up, get up. You can go that way. Whatever the habits are, write down some of the habits that you don’t particularly like about yourself. Don’t spend a lot of time thinking on them. Just say, “This is what I’m doing. I do them automatically, but they don’t serve me. What is the opposite to that?” Then take one or two, and start working on doing the opposite. Pretty soon, you’ll change the habit.

I used to go to bars all the time, years and years ago. One day I went into a bar, and I picked up a glass, and I looked around, and I thought, they’re all bums in here. All of a sudden it dawned on me, I must be, too. I’m always here. So, I put the glass back down. I said, “I’m never going to pick that up again,” and I never have. That was many years ago, and I never had. But you know what I did? I walked out of there. I went right across the road to the racetrack. Instead of spending money on the alcohol, I started to spend money betting on horses.

Now, what’s the moral of this? If you get rid of a bad habit, you don’t consciously and deliberately replace it with a good habit, you’re going to replace it with another bad habit. I didn’t know that at the time, but there’s no excuse for ignorance. I don’t do that anymore. I take a look at the habits I want to change. I replace it with one that’s essentially the opposite, the good one. I’m working at it all the time. We’re always trying to improve the habit patterns. That’s changing the paradigm. That’s how you go about it. Pick a couple habits you don’t like, say, “What would be the exact opposite,” and then start doing them, and make up your mind you’re going to stick at it, and you’re going to stick at it, and you’re going to stick at it until you’re doing them automatically. And then take a couple more. That’s the way it works.

Q:

What is a habit that you are currently working on?

A:

Well, I’m working on a couple of different ones right now. I’m working on expanding my view of different projects that we’re working on, okay? And as I expand my view on it, I know that ideas are going to come that’ll change it. I’m doing that on two different projects. So it’s not necessarily habit. It’s a perception that I’m working on. Which is all the same thing.

Q:

I have a one million goal that I have had for years. I study Born Rich and … Excuse me. I study Born Rich and practice paradigm shifting daily for over six months now. I even wrote Serenity for over 90 days. Things have not improved. What am I doing wrong?

A:

Well, are you doing anything that is profit earning? You’ve got to do something that earns a profit. You’ve got to do something that earns money, and you might look at setting up more than one source of income. We’ve started something new called the Entrepreneurial Marketplace, and people who join that, I see the biggest benefit. We’re just really getting it into high gear. It’s a great thing to belong to. You’ll see people that have multiple sources of income, and you could set up joint ventures with them. You’ll get ideas of how to set up multiple sources of income. You want to mix with people. You’ve got to get different ways of money coming in. And that’s multiple sources of income.

Now, it sounds like you’re letting the results control you and you’re looking and it’s not happening. Well, you don’t know it’s not happening because there’s all kinds of things happening that you don’t know are happening. There’s an unseen world that we’re a part of. Things go on there that you can’t see until they do manifest, so it’s what you believe in in your consciousness, that is really the big thing.

Q:

What is the difference between a paradigm and a self-image?

A:

Well a self-image is part of the paradigm. A paradigm is a multitude of ideas that are fixed in your subconscious mind that you automatically act on. One of those ideas is your self-image. It’s what you think of you. It’s an idea that’s fixed in your mind, and if you don’t like yourself, then you’ve got to change that self-image and that’s changed by changing that part of the paradigm.

Q:

Do people have to get married and have kids? Is this something required by the laws or is this a paradigm we can question?”

A:

It’s definitely a paradigm. You don’t have to do anything.

Q:

How do I find my strongest paradigm that will make the biggest difference in my results?

A:

Well, first of all you’re looking at the result that you want to change. Pick the result you want to change and start working on that. That’s where you’re going to see the biggest change. You see, if you take a look at your results in various areas and say, “Which one would I really like to change?” Then back it up. Say, “Why am I getting that result?” Well, because of the behavior pattern. There’s a pattern that you’re involved in, and the more you’re involved in that pattern, the stronger the pattern becomes.

What you’ve got to do is say, “I don’t like that result.” Write out what you do like. What would be the opposite to the result that you’re getting? And then start to see yourself doing what has to be done every day, and it’s not going to be easy, because the old idea doesn’t want to die. Habits die hard. The old idea doesn’t want to, but are you disciplining yourself? You give yourself a command and follow. Say, “This I will do,” and you start doing it. You will change the pattern and that’s when you change the paradigm and that’s when the results change.

Q:

This journey of paradigm shift is wonderful and life changing. Most of the people I am surrounded by are not on this journey and I feel lonely sometimes. Any suggestions?

A:

Well you will feel lonely sometimes. But you’ll get past that, and you’ll start to attract people to you want around you. You may not live next door but you’ll be in touch with people, and you meet people here. Get into self help groups. Get into mastermind groups. What you need is assembling support and you do that through other people. But you will feel a little lonely at times, but don’t let that dissuade you just because you’ve got everybody involved in it.

Q:

How can I tell when my paradigm has been broken down?

A:

When your results are changing in the area that you want to break it down. You want to change the paradigm, you measure it by the results.

Q:

What would be the first step in helping kids identify their paradigms and combat the ones on the way? I see constant scrutiny that kids seem to face from adults trying to fix them.

A:

Well, I think if you’re working with kids, forget that they’re kids. They’re little people that have limited experience and limited vocabulary. And if you keep that in mind, understand their mind is the same as yours. There’s only one mind, there’s just many expressions of the same mind. And when you’re working with a child you just keep those things in mind and then communicate the same as you would to anybody else. Help them understand how the mind functions. They’ll understand it. They’ll learn many more complicated things.

Q:

I am using the daily affirmations to get out from under my paradigm. My situation is getting better but I still face the same full circle every month. I am unable to pay rent and my staff on time.

A:

Well, I don’t know what you’re doing but I do know that you should be doing it better than you’re doing it. There’s certain things you’re not doing. You’ve got to focus on the money earning side of your business. You’re letting the business control you. You’ve got to control the business. You say you’re facing it every month. You probably expect it. You’ve got to stop that and start asking yourself, “What can I do today to make certain I bring in revenue today?” That is a law with entrepreneurs. That’s what you have to do. And that is the only way you’re going to change your situation. You’ve got to change your perception of money, how it’s earned, and you’ve got to get earning it. You’ve got to do the thing. There’s a lot of things you’re doing that are not going to bring in money. Your first responsibility every morning is what am I going to do today that’s going to bring revenue in.

Q:

I am working with a marketing coach. She practices law of attraction. How do I manage conversations where she wants to be realistic about goals so that I don’t blame her if I don’t meet them in the time frame?

A:

Well, understand realistic is determined by a paradigm. And the Wright Brother’s were not realistic. Edison was not realistic. Anybody that made any great breakthrough were not being realistic. In other words they crashed right through logic and they went after what they want. Let her know that you’re not going to be realistic, and stunt your growth. You’re going to see yourself as what you want. If she practices the law of attraction then she must understand this. Because you can only attract what you’re in harmony with. And if you’re in harmony with lack and limitation that’s what you’re going to attract. That’s what realistic does. Ed Hillary didn’t get to the top of Mount Everest because he was being realistic. Nobody ever got to the top of Mount Everest before him. He was told he was going to kill himself doing that because many people, all kinds of people, not most of them, but a lot of them went up that mountain and never came down again.

Q:

Once limiting paradigms have been identified, aside from repetition, how do I impress empowering attitudes and paradigms on my subconscious mind?

A:

Mentally living them. Mentally see yourself there. What you should do is get Stella Adler’s book, The Art of Acting. She’s a great acting teacher. She’s gone now, and she never actually wrote a book. Kissel took all her lessons and turned it into a book. So when you read the book, it’s not like reading a book. It’s like you’re going to her acting classes. And that’s what you have to do. You’ve got to act like the person you want to become.

Q:

If I change my mind about a goal, is that my paradigm keeping me from fulfilling my end goals?

A:

Yes, it very likely is, Bonnie, yeah. Okay, if you’re going after what you want, you’re not going to change your mind on it. But the paradigm could try and talk you out of it. Don’t let that happen.

Q:

How do you change deeply rooted religious paradigms?

A:

Well, the same as any other paradigm. A paradigm is a montage, actually, of ideas that are fixed into your subconscious mind. And they’ve been fixed there through repetition and sort of habitance. It’s a habitual … A habit is something you do automatically without giving any conscious thought. Well, our paradigms are mostly they’re put there by other people. And most religious convictions have been passed from one generation to another. The average person will say they’re religion’s right and all the rest are wrong. They don’t even know their own religion very well, and they don’t even know what the others are.

So just think how silly that is. And that is pretty broad spread right across the board. So changing deep rooted religious convictions is like changing any other habit. It’s like changing how you part your hair or whatever you’re doing. It’s an idea in your subconscious mind. What I would recommend you do is analyze it. Say, “Is this serving me? Does this make sense? Is this in harmony with the law?” If it’s not upward moving, if it’s not growth-oriented, it’s probably not right.

Q:

How can I tell the difference between the universe presenting me with an opportunity and my paradigm trying to distract me?

A:

Well, what you have to do is ask, “Which way is this going to move me?” If it isn’t serving you, it’s probably the paradigm trying to stop you. If you get a feeling to do something that’s going to move you ahead, then you know it’s on the right track. It’s the universe presenting an opportunity. What you have to do is ask yourself, “Is this going to serve me?” And if isn’t, it’s probably the paradigm. Because the paradigm doesn’t want you to move ahead. Paradigm wants you to stay right where you are, unfortunately.

Q:

Knowing both paradigm and self-image have a direct impact and shape on our results, what are their differences? Which one has a stronger impact on our results, and how can we change both?

A:

Well, first of all, the self-image is part of the paradigm. Self-image is an idea. It’s the idea and how you see you. It’s how you perceive yourself to be. That was probably created by someone else. And it is part of the paradigm. Remember, the paradigm is a multitude of ideas that are fixed in the subconscious mind that have almost exclusive control over our habitual behavior, and almost all of our behavior’s habitual. So self-image is part of that paradigm. As you change your self-image you’re changing your paradigm. Change how you see yourself. You may start to comb your hair different or do your hair different, dress different, walk and talk different. I mean, create a whole new persona for yourself.

Q:

Can you please share your first experience regarding changing your paradigm?

A:

Ray Stanford told me if I would do what he tells me, do exactly what he told me, that I could have anything I wanted. I really didn’t believe that.

But then he said, “Now, what do you really want?” All I wanted was some money. Well, he said, “How much money?” And I just said, “$25,000.” I mean, I might as well have said $25 million. I really didn’t believe I was going to get it. Well, he had me write it on a card, and he said, “Carry the card in your pocket.” That’s where the goal card that we hand out comes from. “Carry it in your pocket, and every time you touch it the sensory factor of touch is affected, that’ll send a message to your brain and it’ll activate the cells in your brain that have been impregnated with the picture of what you wrote on the card. Because when you write, writing causes thinking, thinking creates an image, and the image is impregnated into the cells in your brain.”

And so I wrote, “$25,000.” I didn’t believe it. I really didn’t believe it. But it happened. So I’m convinced you don’t even have to believe it to start. You have to believe it before you get it, but you don’t have to believe it to start. So write out what you want. You don’t have to believe it, but you’ve got to want it.

And what happened was, and although in retrospect, I didn’t realize this at the time but it was happening. I stopped thinking of debt and I started to think of earning money. Now, you’ll say, “Well, weren’t you thinking of that when you were in debt?” No, I was just thinking of debt. There’s a difference. And if you’re thinking of your debt, that’s what you’re going to get. That’s why I say having a goal of getting out of debt is a bad goal, because you’ll attract more of it. And I started to think of earning money, because when I started to think about it I heard people talking about it, because I could hear people talking about it, it caused me to think about it. So I got myself into a new cycle of thinking.

That was when the paradigm really started to shift. Now, at the time, I didn’t realize it, because I didn’t have somebody explaining what I’m explaining to you. I mean, Ray was just a motivational guy. I mean, he was an upbeat guy, and he’d just tell me to do things and I’d do them. He would just tell me to do what he thought would work. He didn’t explain it like I’m explaining it. Like, he hadn’t studied it for 50 years like I have. But he had studied enough to know that anyone can do better than they’re doing.

So looking back, that’s when the paradigm really started to change for me. And, you see, the view of it changing motivated me. I started to realize things were changing. I started to earn an extra few dollars a month, then it got up to $100 a month, pretty soon I was earning an extra $400 or $500 a month. God, I was only earning $400 to start with. Then, it got up to $15,000 a month before the year was out.

So, you see, the change was dramatic for me. It was really dramatic. So when somebody says, “Do you believe this?” Yeah, I believe it. I’ve got good reason to believe it.

Q:

I often feel that I can read another person’s thoughts or intentions. When I express this, they say that it is not true. How do I know if what I am feeling about a person or their situation is a paradigm that is running me or if it is my intuition?

A:

That’s probably your intuition. Just don’t talk to them about it. Keep your mouth shut. If you feel another person is thinking something, they’re probably thinking it. You watch, you’ll get feedback. If it’s somebody you’re very close to, somebody you’ve got a real strong rapport with, somebody you’re in love with, or it could be somebody that you work very closely with, so you’re on the same frequency of thought often. And you think they’re thinking something, ask them. If they say, “Yeah, how’d you know?”

That’s positive feedback. The more positive feedback you get, the more confident you will be.

I tell people that in seminars. I’ll read people’s energy in a seminar and sometimes they say, “No, that’s not what I’m like.” I know they’re lying to me. I know exactly what they’re like. I don’t need anybody to confirm what I know. I know it. I’m very intuitive and I work at developing my intuition. You’re probably very intuitive. Keep going.

Q:

What type of exercise can I do to change my paradigm of fear and doubt?

A:

Well, fear and doubt, first of all, fear is the emotional involvement with a doubt. Doubt and worry are negative ideas. And you go from doubt and worry, they’re on a conscious level, that’s a psychic problem. And you get emotionally involved with the doubt and worry, that sets up an emotion called fear. That emotion has to be expressed and it expresses itself on a physical level as anxiety. The anxiety you suppress and it turns to depress, depression. So you’re starting on a negative trend. It starts with doubt and worry. Don’t worry and quit doubting.

Now the opposite of doubt and worry is understanding. Understanding comes about through study. The only way to develop understanding is through study, that’s what this program is doing. It’s helping you understand certain things. If you’re having doubts, it’s just a lack of awareness. Doubt is a negative concept, get away from it. Put it out to pasture. Don’t spend any time there. Start to think of how you can, why you want to, how you will. Just get on the positive track. A doubt is a negative concept. The opposite of doubt is understanding. Understand that you are capable of changing anything.

Q:

When presented with an apparent opportunity, how do I know if it’s my intuition or my paradigm telling me not to do it?

A:

Well intuition’s always there first. Ask yourself if it’s going to serve you, if it’s going to improve the quality of your life. And if it is, your paradigm … you’re not getting it from your paradigm. Your paradigm is more inclined to slow you down, doesn’t want you to change. If it’s an opportunity, it’s probably to change, so it’s probably coming from intuition.

Q:

I have had a poisoned paradigm for most of my life. I am trying to hone my visualizing and adding emotion to make it effective. I am in sales. Can you help?

A:

Yeah, quit trying. Quit trying. You’re sitting on a chair, try and stand up. You can’t try; you’re either going to stand up or you’re not going to. And quit thinking of your poisoned paradigm. You don’t think that way at all. Don’t think in reverse. Hold an image of everything that you want and give the best you’ve got, provide the best service you’ve got, and see yourself as a great salesperson. That’s how you’ve got to see yourself.

Relationships

Q:

I tend to intermingle and spend time with people who don’t serve me anymore because they haven’t changed or improved yet. I do it because I value the fact that they stood up with me one day and helped me during difficult times. How can I adjust through this and change my perception towards it?

A:

Well, it doesn’t mean you have to hang around with them. You remain friends and you have respect for them. It’s just that you don’t want to live how they’re living now. Well, don’t spend as much time with them. There’s people in my life that I’m friends with. I don’t spend a lot of time with them because I don’t want to do what they’re doing. I don’t want to think the way they’re thinking or live the way they’re living. I’m not judging them. I’m just saying that’s not what I want.

I don’t have a lot of real close friends. I have many acquaintances, but I think I’m much the same as many people that are fairly successful in what they’re doing. They’re very busy. I am really busy. I have a lot of things going on. So, if I’m going to spend time with other people I want to spend time with people who are upbeat, who are very positive and moving in the right direction.

That’s like most of the people in our company, like Tracy that’s on the line with me. She’s a very upbeat woman and everybody talks well of her. Never hear anybody complain about the way she works. They all bragging about the way she works. That’s the kind of people you want to work with. That’s the kind of people you want to spend time with and that’s what I do. You don’t need to feel guilty about not spending time with other people, just gradually drift away. You only have so much time in a day, you want to put it to good use.

Q:

How can one heal himself from a relationship break up as it is creating a lot of pain over a period of time?

A:

It’s probably gonna create some pain. A break up is something like a death. It’s something that’s gone from your life and it controls a large part of your habits. See, if there’s two people together, they have a lot of habits that are hooked up together. That’s why divorce and death have the highest form of stress or cause the highest form of stress. It’s because you automatically do things with that person and that person’s gone now, you’re not doing it anymore. You’re gonna say this- “you’re gonna go there, do this, and all the habits that are hooked up with that person are gone, but time will heal that”. Understand that.

Q:

How do you achieve the balance of using social media to connect with people while not wasting time to connect with too many people who share thoughtlessly?

A:

I don’t know if there is a balance. I see people that are using them, and I don’t go there, I don’t use it. We have someone in our company that does it from a company perspective for the company. I never go there, so I’m not interested. It’s the chatter of the masses only they’re doing it with pictures. It’s a waste of time. Get so interested in your life and what you’re doing so you don’t care what somebody else is doing. Help them where you can but trying to monitor them is a waste of time.

Q:

What video or document do you recommend to send to a prospect before meeting for the first time?

A:

Well it depends on why I’m calling on them. If you’re a consultant, there’s all kinds of videos on YouTube that you could recommend they look at, if you’re a consultant. I probably wouldn’t send them anything I would just go and sit down and find out what they wanted and then I’d help them get it.

Q:

I had done my list of qualities of a man that I want to attract and I imagine myself with him every day, but I keep attracting men with some of the qualities but not all of them. Do I have to compromise?

A:

No. Absolutely not. You do not have to compromise. And quit saying I keep attracting men who have some of the qualities. You’re negating your own vision. You see, so when somebody comes along, you’re going to say “this guy is good, but he’s not the one.” You visualize. You go for a walk with him. You read a book to him, let him read one to you. You have dinner with him, make love to him. Hold his hand, you know? Sit and talk to each other. You just don’t put a face on him, but you make it very real.

Now what you’re doing is you’re putting yourself in that vibration and then that’s the only thing you can attract, but if you keep saying to yourself, “I keep attracting men who have some of the qualities, but not all of them,” that’s what you’re going to keep attracting. You are in the vibration that you have to be in to attract everything you want to attract and you do not compromise. Comprise leads to more compromise until you end up with something you don’t want at all.

Q:

I saved old letters from ex boyfriends and family pictures. When I see them, I think about those good memories. People throw away old things so they can focus on the future. What is your opinion on this?

A:

Well, nature abhors a vacuum. Get rid of the old and you can make room for the new. We say like I hate this chair. I hate this sofa. When people say that, I say, “Well get rid of it.” I say, “You couldn’t put anything there if you had it.”

Do you want the ex boyfriends? I don’t think you want your life all crowded up with all that nonsense. If they’re ex, they weren’t what you wanted. I would get rid of all that stuff. I might save some family pictures, but what the hell? Nature abhors a vacuum. Go read the last chapter in You Were Born Rich. Create a space for the good that you desire.

Q:

As I go through Bob Proctor Coaching, I have been making changes, forming new habits and new thoughts. How would you suggest I interact with my partner, close friends, and family? They all seem to think that I am acting weird.

A:

Well, that’s something you’re just going to have to live with because they don’t know what you’re doing, and they will think that. A lot of people thought I was crazy. I mean, some of the things I did, as I look back – I’ll give you an example. I was on the fire department. That was the best job I ever had, and it was very difficult job to get. I was fortunate that I got on. I quit to go and wash floors – to clean offices. Everybody thought I was out of my mind. The chief called me in every day, and said, “You know, Bob, you can’t come back if you leave.” I was the second person since 1934 to quit. Everybody thought I had lost it.

Then I built that business up, and it was real big, and I quit. I was earning hundreds of thousands of dollars a year. I quit and took a job for $18,000. Again, they thought I was right out of my mind. Five years later, I was earning $33,000. I quit to go to work with Earl Nightingale because he was the best in this business. I was prepared to pay them to let me work there, but each time I made a move, everybody outside of my immediate family, thought I had lost my mind. So, as you start changing, they’re not adapting to the change as you are. You just have to understand where they’re coming from. They don’t understand. They’re not studying what you’re studying. They don’t see life the way you see it.

Your perception’s changed, and that’s what your… Your life is going to change, and it’s not an easy thing to do. They’ll criticize you. They’ll go, “Oh, you’re crazy.” I mean, if you could just see what I went through, and still do from time to time, I’ve just got to the point where what other people think really doesn’t matter. First of all, Terry Whittaker wrote a book, Terry Cole-Whittaker. You might look it up. It’s an older book. What you think of me is none of my business. You’ve got to get to the point where you don’t care what other people think. You want to be very concerned with what you think, because we do become what with think about. I think you’re on the right track. Just keep going.

Q:

I’m having trouble communicating to my girlfriend when I feel jealous or bothered. What can you suggest?”

A:

Be honest. Tell you how you feel. You should be honest with her. But don’t worry about being criticized. Jealousy is afraid of losing something you haven’t got. It’s a silly thing. But I would suggest you be honest with her. It’s an insecurity on your part. It’s got nothing to do with her. You’ve got to become more confident in yourself.

Q:

This journey of paradigm shift is wonderful and life changing. Most of the people I am surrounded by are not on this journey and I feel lonely sometimes. Any suggestions?

A:

Well you will feel lonely sometimes. But you’ll get past that, and you’ll start to attract people to you want around you. You may not live next door but you’ll be in touch with people, and you meet people here. Get into self help groups. Get into mastermind groups. What you need is assembling support and you do that through other people. But you will feel a little lonely at times, but don’t let that dissuade you just because you’ve got everybody involved in it.

Q:

I am in a relationship with two people at the same time. I know one relationship is not good and I need to break it off but I am concerned of hurting the person. How should I do this?

A:

You can’t hurt another person, you can only hurt yourself. Right now you’re hurting both of you. You know what to do, do it. You do know what to do so do it.

Q:

My life partner has done a lot of wrong toward me. How can I move past this?

A:

How about what they’ve done good for you? Focus on what they’re doing good. See you can only think of one thing at a time. You can’t think a negative thought and a positive one at the same time. It doesn’t work.

Q:

A few months ago I met a man that really interests me but he recently came out of a serious relationship and needs time to find himself before he is ready to date. Those were his words. When I do my visualization exercises I can see myself with him. When I do my affirmations for my ideal partner I do not mention his name as I am letting the universe bring the right person into my life. I am also on a dating site and open to meeting someone else but I’m bringing confusion into my vision of this man by meeting others while I wait for him.” Or the question is, “Am I bringing confusion into my vision of this man by meeting others while I wait for him?

A:

Well, first of all you shouldn’t be seeing yourself with him. You’re messing around with his mind when you’re seeing that. You go on YouTube, How To Attract A Person Into My Life by Bob Proctor. I have got a video on there teaching you how to do this. You write down all of the qualities you want this person to have you just don’t put a face on him. You put a face on your image you’re messing around with somebody’s mind and you don’t have the right to do that. You want probably a person that has all of the qualities he’s got. It’s not necessarily him. You say, “No it’s him.” No it isn’t. First of all you don’t have a right to do that, certainly not without his permission. So, get the video that’s online How To Attract A Person Into Your Life. You get the video, you’ll see it. We have write down my man or my woman, whatever you want and then it’s like a starburst going out in a circle where you write that, a little circle. And then, on the starburst you write all of the qualities you want that person to have and you start to live with that person mentally with those qualities. You share your life with them mentally. That puts you on the frequency they’re on and you’ll attract them into your life.

Q:

A few months ago I met a man that really interests me but he recently came out of a serious relationship and needs time to find himself before he is ready to date. Those were his words. When I do my visualization exercises I can see myself with him. When I do my affirmations for my ideal partner I do not mention his name as I am letting the universe bring the right person into my life. I am also on a dating site and open to meeting someone else but I’m bringing confusion into my vision of this man by meeting others while I wait for him.” Or the question is, “Am I bringing confusion into my vision of this man by meeting others while I wait for him?

A:

Well, first of all you shouldn’t be seeing yourself with him. You’re messing around with his mind when you’re seeing that. You go on YouTube, How To Attract A Person Into My Life by Bob Proctor. I have got a video on there teaching you how to do this. You write down all of the qualities you want this person to have you just don’t put a face on him. You put a face on your image you’re messing around with somebody’s mind and you don’t have the right to do that. You want probably a person that has all of the qualities he’s got. It’s not necessarily him. You say, “No it’s him.” No it isn’t. First of all you don’t have a right to do that, certainly not without his permission. So, get the video that’s online How To Attract A Person Into Your Life. You get the video, you’ll see it. We have write down my man or my woman, whatever you want and then it’s like a starburst going out in a circle where you write that, a little circle. And then, on the starburst you write all of the qualities you want that person to have and you start to live with that person mentally with those qualities. You share your life with them mentally. That puts you on the frequency they’re on and you’ll attract them into your life.

Q:

What are your thoughts on new rave of online dating? Women are left crushed and desperate for men who disappear after one interaction. Is this a paradigm?

A:

I don’t think all women are. Some maybe. Just because somebody doesn’t want to go, you shouldn’t be left crushed and desperate. I think that’s more of a self-image problem than a dating problem. I’d really get the book Psycho Cybernetics by Dr. Maxwell Maltz. It’s a classic. It’s a great book. Study that.

Q:

Can you please explain why certain people pop into my mind every now and then out of nowhere?

A:

Well, you have cells in your brain, cells of recognition, for everyone you’ve ever met. When you meet a person, you look at them, you listen to them, you may touch them, you’ve created a little network in your brain, and they’re called cells of recognition. If you’re not thinking, and they happen to be thinking of you, their thought waves can activate those cells. That’s telepathic communication. And it’s going on all the time, it’s just that people don’t understand it. See, thought waves are cosmic waves that penetrate all time and space, so it’s got nothing to do with where you are, because you could have somebody in New York and another person in Shanghai.

They’re just as close as your nextdoor neighbor, because you’re dealing in the mind, and there’s no time or space in the mind. So there’s probably all kinds of people that are activating cells in your brain just the same as you in theirs. And that’s part of the reason why things keep popping up in your mind like that.

Q:

Everything that I ask for happens steadily without expecting it, relationships, work, every situation. The people around me just pop up to help. Do you think that this is preparing me for my big plan?

A:

I think you’re in a great vibration, Chrissa. That’s an indication that you are in a very good vibration. Stay the way you are. Now, you say without expecting it, the statement you just give told me that you do expect it.

Q:

What do you think is the secret of happiness?

A:

There is no secret to it, just focus on the other person. Focus on giving rather than getting and focusing on doing rather than just sitting around. The secret happiness is to be productive and help other people, do things for them. You find people that are unhappy, they’re not doing anything for anybody. If a person’s not … If they’re depressed or something like that they’ve got to get busy and do something for people. That’s the secret to happiness. It’s not a secret, really.

Q:

How can one use the principles laid out in “Think and Grow Rich,” with online dating? I am looking to find an ideal relationship.

A:

I made a video and I put it online, I think it’s well over a million people have gone there, on how to attract the person you want to attract. I want someone that can hear me that’s in the company to contact Scott Edwards in Manchester in England. If you go to our YouTube account and search “attract a specific person into your life”, you’ll find it.

Get that video. Do exactly what it tells you. You will attract that person. But you’ve got to understand you’ve got to believe it. You’ve got to believe that you’re already with the person.

See, what you’re doing, I’m showing you how to get onto the frequency that another person’s on and you’re going to attract that person.

If I phone you, I’m getting on your frequency and then we can talk and we can send pictures back and forth. That’s what you’re doing. When you’re creating an image of the person you want to be with, you see yourself already with that person. You’re already with them, you spend time with them, you go have lunch with them, you talk to them, share a book with them. And you go for walks with them, you make love with them, you have dinner with them, you do everything with them. Mentally you’re doing it. You’re putting yourself on that frequency, you’re programming yourself on that frequency. You’re just going to walk into somebody and you’re just going to know that’s them. You’ll know. That’s where you know you know.

Q:

Any suggestions for our new dating website. It’s 70 percent done, launching in February of 2019. It is called Love-in-Sync for the personal development community. What do you think a successful dating website looks like?

A:

I don’t know. I would get somebody that’s very creative, though, to design it and I would have on it something to the effect; how to attract a person who’s on the same frequency as yourself. That’s really what you’re looking for.

Spirituality

Q:

What’s your spirituality like?

A:

My spirituality is perfect, so is yours. I am trying to consciously become aware of it. That’s what I work towards every day. I become aware of the perfection that lies within me. That’s our objective in life. It’s our purpose in life to utilize the power that God gave us.

Q:

Studying PGI materials has shifted my perception and now, I perceive life as the unfoldment of thought into physical reality. How can I know that this is the truth and not just the new perception?

A:

Because you’re right, it is the truth. You know the truth. When you hear the truth, you’ll know it. Why is that so? You have music playing in your room right now. You may not hear it, but it’s playing. If you turned on the radio, then you’d hear it. You didn’t invite the music into the room, you tuned into something that was already in the room, you just couldn’t hear it. Now, why couldn’t you hear it? You didn’t hear it because your ears are not operating in the frequency that the music is being broadcast on. When you turn on the radio, the radio receiver picks up the music. It speeds it up few million levels and it rebroadcasts it on the frequency your ears are operating on. Understand what’s happening. The radio station is broadcasting the music, the receiver in your radio picks it up, it speeds it up and it sends it out into the universe, in your room on the frequency that your ears are operating on.

When you hear the truth, the truth resonates with the essence of who you are. There is perfection within you. Your spiritual DNA is perfect. When you hear the truth, it resonates with the essence of who you are and it sets up a higher vibration of consciousness, called ‘knowing’. You just know that it’s the truth. You don’t question it. That’s how you know.

Q:

How can I best develop my belief to align the pure unadulterated spirit side of myself?

A:

You’re doing it already. You’re doing it by studying this.

Q:

How do you see the person of Jesus and His teachings?

A:

Jesus was a perfect example, but He also made it very clear that He didn’t do the work. I just quoted Him. He said, “It is not I that do the work, it’s the Father that dwells with me.” The power within you does the work, all you do is choose. You were given the power to choose, but I’ll tell you something else. God isn’t going to choose for you. People say, “Well, it’s God’s will.” God’s will is greater good. God’s will is expansion and forward expression, greater good in your life, but you have to choose it. Then you have to follow the rules, the laws. I see the laws as God’s modus operandi. It’s how everything happens.

We follow those laws with the growth of plants. Everything else, bring them to bear in yourself.

Q:

I’ve been highly connected to my intuitive side since I was a little girl. How can I teach this to a business or corporate audience without sounding too spiritual?

A:

Don’t worry about being spiritual. Go ahead and be spiritual. Start out by telling them Ive got a great suggestion for you. First of all, let’s understand this, there’s only two references we can go to to find out anything about ourselves. One is science and the other is theology. Theology tells us everything is spiritual. Science tells us everything is energy. I’ve come to the conclusion that one’s talking about the cause, the other’s talking about the effect. Let’s take a look at ourselves, as spiritual beings. Generally, as spiritual beings we have all the knowledge we’ll ever need or require within us because spirit is omnipresent. It’s a 100% evenly present within us at all times. It is all knowing, all the knowledge that’s ever been.

Q:

How can I have more faith and be connected to the power of God?

A:

Better understanding. Understand God and understand your relationship with God. You’re God’s highest form of creation. You’re created in God’s image. So you have to ask if we’re to do God’s work say what is God’s work? Well God’s being the creator, God’s work would be creation, wouldn’t it? Since God is spirit, God operates though spirits, spirits always were expanse for expression. Since your spiritual DNA is perfect, there’s something in you that wants to do greater and better things. Start doing it. Start studying. Solomon said now you’re getting, get understanding. Solomon was a pretty wise guy. He understood something about his God. Well you must understand something about yours. Your God walks with you, he talks with you, he tells you his own, he’s with you wherever you are. You can’t get away from God.

Q:

Science of Getting Rich states that you don’t have to tell God what you want, because he already knows. Think and Grow Rich says to repeat your vision daily. Should I impress daily, or let go and let God?”

A:

Yeah. God’s not the problem. You’re the problem. The Bible tells you, “Before you speak, I’ll be there, I’ll hear you.” Now, the thought always follow the word. It’s yourself that you have to convince. Whatever image you hold and turn over to the universal subconscious mind instantly begins to move into form. And our problem is, our subconscious mind is already programmed primarily for lack and limitation. And it’s our conscious mind that’s studying this abundance. But we’ve got to get the conscious mind in tune with the subconscious, and the subconscious keeps giving us a problem. It’s a paradigm we’ve got to change. So, God’s not the problem, we’re the problem. God will give us whatever we ask for. In fact, is giving us whatever we ask for. What we’re asking for is what we don’t want, because we let our present results control our thinking.

Q:

How do you change deeply rooted religious paradigms?

A:

Well, the same as any other paradigm. A paradigm is a montage, actually, of ideas that are fixed into your subconscious mind. And they’ve been fixed there through repetition and sort of habitance. It’s a habitual … A habit is something you do automatically without giving any conscious thought. Well, our paradigms are mostly they’re put there by other people. And most religious convictions have been passed from one generation to another. The average person will say they’re religion’s right and all the rest are wrong. They don’t even know their own religion very well, and they don’t even know what the others are.

So just think how silly that is. And that is pretty broad spread right across the board. So changing deep rooted religious convictions is like changing any other habit. It’s like changing how you part your hair or whatever you’re doing. It’s an idea in your subconscious mind. What I would recommend you do is analyze it. Say, “Is this serving me? Does this make sense? Is this in harmony with the law?” If it’s not upward moving, if it’s not growth-oriented, it’s probably not right.

Q:

Can you please explain how you began to know the relationship between spirit, mind, emotion, behavior and results? Also, how does Christian faith play into this process?

A:

It plays in perfect. What did Jesus say? He said to the person who’s healing him, he said, “According to your faith, it’ll be done unto you.” He wasn’t doing it. Jesus said, “It isn’t me that’s doing it. It’s the Father that glows within me.” The word “Christ” comes from the Greek, “Christos: inner leader”. This is in perfect harmony with the Christian faith. Perfect harmony.

Q:

If spirit is spirit, mind is mind and body is body, where does the soul fit in or two which of these planes is it tied to?

A:

It starts with them all. You are a soul, you don’t have one, you are one. People think they have a soul. They don’t have one, you are a soul. You have a body. The soul is the individualized expression of spirit, of God. You’re created in God’s image.

See, where we made a mistake, we’re created in God’s image, all religion teaches that, we got things reversed. We’re so physically oriented, we created God in our image. So we see God as a man somewhere, not a woman, a man. We’ve got to understand the male and female are in everything, that’s the law of gender decrees that.

So we are an individualized expression of an infinite power. There is perfection within us. Our spiritual DNA is perfect and that perfection is seeking expression with and through us. That’s what all of these programs are about.

Q:

My friend’s daughter is four and she was diagnosed with leukemia and is doing chemotherapy. I was wondering if you could give me an affirmation that she can listen to all the time and when she is sleeping.

A:

I’m so happy and grateful that every fiber of my being is vibrating in harmony with God’s laws. I’m getting happier and healthier and wealthier every day. Straight positive idea.

Subconscious-Conscious-Intellectual Mind

Q:

Why don’t you ever talk about the superconscious or do you have some teachings for an elite group of scholars that goes into that?

A:

Superconscious, unconscious, subconscious, it’s all the same to me. There’s 157 names I have heard on the subconscious mind that you can use, your subjective mind, your objective mind …. there’s all kinds of names. More importantly, how does it work? Perhaps you get into somebody’s writing and they’re talking about superconscious… it’s the subconscious they’re talking about. That’s universal intelligence. That’s where everything is. There’s different ways of teaching the same thing.

Q:

I’m afraid of losing sight of my goal due to illness. What can I do to prevent this?

A:

When the thing you fear coms to visit you, you will quit fearing it. Start to love it and forget the illness. Let me see health. Let the doctor look after the body. You look after the mind. You see nothing but health. You repeat over and over, “I’m so happy and grateful now that I’m moving into a healthier, stronger and more beautiful vibration and my goal is moving into form with and through me. I’m so happy and grateful now that my body is moving into a healthier, stronger, more beautiful vibration and my goals are becoming clearer and I’m moving towards them every second of every day.” You just keep repeating that, turn it into a song and sing it, “I am so happy and grateful now….” Turn it into something beautiful. That’s what you can do to prevent it and don’t worry about it for goodness sake. Carnegie said, “Any idea that’s held in the mind – that’s emphasized – that’s feared or revered – that you’re afraid of or that you’ll fall in love with will begin at once to clothe itself in the most convenient and appropriate form available.” Don’t be afraid of anything. You attract what you’re afraid of. You’ll see yourself with it. Understand you’re God’s highest form of creation and you can do that.

Q:

How do I know that the actions I’m taking are the right ones?

A:

You feel it. You’ll feel if it’s right or not. Feeling is the language of the subconscious. Listen to your heart.

Q:

What happens when, or what is our subconscious mind doing when we sleep?

A:

It’s working. That’s why you shouldn’t go to sleep with the television or the radio on. That is being dumped right into your psyche. The last image that you hold on your mind is what your mind’s working on when you’re sleeping. Go to sleep with a pleasant idea in your mind. It’s our consciousness that goes to sleep. Our subconscious never sleeps. That’s universal intelligence. It’s always working, always moving in the direction you send it in.

Q:

I’m currently on day 75 of 90 days of handwriting self-confidence and day 17 of serenity. Do you have other hand written exercises you had success with over the years?

A:

Yes. Any affirmation you could write out a couple of times a day, even a couple of times in the morning, and a couple of times at night – any affirmation that you want and do that for 90 days. You are going through repetition of writing by hand over and over and over again. You’re sinking it deep in your subconscious mind. It’s getting beautifully planted in there. But if you have an affirmation, let’s say this one, for example, “I’m so happy and grateful now that money comes to me in increasing quantities through multiple sources on a continuous basis,” – write that out maybe 50 times in the morning and 50 times at night. Say, “I’m so happy and grateful now that money comes to me in increasing quantities through multiple sources on a continuous basis,” when you’re in your car, sing it, “I’m so happy and grateful now that money comes to me in increasing quantities through multiple sources on a continuous basis. It’s the repetition that plants the idea in your mind.

Q:

What does Genevieve Behrend mean “The creative power only works by deductive methods”?

A:

Your subconscious mind is totally deductive. Your conscious mind is inductive and deductive. Now, what do we mean by that? Well, inductive reasoning is choosing thoughts, putting thoughts together and arrive at an idea. These individual thoughts come together and form an idea.

An idea is a thought or a collection of thoughts that are directed towards a purpose. That is inductive reasoning. When a person’s not thinking, they’re totally deductive. The earth is deductive. The earth is amoral. The earth does not care what you plant, but it will return what you plant.

Earl Nightingale in The Strangest Secret recording explained that very well. He said, “You can plant night shade, a deadly poison, and not a 16th of an inch away, plant corn, a sweet food. One will grow with just as great an abundance as the other.” That’s like the subconscious mind. It has no ability to reject. It’ll only accept. It has no ability to reject. Any idea that reaches your subconscious mind affects your entire being. It’s totally deductive. In other words, it must accept whatever is given to it. It has no ability to reject.

The inductive reasoning can accept or reject. Subconscious cannot do that.

Q:

When you read other people’s energies, can you also change their energy flow and move it into a higher frequency? When you work with people in your elite coaching programs, I assume that you change them. When I tune into your frequencies would you be able to change them so I can tune into the real me and be very successful?

A:

Absolutely. You change a person’s frequency by changing the ideas you get them to start to entertain. The ideas they start to get emotionally involved with. You keep feeding them information so it raises their level of conscious awareness. The only reason a person owns $100,000 a year is because they’re not aware of how to earn $100,000 a month.

If they’re aware of how to earn $100,000 a month they’re not going to earn $100,000 a year. So, if you want to earn more money you’ve got to develop a higher awareness, a greater level of conscious awareness. That is my objective with everyone I work with. When I and Sandy Gallagher are doing a seminar, our whole objective is to raise the consciousness of that group.

I’m going to make the people aware as soon as I start the seminar that we’re going to be giving them information that’s going to cause them to make decisions. If they want to improve the quality of their life they’re going to have to make decisions. You want to be prepared to make decisions. As I start working with you on different concepts, I’m going to say this is what you should do. Make up your mind you’re going to do it.

I’m not telling them something that is complicated to understand. I’m telling them something that’s very simple to understand. Growth is not difficult. It’s changing our paradigms that’s difficult and that’s what the whole program’s about. My objective would be to raise your frequency, put you on a higher frequency, and get you moving into a better space.

Q:

What do you mean by the level of awareness? What is the best way to increase our level of awareness?

A:

By studying, you’re increasing your level of awareness listening to some of these answers. I’m aware of how to answer these questions. You become aware. The best way to put it, a baby cannot tell the difference between a male and female. The baby must become aware of the difference in gender. Our problem is at a very early age we stop helping them develop awareness, and we get them involved in intellectual exercises. That’s what school does. They want you to develop your intellect. I’m not saying you shouldn’t develop your intellect but you should develop your awareness. The awareness is much more important. You have all kinds of people who are brilliant intellectually and they’re not very aware. So, they usually struggle throughout their whole life. You have to become aware of how money’s earned and most people are not. You have to become aware that if there’s disease it starts in the mind. You have to be aware of that. It manifests in the body. What manifests is in effect. You have to go to the cause of the problem, inside.

Q:

How do you deal with negative thoughts?

A:

I try to eliminate them. If I find myself thinking negative thoughts I’ll switch real quick. I’ll realize that I’m doing it and I’ll stop it, replace it with one that’s essentially the opposite, with a positive thought. When you catch yourself thinking negative stop it immediately.

Q:

When I am calm does the reasoning faculty of my conscious mind stay active? Does this help to avoid manipulative mind tricks by con artists reaching my subconscious mind?

A:

Manipulative people are going to get into your subconscious mind from time to time. When you’re calm you’re in a better position to reason with things, to use your consciousness. See when you’re not calm you’re not in control of you. Something else is in control of you. There’s something going on, your mind is too busy. Calmness of mind is one of the beautiful jewels of wisdom. It’s the result of long and patient effort in self control. Read the chapter on serenity in As A Man Thinketh. It’s a phenomenal chapter.

Q:

You can form things in your thought, and by impressing your thought upon formless substances, can cause the thing you think about to be created. How do I impress my thoughts upon the formless substance?

A:

Let yourself get emotionally involved. That’s the formless substance. The formless substance is the universal subconscious mind. That’s also your emotional mind. When you let yourself get emotionally involved you’re impressing the thought upon formless substance.

Q:

It is said that I can create everything I want with the help of the formless substance. But what if there is anything like a life plan and this life plan foresees something totally different?

A:

Well it can’t see something totally different. Formless substance operates by law. I was reading today in The Law and the Word, you can change the word, but you can’t change the law. Change what’s going on in your mind, but you can’t change how it’s going to manifest. It operates by law, the law never changes, that’s constant.

Q:

I seem to have the problem of Paul Hutsey to let the sales sheet dictate my thinking. In You Were Born Reach you said you could help Paul in 15 minutes. What advice did you provide him in those 15 minutes?

A:

I told him to act like the person he wanted to become. He had spent something like 20 years trying to get in the top 50, and I think he was 200 or so. I said you’re letting the results control your thinking. You gotta see yourself in the top 50. He was number one out of 500 districts. It was in a little place in Pittsburg, Kansas where half the population has an income below the poverty level. The economy, the size of the town, nothing had anything to do with it. Paul created the image in his mind and the way it went. He was letting the results control his thinking. I told him to change that.

Q:

When using the Memory Peg exercise please give an example of how to associate a picture with the ten pegs to remember things.

A:

One run, two zoo, three tree, four door, five hive, six sticks, seven heaven, eight gate, nine wine, ten den. One run. So I’ve got a phone here on my desk, one is run. I see the phone running. Two zoo. I’ve got a little case with the earplugs for my phone in my hand. I’ll see that case in a monkeys cage. Two zoo, I see them in a monkeys cage. Three tree, I’ve got moss on my desk. Three tree. I see the tree growing mosses like this, all kinds of mosses growing on the tree. Four door. I’ve got a pen here. I see the pen crashing right through a front door, see it crashing through the front door. One run, I have the phone running, two zoo what’s in the monkeys cage, the holder for the earplugs, three tree what’s growing on the tree the mosses, four door what’s crashing through the door the pen.

See it’s the pictures. You get the pictures and you can do it fast. When you get the ten pegs, one run, two zoo, three tree, four door, five hive, six sticks, seven heaven, eight gate, nine wine, ten den, then you just hook them all up, hook all the ones up, one, 11, 21, 31. I can have you remember a hundred things in about five minutes. You’ve got a perfect memory you just have to understand how to use it.

Q:

As far as chemistry in the brain, is mental illness real?

A:

No, it’s not real. There’s no such thing as mental illness. There’s no such thing as mental retardation. There’s only brain damage.

Q:

What does Genevieve Behrend mean by deductive methods? I don’t understand how she is using the word deductive.

A:

Well deductive, it means it can only accept, it cannot reject. The earth is deductive. It has no inductive reasoning capacity, in other words, it has no choice. The earth is amoral. Deductive means it’s amoral, it doesn’t judge good or bad. It can only accept, it has no ability to reject. That’s what your subconscious mind is like. It operates in a very deductive way. It’s like the earth doesn’t care what you plant, but it will return it.

Q:

When we sleep and dream, are our dreams a product of our conscious or subconscious mind? Do they tell something meaningful?

A:

That’s a good question. I read a couple of books on dreams but I’m certainly not an expert. I believe dreams are prophetic. I think it’s the working of the subconscious. I think it has something to do with the ideas you were thinking about when you went to sleep but I really don’t know. Go get a good book on dreams.

Q:

How do you retain these habits so they don’t slip away?

A:

Well if they’re habits they’re not gonna slip away. Habit is something you do automatically without conscious thought.

Q:

How much can philosophy and psychology be mixed without being too similar?

A:

Well I think they would be mixed. It would depend on the person. The philosophy is how you see things, it’s how you relate to them. The psychology has to do with mind, how you’re working your mind.

Q:

Do you picture yourself as the stickman graphic all the time?

A:

Yes, I really do. I see the bottom half of my head as my subconscious mind, and as I drop it in there, I feel it move through every fiber of my being, right into my hair, I feel it. I’ve been using that for years and years and years.

That’s why I think it’s the most magnificent idea I’ve ever found.

Q:

How do you know the difference between being a fly on the wall and persistence?

A:

This is what awareness and observation will tell you. Are you knocking your head against the wall or are you making headway? You really have to be honest with yourself. This is where a real shot of self truth and honesty come in. You see, some people that think they’re persistent are stubborn. They’re going to make their way work, and their way may not be the best way.

Say am I acting like a fly on the window? Is there a better way? Open your mind. You’re not changing the goal. You can be persistent and change the way you’re approaching the goal, and you’re still persistent because you’re persistently working toward it.

Q:

Does studying at a university also develop your awareness?

A:

Well, I have never studied at a university, but I would have to say yes, it would develop your awareness. You’re more developing your intellect, but you would be developing awareness, too. You would be developing awareness if that was an objective. I think a lot of people studying in a university are developing their intellect and they don’t really spend a lot of time thinking about or looking at the awareness factor because intellect has become so important insofar as schools are concerned, where we have a lot of brilliant people that have developed a highly evolved intellect but they’re not very aware of what’s going on, so their results are inferior.

The answer to your question, I would say yes you can develop both intellect and awareness.

Q:

How do you think you were able to attract good into your life even with the mindset of earning so little and owing so much?

A:

Well you know, I saturated my mind with this information. I was reading Think and Grow Rich and then I was listening to Earl Nightingale’s recording of it, then got into his other recordings. I never heard anybody talk like this before… talk like I’m talking, myself, now. But I never read him because I didn’t even read comic books. When I started to read Think and Grow Rich, it was way over my head in many respects, but there were parts of it that I understood. The parts where it says anybody can do this.

I became so fascinated I couldn’t stop listening to it. I think I had an imbalance of information that I was getting emotionally involved in. I was just totally enthralled with all this information. Pretty soon I became part of it and it became part of me and my results started to change and all the trouble went away.

Look at your situation with Michael Beckwith’s attitude. There is a three step approach to anything in your life. Now think, a three step approach. When anything happens, it doesn’t matter what it is, it is what it is. Accept it. It’s either going to control you or you’re going to control it. That’s the first step. It is what it is, accept it. It’s either going to control you or you’re going to control it.

Number two. Harvest the good. There’s good in everything. Nothing is all bad, nothing is all good. Everything just is. Harvest the good. Look for the good in it.

Number three. Forgive all the rest. Forgive means to let go of, abandon. Now if you do that, you’re going to have a pretty good life.

Q:

You say as an infant our subconscious mind is wide open. At what age would you say that closes, our conscious mind or our conscious mind is activated?

A:

Well you’ll start to notice their behavior. You can tell their conscious mind is activated. They hear a song, they turn and look. You certainly know whenever you tell them a thing and they say why. They’re thinking about what your saying. It becomes activated, you know it grows, starts at a very early age and then it starts to develop and you’ll start to see it develop. Now in the babies laying there, the baby will just lay there, you know, he’ll move around, they’ll look all over the place. You can tell when a baby starts to see things, they start to be aware, maybe their hand comes in front of their face and they look at it and they wonder where did it come from. They start very early. Important thing to remember is the moment they’re born, their subconscious mind starts to get invaded from the outside world. And what you want to do is make sure the outside world is a very positive, comforting, loving environment.

Q:

How do you press an idea onto our subconscious?

A:

When you relax and imagine that it happened, you start to feel it. See you move into that vibration, feeling conscious ruins the vibration. I’ve mentioned it all the time, go online and download Nat King Cole’s song Pretend. Pay really close attention to the lyrics. They’re phenomenal. Like I suppose you’re having a sad minute. He says pretend you’re happy when you’re blue, it isn’t very hard to do and you’re going to find happiness without an end whenever you pretend because the pretending is the activation of your imagination. Because it’s one of our greatest tools. That’s how you impress the idea but it takes repetition, you gotta see yourself with it. You got to make it real.

Q:

How can I stay positive in a negative situation without being in denial of what’s going on?

A:

In order to be in denial you can understand what’s going on, just have to go around you. You can look at it consciously, you don’t let yourself get emotionally involved with it. That’s not being in denial, that’s being wise. Because remember, in almost all environments, there’s all kinds of negativity going on around us, but we don’t have to get involved in it. You see people buying the paper and reading it. Some of them will start crying, some will get angry. They’re getting emotionally involved in some columnists opinion. Quit reading the negative news. If there’s anything of major importance happening, you’ll pick it up as just a matter of conversations as you move through the day.

But I understand if you see yourself as the stick person drawing and whatever is going on around you, is coming right into your conscious but you know just let it keep on going. You can be in a very negative environment and stay in a very positive vibration. You control the vibration you’re in. The vibration you’re in is caused by the ideas you’re emotionally involved with.

Q:

How would you suggest handling conflicting beliefs?

A:

If I asked you, you think you could earn more money? You’d probably say yes, I believe I can. Then if I said well why aren’t you doing it? You’ll say well I don’t know. I’ll tell you exactly why you’re not. You believe on a conscious level that you are capable of earning more money, that’s your intellect going to work but it’s not your intellect that controls your behavior which dictates how much money you’re going to have. That’s your subconscious mind that’s your paradigm.

See, you’ve got a conflict in your own mind there on belief and that is really a problem. What you gotta do is question those subconscious beliefs because most of them are obscured and you inherited them. You did not originate them. And then consciously start working to change the belief. Now that’s going to cause discomfort. You try and change your subconscious beliefs and what you’re doing is moving yourself into a different vibration and that causes discomfort, so you know.

Well you know when you’re not comfortable you’re moving in the right direction. So you keep imagining yourself, believing what you know is right. Not what you have been believing all along. See your subconscious mind says you cannot earn more money. You can earn many times what you’re earning. You might start by saying 12 times, turn your annual income into a monthly income. And you just keep repeating that over and over and see yourself, and what you will do with it. Pretty soon you’re going to feel comfortable and that’s what you’re going to be earning.

Q:

I am not a native English speaker, but I love the language and it resonates with me. Do you think that my subconscious mind will understand the message in English?

A:

No question about it. When a person is fluent in a language they understand the influx. Until you get fluent in a language you will be translating in your consciousness from what you’re hearing to the language you’re programmed to hear. But if you keep working at it pretty soon, you’ll be programmed subconsciously the same as you are with whatever language you come from. That’s why some people master a number of languages. But to be fluent you’ve got to get it on all levels. And it just takes practice and repetition, you’ll get it.

Q:

Can you recommend any specific meditation for inner genius?

A:

I’m just so happy and grateful that the god-like goodness is growing in me. It’s expanding and expressing itself in a greater way every day. Something along that line. Make it up yourself. If you make it up and it’s your voice, you’ll trust it.

Q:

How does the Stick Person interface with the ideas in Leadership and Self-Deception?

A:

Oh. It’s everything. I want you to imagine two stick people side by side. They both have senses. They have intellectual factors. One’s talking to the other one. I’m talking to you. We can be the two stick people. How do I communicate to your conscious mind from my conscious mind. I do it through words, gestures, and writing. Now keep the two of us side by side, put the heart in your subconscious because that’s where your heart is. You communicate heart to heart. Through vibration. Your feelings are being projected right into their heart. This beautiful poem says, “If I knew you and if you knew me, then both of us could clearly see with an inner sight divine the meaning of your heart and mind. I’m sure we differ less, we clasp our hands in friendliness and certain we pleasantly agree. If I knew you and if you knew me.” See the problem is we don’t even know ourselves, let alone anybody else.

So on a conscious level you communicate your words, gestures and writing, on the subconscious level and you communicate through vibration. Now you want to make sure your vibration is not your paradigm that’s being vibrated that you’re communicating. You get emotionally involved with something good about that person, you say I can help you. I really can. You feel like you can help them and then you’ll act like it.

Q:

How does the Stick Person interface with Tom White’s, excuse me Willhite’s Trinity Consciousness diagram?

A:

Perfectly. You’re a spiritual being. Spirits omnipresence. Spirit flows to and through you. I’m very familiar with Tom’s material. He and I are on the same page, we just come at it from a different angle.

Q:

Why is it that persistent people never know why they want something?

A:

Sometimes persistent people do know why they want something. If you know why you want it, you probably wouldn’t want it. I can tell you why not specifically, you want because that spirit jabbing you in the consciousness wanting to grow. Spirits for expansion, full of expression. That’s the heart jabbing you in the consciousness. Get doing it. Go after this. Want that.

Want is something in our conscious mind and it comes from the spirit wanting to express itself in a greater way. You want to express your uniqueness as a human being. You’ve got to turn the want into a desire. You get the picture really clear and then you start getting emotionally involved in it. And when you do that the idea, the want then becomes a desire because it starts to take route in universal intelligence or the subconscious mind. Desire is the effort of the unexpressed possibility within. Simply the expression without, so your action.

Q:

What is the best, most effective way to teach little children these wonderful and valuable lessons? Also, how do we teach them about the workings of the mind, natural laws, and the creative process?

A:

How do you teach them how to get dressed? How do you teach them how to eat? How do you teach them how to talk? How do you teach them languages? Do you know that you can teach a kid four or five languages before they ever get to kindergarten? See, what we’ve got to understand is that a little child is in a little body, and they only lack experience and vocabulary. Outside of that, you can teach them anything. You can teach this to the little kids, but you’ve got to realize that they lack experience and vocabulary. That’s the only thing they lack.

Their mind is the same as your mind. There’s only one mind. There’s not two minds. There’s two different expressions of the mind. There’s multiple expressions of the mind. There’s one power, mind. Mind is the master power that molds and makes. Now, you see, when you’re dealing with a child, we let their size and their age dictate how much we can teach them, and that is wrong, and I think school has got us on that track. Madam Montessori put it very well. She says, “We send a little child to school as if they’re a cup, and we want the school to fill the cup up.” She says, “What they don’t understand is that the cup is already full. What we want to do is teach them how to bring it out of the cup.”

All knowledge, all power is 100% equally present in all places at the same time. You don’t get knowledge. You release it. Let me read it to you because we’re using it today. We’re working with it, so I wanted to make sure I had the wording perfect. “The missing link in all system of education known to civilization today may be found in the failure of educational institutions to teach their students how to organize and use knowledge after they acquire it.” He says, “Understand the real meaning of the word educate. The word is derived from the Latin, meaning to educe, to draw out, or to develop from within.”

“An educated person is not necessarily one who has an abundance of general or specialized knowledge. An educated person was one who has so developed the faculties of their mind that they may acquire anything they want, or its equivalent, without violating rights of others.” See, we’ve already got it. You can’t get knowledge. You’ve already got it. What you’re doing is becoming aware of what you’ve got. There’s perfection within you. Your spiritual DNA is perfect. You were created in God’s image. You’re God’s highest form of creation. People say, “Oh, I don’t believe that.” Well, then don’t. What are you going to believe?

You got to believe something, or you’re going to fall for anything. The truth is, we are loaded with power.

We’re wandering around like… If you just look at your hand, hold your hand in front of your face for a moment, there’s approximately 11 million kilowatt hours per pound of potential energy locked up in your electrons and the atoms of your body. You’re a walking dynamo. We have it all, so how do you teach the child the things I would teach you or teach somebody else? Expect them to get it, but keep in mind, the only thing they lack is experience and vocabulary, so you have to talk to them on their level of understanding. You know, I read where John Kennedy, when he was President of the United States, has his speeches prepared so a 10-year-old child would understand them. I think that was the work of a very wise man.

Q:

Can you please explain mind is movement a bit more in-depth?

A:

Well, first of all, mind is movement. Everything moves. Mind is your control of everything. Your mind, everything’s moving. The law of vibration decrees everything moves, nothing rests. As you think, you cause movement. It’s a very good question, to explain mind is movement. Nothing rests we live in an ocean of motion, if we can really grasp that. We take a look at things around us. I have a camera on a tripod. There’s two or three cameras here in the studio that I’m looking at, and they seem to be still, but they’re really not. The walls are really not still.

If you look at them through a microscope, you’ll see the movement. You can put your hand in front of you, put it flat on the desk. Mine is right now, but it’s moving. It only appears to be still. The truth is rarely in the appearance of things. So, when you talk about mind – it is movement, you are mind. Mind is the master power that molds and makes. James Allen wrote this, he said, “Mind is the master power that molds and makes, and man is mind, and evermore he takes the tool of thought and shaping what he wills, brings forth a thousands joys or a thousand ails. We think in secret, and it comes to pass. Environment is but our looking glass.” You think and you make things move.

Q:

Science of Getting Rich states that you don’t have to tell God what you want, because he already knows. Think and Grow Rich says to repeat your vision daily. Should I impress daily, or let go and let God?”

A:

Yeah. God’s not the problem. You’re the problem. The Bible tells you, “Before you speak, I’ll be there, I’ll hear you.” Now, the thought always follow the word. It’s yourself that you have to convince. Whatever image you hold and turn over to the universal subconscious mind instantly begins to move into form. And our problem is, our subconscious mind is already programmed primarily for lack and limitation. And it’s our conscious mind that’s studying this abundance. But we’ve got to get the conscious mind in tune with the subconscious, and the subconscious keeps giving us a problem. It’s a paradigm we’ve got to change. So, God’s not the problem, we’re the problem. God will give us whatever we ask for. In fact, is giving us whatever we ask for. What we’re asking for is what we don’t want, because we let our present results control our thinking.

Q:

Our subconscious mind is connected to the infinite intelligence and the answers within us. Why do we teach people to mastermind?

A:

We teach people to mastermind because when you come together, you create greater power. It’s similar to a mastermind, and is that you’re getting the help of other people. When somebody else asks a question, you think, “Well, I’ve never thought of that.” You’re bringing different minds together. It’s the same thing as you have a board of directors in a company. We bring people in from different disciplines, different backgrounds and they all add to it. So what you’re doing is raising your conscious awareness. That’s the purpose of the mastermind.

Q:

Is it a positive or negative attribute if you’re a perfectionist?

A:

Well, I think being a perfectionist is silly. I don’t think it’s necessary. You do the best you can. Be professional. Professional is at their best, regardless. They’re never going to make it perfect. What you want to do is work towards it. You see, a person who says they’re a perfectionist. I look at it more as an excuse, because you’re always criticizing what you’re doing. It doesn’t measure up, and rather than criticize what you’re doing, you should be praising yourself for what you’re doing and always attempt to improve it. It’s inherent within your nature to want to do it bigger and better, so that’s what you want to work on. I don’t see it as a positive or a negative.

Q:

How can I totally change my old beliefs into new beliefs?

A:

One at a time. Maybe two at a time. That’s how you totally change them. You see, if you ask yourself, “What do I believe?” You can believe something on a conscious level but not a subconscious level. I frequently ask people, “Do you believe you can earn more money? A lot more money with what you know?” And almost inevitably they’ll say, “Yes.” Almost everybody believes they can, but then I say, “Why aren’t you doing it?” And they don’t know. The reason is they believe it on a conscious level, but on a subconscious level, their paradigm doesn’t believe it. Their paradigm’s producing the result they’re getting.

So what they want to do is write out how they would like to see themselves with respect to whatever belief it is they’re working on. Write it out in the present tense as if it’s happening now, and then keep visualizing, keep doing it. Pretty soon that idea will be fixed in their subconscious mind and their belief about it will change.

See, I used to believe that I just wasn’t very effective and I couldn’t do very well. Now I believe that I’m very creative and I’m extremely effective and very productive. Now, that changed just through studying me. I started to find out the truth about me.

Q:

What is a habit that you are currently working on?

A:

Well, I’m working on a couple of different ones right now. I’m working on expanding my view of different projects that we’re working on, okay? And as I expand my view on it, I know that ideas are going to come that’ll change it. I’m doing that on two different projects. So it’s not necessarily habit. It’s a perception that I’m working on. Which is all the same thing.

Q:

In a review that you do of As A Man Thinketh, you say to write out the last chapter and review it three times per day. I just want to be sure I understand. Are you referring to the Serenity Poem or something else?

A:

Serenity. Last chapter in the book. Jewels of wisdom. It’s the result of long and patient effort in self-control.

Q:

Can you please explain the difference between awareness, consciousness and understanding?

A:

Well, you’re developing a higher degree of consciousness. You’re becoming aware of more things. The consciousness, the raising of the consciousness creates the awareness. Understanding is a level of conscious awareness where you can explain it and apply it. So you’re not just aware of it. You’re aware of how to use the information. So you’re dealing with a higher level of awareness. You’re consciously aware of it and you’re developing an understanding of how to use, how to apply the information that you’re dealing with.

Q:

How can we transmit calm and security to our child’s subconscious mind so he can sleep in his cradle?

A:

Put your hand on the child before they go to sleep and just start to visualize them being very calm. Actually see them sleeping in a very calm state. Mentally transmit that image right into their subconscious mind and don’t ever think you won’t, because you will. You don’t let their movement control your thinking. You let your thinking control their movement. They’re totally subjective to what you’re thinking with the baby.

Q:

What can I do to make myself conscious, more receptive to my affirmations?

A:

Practice. Practice letting yourself get emotionally involved with the affirmation. Let yourself see yourself getting emotionally involved. Make it real in your mind. That’s what your imagination will do.

Q:

What is the feeling like when the terror barrier has been penetrated?

A:

The fear doesn’t go away. It stays until you really change what’s going on in your emotional mind. It’s just that you’re not letting the fear stop you. You’re going right through it.

Q:

How can we get back on track and refocus when we hit the terror barrier? I feel as though I am pulled in two opposite directions inside.

A:

You know that’s exactly what is happening. That’s what the terror barrier is. The paradigm is saying, “Go back, don’t keep going”, and your desire is saying, “Keep on going.” Well, don’t let fear stop you. Face the thing you fear and fear will leave you. And every time the fear comes up understand that it’s your paradigm and your subconscious mind that’s giving you negative information and then you get emotionally involved in it. Say, “Get out of here.” And you stand up, and you face the thing you fear, and you do it, and you do it today. Just absolutely refuse to let fear slow you down.

Q:

Is there a specific way that you would recommend studying The Science of Getting Rich or would you suggest completing Winner’s Image first, or is it okay to study both at the same time?

A:

You could study them both at the same time. It’s the repetition of the information that you’re going to really find beneficial. You can start studying them both at the same time. That is not a problem. With The Science of Getting Rich I think you’d be wise if you read chapter four, fourteen, and seven, every day in that order. I did that myself for years. But you can study them both at the same time. One is The Science of Getting Rich is a general overall program on prosperity really, consciousness, prosperity consciousness, and The Winner’s Image is strictly on self image, how you see you. So, you can benefit from both sides.

Q:

You refer to kids soaking everything into their subconscious mind. I have a 10 month old and work with students as young as two years of age. What specific strategies would you recommend could help optimize their paradigm to be more consciously aware as they grow up?

A:

Well, I always tell people if you’re working with kids what you’ve got to keep in mind is you’re working with the mind. The mind doesn’t know whether you’re two years old, or 22, or 102. The mind is totally wide open with a small child. When you’re talking to them talk to them the same as you would talk to me or anybody else just keep in mind the only thing they’re lacking is experience and vocabulary. So, you use words that they can understand and you don’t think that they’re operating with the same experience you are. So, you can take that into consideration. Children learn everything very fast. Look how fast they learn a language.

And if you’re living in some parts of the world it’s not uncommon where I have people that I work with who have kids that are three and four years old that speak four and five languages. They think nothing of that. Four and five languages is very common for a person to learn to speak at a early age in some parts of the world. Well, if they can learn it in some parts of the world they can learn it in all parts of the world because the mind operates the same way. So, that’s what you want to keep in mind with little kids. And you’re transferring images to them. When you get pictures in your mind it’s images that you’re transferring from your mind to their mind. Whatever you’re thinking that’s what you’re transmitting right into their brain, into their mind. So, think good thoughts. Think thoughts that are going to help them see what you want.

Q:

What is the best thing to say to a skeptic? I feel they are very one minded.

A:

Most skeptics are very one minded that’s why they’re skeptics. Try not to say anything to them. Teach them by example. The best way if somebody says, “That what you are speaks so loud it can’t hear what you’re saying.” It’s how you’re living. Show them the best way that you’re doing it. When they ask you how you did that or how are you accomplishing that then you can tell them.

Q:

Experts suggest that one of the best ways to care for our loved ones is to listen to them attentively when they’re expressing their concerns to us. We do not necessarily need to offer help. At this time I am working on raising my level of consciousness and vibration. How can I do both effectively? Can I listen and help?

A:

Absolutely. See what you want to do, don’t listen to hear listen to understand. When you understand where they’re coming from you can help them. If you’re operating from a higher level of conscious awareness you can help them. If you’re operating from a lower level of conscious awareness you are not able to help them. You’re probably operating from a higher level so you can help them but listen to them carefully and understand where they’re coming from. You don’t judge them and you don’t criticize them. You listen carefully and then you attempt to help them.

Q:

What image should I help my children to plant in their subconscious to improve their grades?

A:

Have them see and get a blank report card from school and sit down and have them write their own report card. Get them to visualize it already finished and hold that image. That’s the report card they want. That’s what they want to receive.

Q:

How did you come across the six mental faculties?

A:

I learned them through a good doctor friend many years ago, Dr. C. Harry Roder. He’s gone now.

Q:

If I listen to affirmations during sleep does the subconscious mind still absorb it?

A:

Yes and no. You, draw two horizontal lines. Draw a line and then about two inches down draw another one. On the left hand side at the top put 11:00 p.m. On the right hand side at the top put 6:00 a.m. Now, you’re going to go to sleep. Take and draw a line, go down through those two lines. Go right down past the bottom line. You went through what’s called a twilight state, when you went past the bottom line you went into a sleep state. Sometime through the night you come up and you almost go to the top line and then you go back into a deep sleep again. Just before you wake up you come back up into a real shallow sleep, back into a deep sleep, and back out of it, and you wake up. It’s while you’re in between the work and the sleep. It’s in what we call a twilight state. That’s where you’re learning. You do not learn when you’re sleeping. There’s no such thing as sleep learning, that’s a misnomer. You learn in a twilight state. So, can you learn while you are asleep? Well, when you’re in that twilight state you do but in the sleep state – no. So, if you put on something and it just kept on playing there would be part of the night you would be learning something.

Q:

How can I create order in my mind. I have just realized that I am full of life and work commitments, to-do lists, incomplete projects. I have over-committed myself. What can I do?

A:

Take the last chapter in As a Man Thinketh. It’s on serenity. And write it out by hand every day for a month. And I know people who have done it for 90 days. He starts out in that chapter by saying, “Calmness of mind is one of the beautiful jewels of wisdom. It’s the result of long and patient effort and self-control.” What you’re going to do is gain control of your mind. If your mind is in a bit of a chaotic state, it’s because you’re letting the outside world control it. You’re the play thing for what’s going on around you. Take control of your mind. Write that out every day. Now, you’re going to start. You’re going to think, “I don’t feel like doing this.” Do it anyway. You will get magnificent results from it.

Q:

Thinking is not taught in school. How can I help my five-year-old to exercise thinking?

A:

Talk to them like you would be talking to me or anybody else. Don’t think of him as a five-year-old. Think of him as a little person with a limited vocabulary and limited experience. Outside of that, the mind is the same for you as it is for the five-year-old. Ask him questions. Get answers.

Q:

How can someone who does not speak English learn a PGI program?

A:

Well, we have it in French. We have it in Spanish, some of them. We have programs in German. We’ve got them in different languages. Not all of them, but some of them.

Q:

How can I raise my motivation towards new goals?

A:

Well, it’s got to be something you really want or you won’t be motivated. That’s why goals, you don’t have to know how to get there, but you have to want it. You don’t set goals for what you need. You set goals for what you want. There’s no inspiration in needs. You set a goal for what you want, and the motivation will be there. But it’s got to be something you really want.

Q:

How can I stay focused and clear for the next steps I need to take and get things done on time?

A:

Take control of your mind. Just focus. Make up your mind you’re going to focus. See, that’s really the key. Take control. I mentioned a minute earlier some people are play things for what’s going on around them. Don’t let that happen. Take control. Before you go to bed at night write down six goal-achieving activities. When you wake up the next day, make up your mind you’re going to work on those six goal-achieving activities. Now, your mind may want to wander and have you do other things. You got to bring it back, focus on those six things.

Q:

Once limiting paradigms have been identified, aside from repetition, how do I impress empowering attitudes and paradigms on my subconscious mind?

A:

Mentally living them. Mentally see yourself there. What you should do is get Stella Adler’s book, The Art of Acting. She’s a great acting teacher. She’s gone now, and she never actually wrote a book. Kissel took all her lessons and turned it into a book. So when you read the book, it’s not like reading a book. It’s like you’re going to her acting classes. And that’s what you have to do. You’ve got to act like the person you want to become.

Q:

Can you please explain why certain people pop into my mind every now and then out of nowhere?

A:

Well, you have cells in your brain, cells of recognition, for everyone you’ve ever met. When you meet a person, you look at them, you listen to them, you may touch them, you’ve created a little network in your brain, and they’re called cells of recognition. If you’re not thinking, and they happen to be thinking of you, their thought waves can activate those cells. That’s telepathic communication. And it’s going on all the time, it’s just that people don’t understand it. See, thought waves are cosmic waves that penetrate all time and space, so it’s got nothing to do with where you are, because you could have somebody in New York and another person in Shanghai.

They’re just as close as your nextdoor neighbor, because you’re dealing in the mind, and there’s no time or space in the mind. So there’s probably all kinds of people that are activating cells in your brain just the same as you in theirs. And that’s part of the reason why things keep popping up in your mind like that.

Q:

Do you have an image of the actual gateway between the conscious and subconscious? It would be awesome to have a visual?

A:

Exactly. I have one, it’s just like the stick person that I show you. I see my head as my mind. Everything from the neck down is me and my body. I actually visualize in my conscious mind, and I see it dropping into the bottom half of my head, and when it goes in there it’s going into every cell of my body. That’s the visual I use. Now, that’s not exactly the way it is. Mind is in every molecule of your being. But you have to have a vision to operate with. That’s the one I use.

Q:

How can I improve my intuition faculty?

A:

Well, it takes time. When you’re talking to people, first of all, what you have to understand is everything vibrates. Nothing rests. Everything’s energy. When you ask a question, the answer comes with a question. It’s your intuitive factor that picks up the answer. When you’re with another person, focus all of your conscious attention on that person. Really focus on them. And most people don’t do that. Most people are thinking of themselves when they’re talking to somebody else. They’re hoping the person likes them. Did they say it right? Did they look okay?

Focus all your conscious attention on them. And pay attention to what you’re picking up from them. And if you feel they’re thinking something, ask them. And if they say, “Yes, why did you ask?” That’s called positive feedback. The more positive feedback you get, the more effective you become with it. I’m very intuitive. But I worked at it for years. And if I was talking to you, all my attention will be on you.

Q:

How can we match another person’s frequency?

A:

Visualizing. That’s what love is called in the same frequency. When two people are in love, they’re both interested in the same ideas from an intellectual perspective or consciously. They’re both emotionally involved with the same idea, and they have a great physical relationship. That’s resonance. That’s when they’re both on the same frequency. I think you get on the other person’s frequency when you’re thinking of them. You’re giving them good thoughts, sending good energy their way. We don’t do enough of that.

Q:

What are some affirmations that you can recommend to help mentally during a pregnancy and delivery?

A:

Well, we’ve got relaxation tape. You have a meditation tape that we can send you if you write in to [email protected]. What you want to do is practice relaxing. Just practice taking control of your body. There’s an app. It’s a apparently good one I am told. Now, I haven’t used it, but hold on. It’s an app called Calm, C-A-L-M. It’s an app you can download.

Q:

Is there a typical age at when a child acquires his or her conscious mind? If so, what age does this occur?

A:

I don’t know the answer to that. I think it’s around three or four, something like that. You can start to tell when they become consciously aware of things. Watch a baby laying down and his hand goes past its eyes, and looking at it and trying to figure out what it is. And all of a sudden they realizes it’s their hand. When you watch the baby become aware, it’s rather interesting. That’s the conscious mind going to work. It’s an awareness being developed. It’s a beautiful thing to watch.

Q:

Once you establish a higher frequency, what are some things that you can do to keep it elevated when surrounded by life’s inevitable issues?

A:

Well, mixing with the right people is very important. It’s very important. Life’s inevitable issues: everybody has them. There are no exceptions. Everybody gets hit with negatives.

You’ve got to understand the conditions or circumstances in your life you can’t change. But you can make up your mind you’re not going to let them control you. You can’t change them. You can change your perception of them, you can look at them from a totally different perspective, but you can say, “I’m not going to let them mold me. I’m going to control myself.”

When you get on the higher frequency, say, “Now, how would be a good way of staying here?” Mix with other people that are on a higher frequency. See, I don’t mix with a lot of people. I’m surrounded by people frequently, like thousands, but I don’t mix with a lot of people. I mix with Mykie. She’s on the phone. I don’t mix with her physically, I’m not in her presence very often, but we talk a lot on the phone. We work together. I mix a lot with Sandy Gallagher; we work together; with Jean Hayden, with all our sales staff, with Arash, and Chris. And these people are all high-frequency people. They do what I do.

You’re going to find, the more you get into this, the higher the frequency you’re operating on, you don’t need a lot of people, because you’re really locked in to the higher side of yourself, and you realize that it’s important to keep your mind on the right things.

So you’re aware of the conditions and circumstances around you, but you’re not going to let them control you. You control yourself. Your environment is very important. Make up your mind you’re not going to let it control you. You’re going to stay in control of it.

The economy can be the same for everyone. The economy can be in the tank, going downhill. But that doesn’t mean your economy has to be. Generally speaking, the Dow may be off. The market may be falling. That doesn’t matter. You don’t have to let yours fall. You control your own economy. You control your frequency. Mix with people that are on the frequency you’re on.

Q:

Can you please give examples of how to reevaluate belief systems? What will help for changing my limiting beliefs and form new, good beliefs?

A:

Sure can. Let’s suppose that … First of all, your belief about what you’re capable of earning is already being manifested. Make no mistake about it. If I ask a person, “Do you believe you can earn more money than you’re earning?” I’ll tell you, 9 times out of 10 they’ll say, “Yes, I believe I can.” Then I’ll say, “Well, why aren’t you earning it?”

You see, intellectually, on the conscious level, a person believes they can earn more money. They know they can. They don’t just believe it, they know it. But on a subconscious level, they don’t believe it, because it’s the subconscious that’s controlling their results, and the results indicate they don’t believe it.

So the trick is, you’ve got to get that belief into your subconscious mind. You really have to image it. You’ve got to see yourself doing it. You’ve got to know that you’re worth it. You’ve got to put the very best of you out there. And understand this: other people don’t make the decision. Spirit makes the decision.

I’ll give you an excellent example. This young guy that works with me, he lives in Manchester, England. In fact, he’s in Manchester, England right now. He started listening to The Secret when he was 13 years old. He’s 25 now. He wanted to come to work with me. Everybody told him he was hallucinating. First of all, he’s 13, “How are you ever going to work with him? He’s not going to hire you.”

Well, he started to listen to me, he started to watch videos and all this stuff, and he kept doing this. He went and he studied the things, he was in school, went to college and he realized what he was studying there wasn’t going to prepare him to work with me, so he quit college and he went and got a job in a TV station. He worked at that for a while. Now, time’s going by. He didn’t have any idea how he was going to work with me. He just knew he was going to work with me.

Well, he started to hear on one of these calls, and I mentioned the guy’s name, and the guy’s name was a guy that works for us in our IT department. He’s not working with us now, but he was in our IT department. So he Googled this guy and he got him on the phone, and he started to talk to him. He found out what the guy was doing, he said, “I could probably help you.” And so he was helping him do things, because he was a pretty smart young guy.

So anyway, he helped this guy that works with us. Well, that got him talking to one of the executives in the company, and one thing led to another, then they were talking to me about him. Well, I wasn’t interested. I didn’t know who he was. And then, this other executive decided they would hire him to come and work for us at a seminar in Los Angeles. This was a few months back.

He had the date written on his card that he was going to come to work for me. The executive phoned and asked him if he could be in Los Angeles to start working with us on a certain day. That was the day he had on his goal card.

Now, he got there and he’s working with them and he told them about it, and they said, “Well, that was really good.” They were smiling. They thought that was great. He said, “Yeah, but this isn’t my goal to work here. My goal is to work with Bob.” This person said to him, “Well, you’re not going to be able to do that. He works in the studio by himself. You wouldn’t be able to do that.”

Do you know what he said? He said, “I knew they didn’t know what they were talking about, because it wasn’t up to them. I was dealing with the law that governs everything.” And when he told me that I felt like kissing him. I thought, “This guy really understands this stuff.

And do you know something? He’s working with me now. He’s in Manchester. He just went back there. But he controls all the cameras in this studio that I’m sitting in, from Manchester. I could go on to tell you all kinds of things.

He reevaluated his belief system. You see, you’ve got to ask yourself, “Are my beliefs in harmony with what I’m doing?” And if they’re not, you’ve got to get them in harmony with what you know you’re doing, and you’ve got to work that way. And if you don’t work that way, it isn’t going to happen. And you’ve really got to understand that. The more you study, the more you’ll change your belief system.

Take a look at some of your beliefs that are ridiculous. You probably believe you’re limited in what you can do. You’re not limited in what you can do at all. It’s a belief that somebody passed along and you inherited, but it’s not true. Well, start to reevaluate them. And the more you study, the more you’ll change your belief systems.

And Scott said, “I knew they didn’t know what they were talking about. They had nothing to do with it.”

Q:

How do you stay focused on one desire with so much happening around you? When and for how long should you focus?

A:

Well, when it becomes a desire it starts to control you. First you give life, action, guidance to the idea, and then it takes on a power of its own and it’ll drive you. It coaxes, nurses and drives you.

See, the desire is the effort of the unexpressed possibility within seeking expression without through your action. A want is in the conscious mind. A desire is a want that you planted in your subconscious mind. It’s in your heart, the heart of hearts. I’m not talking about the physical one pumping in your chest, I’m talking about the heart of hearts.

A desire is an idea that gets fixed in the subconscious mind and starts to take on a life of its own. Then, it starts to control your thinking, it starts to control your vibration. And that’s really what you want. You build desire by true repetition, you keep getting emotionally involved with what you want and pretty soon, it’ll control you. You don’t have to control it anymore.

Q:

Can you learn a certain way of thinking that Wallace D. Wattles often speaks about? Is it deciding what you want and thinking about manifesting it, as in holding your vision of your goal?

A:

That’s a part of it. When he’s talking about a certain way of thinking, he’s talking about thinking in harmony with the laws of the universe. Everything in the universe operates in an orderly manner, from the trees to the birds to the bees, people. We all think any way we want. We can think whatever way we want. The universe operates by law. So if we’re thinking in harmony with the law, things are really going to work out well. And if we start violating law, things are not going to work out well. So that’s what he’s really getting at.

When he talks about it all the way through … Where are we here? Hold on. He says there is a thinking style from which all things are made. Which, in its original state, permeates, penetrates and fills the inner spaces of the cosmos. A thought in this substance produces the thing that is imaged by the thought. A person can form thought, form things in this thought, and by impressing his thought upon form or substance can cause the thing he thinks about to be created. In order to do this a person must pass from a competitive to a creative mind. He must form a clear mental image or picture of the things that he wants and he must do this with faith and purpose. All that can be done each day. Doing each separate thing in a very efficient manner.

You see, when you think of thought and you impress it upon universal substance, what you’re really impressing upon is universal subconscious mind. That’s the feeling part of you. And you can tell whether you’re doing this because it changes your feelings. Feeling is conscious awareness of vibration. As you get emotionally involved in the thought, you set up the feeling. And that’s when that idea starts to move into form. And it moves into form by law, and that law is the perpetual transmutation of energy. It’s stating that energy is always moving into form, through form and back into form.

You look outside on a bright clear day, and you’ll see out of the blue sky a light cloud formation form. And then that cloud formation, if you watch long enough, it will start to get dark and it will start to get very heavy and out of it will come the water. There’s energy moving from non-physical to the physical. But you do that with your thoughts when you’re thinking, so that’s the thinking in certain way that Wattles is talking about.

Wallace Wattles, for everybody’s benefit if they’re not familiar, is the author of “The Science of Getting Rich.” Good.

Q:

I became a part of Bob’s Inner Circle in September 2018. I am thrilled each morning when I awake and feel excited to start a new day toward reaching my goals. For about a week now, I dream about receiving a lot of clients and a lot of money during my sleep. Could this mean that my subconscious mind is doing a great job?

A:

I think so. And I believe that dreams are prophetic too. You’re on the right track.

Q:

How do you determine what is positive and what is negative? And isn’t it possible that something could be negative for one person and positive for another?

A:

That’s exactly right. Nothing’s positive or negative except your thinking makes it so. Everything just is, that’s it. You make it what it is. Nothing is big or small.

What’s big to one person is small to another. It’s neither big nor small, it just is. We make it what it is.

Ralph Waldo Trine wrote a great book, “In Tune with the Infinite.” I have a classic copy here in a little box. “In Tune with the Infinite,” Ralph Waldo Trine. And he points out there nothing is good or bad except our thinking makes it so. It’s a very well written book, “In Tune with the Infinite,” Ralph Waldo Trine.

Q:

When I am training my concentration by focusing on a candle, do I need to do this a bit longer each day? I do not know how long I should be focusing on it, and should I set a timer?

A:

It doesn’t really matter how long you do it, the important thing is that you do it. Not that you do it for such great length of time, but you do it often. And you concentrate on the flame, you’re going to find your mind will wander. When it wanders, bring it right back to the flame. Don’t feel bad that it wandered, because it will wander. Thoughts will come in from outside, you originate them, we don’t know where they come from, and they take you off on a little mental trip. But what you’re training your mind to do is focus on that flame. Or you could take your pen and put a dot on a wall, it doesn’t matter what it is, and then focus on the dot.

What you’re doing is you’re training your will, you’re developing, you’re causing strength in your will. If you lifted weights every day with your arm you would develop strong muscles in your arm. Well, these are mental muscles, and as you concentrate on one thing, what you’re doing is developing the will. And when you develop a strong will, you can concentrate on anything. If you learn to focus on the flame or on the dot, then you can focus on anything.

And the problem with most people is they have weak will. They don’t have the ability to concentrate on anything. The more you concentrate the more energy you give to a thing. Energy flows to and through you. As you concentrate you increase aptitude of vibration. In other words, you give more energy to whatever it is you’re concentrating on and it becomes stronger.

Now think, when John Kennedy, the President of the United States, asked back in the 60s, asked Dr. Wernher von Braun, who was the father of the space program, what it would take to build a rocket that will carry a person to the moon and bring him safely to Earth? He answered him in five words, “The will to do it.” In other words, concentrate on it, it will happen.

Q:

What do we do when we have manifested results that are not great? The present reality is hitting us in the face. How do we remain focused and make the shift quickly away from these results to what we desire with Faith? Can you please provide powerful action steps for this?

A:

What do we do when we manifest results that aren’t great? Not great. Present reality is hitting us in the face. How do we remain focused and make the shift quickly away form those results. Well, the answer is you don’t let the results control your thinking. You get the thinking to change the results. You cannot change conditions or circumstance. You can’t change the results that exist. They exist because you manifested them, okay? But if you want to get different results, don’t let the results control your thinking. You get your thinking to control your results. You see what you want. You act as if you’ve already got it.

Q:

Is our mind different from the brain?

A:

The brain is part of the mind. Mind is movement, body is the manifestation of the movement. The brain is the electronic switching station. The change is the vibration you’re in. As you activate brain cells, you change the vibration you’re in. The brain will not think. You think with the brain. As you activate brain cells or build thoughts in your mind, you build pictures in your mind. The mind does that; it uses the brain. The brain’s an instrument of the mind.

Q:

What do you mean when you say mind is an activity, not a thing? Can you please explain this?

A:

Well it’s an activity. It’s an activity, it’s not a physical thing. The mind manifests into form with what you think, but mind is an activity. The brain is a thing. Your hand is a thing. It’s the physical manifestation of you, but the mind is movement. It’s all I can tell you.

Q:

How do you develop your intuition to know what a person is like without talking to them?

A:

Well first of all, understanding intuition is a mental faculty. It’s a faculty in the conscious mind that enables you to pick up energy and read it, translate it. You’re doing it all the time. You’ve got to consciously learn how to do it and you do that by focusing on the other people, on the other person. Usually when two people together, they’re both focused on themselves, they’re talking about themselves. If I’m with you, I got to give you all of my conscious attention. I got to pay attention to what I’m picking up from you and I’ve got to realize that your thinking is casting off rays of energy. Well if I’m paying attention to you, really tuned in to you, I will feel what you’re thinking. I will feel whether you’re enthused or depressed, I’ll feel it. You might have a smile on your face, but your energy is really lowered. You’ll feel that. Ask the person. Feedback is what you need to develop intuition, to develop confidence in it.

Q:

Does everything go into your subconscious mind unless you consciously reject it? If so, why isn’t everything that goes into your subconscious mind expressed?

A:

It always is. Everything that’s impressed has to expressed. And everything goes into your subconscious mind unless you keep your guard up and don’t accept it.

Q:

How can I strengthen my will?

A:

Well the will is what gives you the ability to concentrate, to focus on one idea. If you take a candle holder, light a candle, put it off as your favorite chair, and stare at the flame. Every time you find your mind wander, bring it right back to the flame. Don’t feel bad when it wanders because it’s going to; just keep bringing it back to the flame. When you can concentrate on one thing, you can concentrate on anything because that’s how you develop the will.

Q:

Is there a difference between wanting, wishing, and desiring a thing or a result? If so, can you please explain the difference?

A:

Sure. Wanting is consciously deciding that you want it. And it’s the first step in goal achieving. You’ve got to want it. The wishing is sort of a fantasy stage that you don’t have any understanding of what you’re doing. Hoping and wishing isn’t going to do anything. Go back to understanding and application. Now desiring is when you’ve taken the want and planted it properly in the universal or the subconscious mind. Desire is the effort of the unexpressed possibility within seeking expression without through your action. So want is the first step, that’s on a conscious level. Desire is when you get properly planted in the subconscious, and the desire then will drive the body or cause things to start happening.

Universal Laws and Principles

Q:

With the understanding that one creates their own reality, why does the environment shape one’s programming if it is his own creation?

A:

Because you let the environment shape your programming. You’re permitting the outside world to control you. Therefore, the environment’s controlling you – you’re not controlling the environment. You can create your own environment. You take two people, working in the same office for the same manager. They both graduated from school with exactly the same marks. One gets tremendous results and the other gets crappy results. They’re in the same environment. What’s the difference? The one has consciously chosen where they’re going to go, what they’re going to do. The other one hasn’t made any choices. Whatever way the wind blows, that’s the way they’re going to go. They’re like a plaything for an outside force. You don’t let the environment control you. You control the environment.

Q:

I was forced by outside circumstances to diminish studying Thinking Into Results. Can I still achieve the success I aim for?

A:

Absolutely, I’ve been forced by outside circumstances to change my study habits many, many times, but that never stopped me from studying. First of all, you’re in control of the circumstance. You don’t let the circumstance control you. Now, I don’t know what the circumstances are, they’re obviously personal, and that’s fine. That’s the way you should keep it but understand the circumstances don’t control you, you control them. Napoleon said, “Circumstance, hell, I make them.” George Bernard Shaw, great playwright, said, “People are always blaming circumstance for where they are.” He explains, “I don’t believe in circumstance. The people who get on in this world are the people who got to look for the circumstance they want. If they can’t find them, they make them.”

Now, I don’t know what the circumstances are, but if you have chosen to let them diminish your TIR, your study time, that’s okay, but still study. Do it at a different time, a different way, but do it. Just don’t stop studying.

Q:

Can you please explain how your teachings apply to the winning of the lottery or casino winnings?

A:

It’s expectation. Most people don’t expect to win. They expect somebody else to win. You want to expect to win.

Q:

Can you please expand upon what you mean by ‘Stay in the vibration of your goal.’ Do you have a special number or word or cue to really understand being in tune with your personal goal?

A:

Well, you’re in tune with your goal when you have that idea and you’re enthused about it. When you’re enthused about your goal, you are in the vibration. You see, the good that you desire is already here. Nothing is created or destroyed. Well, if nothing’s created or destroyed, everything’s already here, if not in one state, certainly in another. What we have to do is get into harmony with the good we desire. We want to get on the frequency of that goal. We do that when we see ourself with it and let that picture infiltrate every cell of our being.

Q:

I need help with the law of abundance. Specifically, anchoring the thought of when I am making payments. I understand I am helping and servicing the law of abundance for everyone involved in the payments received. But, how can I work on the fact that the money will come to me in three fold back of what I’m paying?”

A:

First of all, if you’re making payments and you’re consciously aware of it, I would change your whole strategy. Go to the second chapter in You Were Born Rich where we talked about a debt repayment program. Get involved in, and setup, the automatic debt repayment program and make up your mind that you’re going to follow the instructions. Now, if you’re paying more than you can afford to pay, follow the instructions. You’ve got to cut back on what you’re paying. Now, when you say, “Well, they won’t let me do that,” remember you’re paying them. They have got to go by what you agreed to do. There’s letters in there, a sample of what you send the people that you owe the money to. You take control and you set up an automatic debt repayment program. Then, you don’t think of debt anymore. You see abundance. You see yourself with plenty and you set up a prosperity program for yourself.

Now, this will take some discipline and it takes a little bit of time, but I can tell you for a fact that it works like unadulterated magic. Do exactly what I tell you. I guarantee you’re going to be a happy human being. Abundance is a consciousness. You are born into abundance. You’re God’s highest form of creation. Start to see yourself living that way. It’s how I like living and I’m going to improve upon it and you can too.

Q:

I have never heard you talk about astrology and I am intrigued. Can the planets, their position, and eclipses have an impact on our lives? Is this governed by one of the universal laws?

A:

I have not studied astrology in any depth, but I believe it does have an effect on us. Afterall, a full moon affects water doesn’t it?

Q:

When reading my goal card which one’s more powerful? Emotion or feeling like Napoleon Hill says or expectations as Neville says?

A:

Well, the emotional involvement’s going to bring on the expectation. Expectation is the forerunner for the law of attraction. It’s the emotional involvement that gets you expecting it. When you understand the mind and you get emotionally involved, you’re going to expect it to happen. If you understand the laws, you understand that your subjective mind is totally deductive. It can only accept it, it cannot reject so you plant that in your mind and you get very emotional about it. That’s going to cause you to expect it.

The more you understand the law, it’s called the law of perpetual transmutation of energy. That idea moves into form with and through you. The vibration you’re in dictates what you attract. You can only attract according to the frequency that you’re on.

Q:

Can you explain the difference between Think and Grow Rich and the spirit of opulence? Think and Grow Rich says be fixed about the amount you want and the given service, whereas, Troward suggests a general opulence instead.

A:

Actually I agree with both of them and I don’t think they’re contradictory. Troward says, “When you’re dealing with infinite you can never ask for too much.” I also believe that Troward is very good in developing a consciousness of opulence in all aspects of your life.

Now, Think and Grow Rich he’ll say, “Be specific.” You’re getting into it I think better by being specific and then put a date on it. Work expands to fill the time allotted for it. I think that was Northcote Parkinson’s Law. “Work expands to fill the time allotted for it.” So, you’ve got to be specific and then put a time date on it. You’re guessing at the time though you don’t know.

But, I wouldn’t’ be too concerned about which one’s right. You follow either one of them and you’re going to do very well. Follow them both, I do.

Q:

When you became aware of your thoughts did you spend your days wrestling to get to a good vibration? Fighting off the negative thoughts?

A:

I probably did, yeah. I was so involved, I was so fascinated with this information, I couldn’t stop listening to it. I kept playing records every day, reading a book every day. I mean I saturated my mind with it. I had never heard anybody talk this way. I had never been in the presence of anybody that talked this way. I never read a book, so the Think and Grow Rich was the first book I ever read. I couldn’t stop reading it, and I couldn’t stop listening to Earl Nightingale’s recordings. I reprogrammed myself.

Q:

I struggle with putting multiple vibrations out to the universe good and bad. I have trouble staying in a good vibration for a long period of time and have become very stagnant in primary business. Please help.

A:

Well if you’re stagnant you don’t have a goal. Quit worrying about putting multiple vibrations out to the universe. You’re not going to be worried about putting negative vibrations there, you’re going to be going after that goal. Think of something you really want and say I’m not only going to get it, I’m going to get it now because I’ve got it in my mind. I’ll pay the price and get it. If you don’t have a goal, that’s your problem. Your problem isn’t being stagnant, that’s a symptom. The cause of the problem is no desire. Desire is the effort of the goal within, seeking expression through your action. If you’re stagnant there’s no desire. Desire’s nothing but a want that you impress upon your subconscious mind until it gets warm – hot – red hot.

Q:

Are listening to sad music or conversations about bothersome scenarios with another person things that attract negativity?

A:

Yes, absolutely. Get away from it.

Q:

Please tell me any Biblical examples about the mind and the laws of the universe.

A:

It’s all the way through the Bible. I don’t think they come out and say that this is the law. Jesus was asked something, He says, “…according to your faith, it will be done unto you, not his. Yours.” Why? Well because your faith is the idea that you’re working on that must move into form. But I think Jesus’ teaching was perfect teaching. But He made it very clear. He wasn’t going to do it for you and couldn’t do it for you. You had to do it for yourself. He said “Father that dwells within Him. It is not that I do the work, it’s the Father that dwells within.”

You don’t do it. All you do is choose. Powered is the word.

Q:

I write every day that I am permanent resident of the United States, but I have a voice that keeps telling me it is outside of my control. Do the laws of the universe apply to this type of situation?

A:

It applies to everything. Quit saying it’s outside of your control. It applies to everything. Only see what you want.

Q:

I have three beautiful children ranging from ages four to 14. May I please have some advice on ways to educate children about the workings of the mind, natural laws and the creative process?

A:

Just teach them what you’re learning. Teach them what you’re learning. At four years old the child can talk. How did they learn the language? If they learned English that’s not an easy language to learn. And if you speak bilingual the child will have learned two languages by now. He could have learned three or four or five by now. See the child is wide open, they’re just an open cup. The only thing they lack is the experience and vocabulary. Make sure you communicate to them at their level of understanding. Use words they understand. And you can teach them anything.

Now with the 14 year old you’re going to move a little faster than the four year old but the truth is you can teach them. Let them set goals, get them to make decisions. Don’t treat a child any different than an adult, with this exception, vocabulary and experience. You’re dealing with the mind. The mind, your mind and my mind, same mind. We just individualized expressions of it. Kids will learn faster. They don’t have to overcome the obstacles that you have to overcome now. The four year old should be able to learn at warp speed.

Q:

How do you increase your vibration?

A:

Concentration increases amplitude of vibration. Concentration is an act of will. The will is the mental factor that enables you to focus, and when you’re focused that’s what raises vibration.

Q:

When discussing our right to be rich, how come there is no mention of qualities such as compassion, generosity or skillful means?

A:

Well you know there is all kinds of talk about that as we go through the seminar. We’re not going to put everything on every recording. We talk about that all the time. I think compassion is essential but it doesn’t mean you have to move into their vibration. It means you can see it, where they’re coming from and you work with them accordingly. Empathy is very important, got to get in their head and see it from where they’re looking at it.

Q:

My life is nearly perfect. I attract the people and things I need but the big money has been elusive so far. I do very well but I deserve to be earning five times what I am currently making. How do I attract big money?

A:

Quit thinking that you’re not. You have to see yourself with it. Study the law of compensation. It says the amount of money is going to be in direct relation to the need for what you do, your ability to do it and that’s probably the reason they’re replacing you. So you see as your great need, there’s a tremendous need for what I do, absolutely incredible all over the world. People are very confused, they don’t know themselves. We help them understand themselves better – how to get in harmony with the law. There’s a great need for what I do. See there can be a great need but you’re not very good at selling it. So you’ve got to become really good at selling it. So, say I’m going to master this. Like I am very good at what I am doing. I am very good at it. And therefore, I’m very difficult to replace but you know something I didn’t get good by accident, I study every day. Every day I attempt to get better at it. That’s what you’ve got to do. You start to see yourself being properly rewarded for it.

Q:

In the Art of Living, it says that you can tell a person’s level of understanding by their results. Can you please elaborate on this? Does that mean people earning more than you have a higher understanding?

A:

They do as far as money is concerned. I think they may be consciously unaware of what they’re doing. But they’re operating on a higher frequency. See whatever you’re doing manifests in form. And people getting better results are operating with a greater awareness. Like I said people don’t earn $100,000 a year because they want a $100,000 a year, they’re earning a $100,000 a year because they’re not aware of how to earn a $100,000 a month. Now you may find the person who earns a $100,000 a month has a lot of greater awareness than the person that’s earning $100,000 a year. And what intellectually the person earning a $100,000 a month might not be very bright at all. In fact they might very well be sort of stupid or silly. You see it’s their intellect that’s earning it. It’s their consciousness that’s earning it. Important.

Q:

The You Were Born Rich book has really highlighted the giant gap between my desires and my expectations. How do I really submit new, prosperous, abundant expectations in my life?

A:

Well, the expectation comes by law, or understanding the law. You see, if you understand the law, how the law works, your expectations are going to be in harmony with your desires. You will just know it’s going to happen. Like Andrew Carnegie said. Any idea that is held in the mind that’s emphasized, that’s either feared or revered, so it goes good and bad, will begin at once to close itself in the most convenient and appropriate form available. You hold the image in your mind. That image must move into form if you hold it. You’re holding the image in your mind. You’re turning it over to your emotional mind.

Well, when you turn it over to the emotional mind, that’s turning it over to universal intelligence. Universal intelligence operations by law. The first law is the perpetual transmutation of energy. The idea has to move into form. Now, when you understand that, you’re going to be expecting the desire. The desire is the idea in the subconscious mind, or on a conscious level. As you deposit the want, I think William James put it best, “In the treasury of your subconscious, it turns into a desire.” As you keep feeding it, as you keep getting emotionally involved, it turns into a desire.

That desire must move into form with and through you. That is an absolute law. So, the more you understand the law, the more you’re going to bring your expectations in tune with your desires, but you’re studying. That’s what these programs that we do are all about. It’s understanding. That’s why Solomon said, “In all you’re getting, get understanding.” You want to understand how the law works. You want to understand how goals are reached, and they’re reached through law, by working with the law. So, you’ll bring your expectations more in tune the more you understand how the law operates in your life.

You see, if you haven’t been studying this for years, when you first start studying it, it’s exciting, but it’s also confusing because it seems there’s so much to study. I’ve been studying it like a scientist now for 57 years, but I’ve still walked into it. I’ve been studying since… I was here at 5:30 this morning studying, and I’m teaching now. I’m going to be teaching again in another hour. I mean, I just love studying this because it’s so fascinating, and I expect wonderful things to happen. I still have gaps between my desires and my expectations, the same as you. I probably don’t have them as big as you, or maybe the goals are bigger or something like that, but as I increase my level of understanding, the desire and the expectations are more intent.

Q:

What are some things around me that I can see or feel to show me that I am in a higher frequency of vibration?

A:

Well, feelings, feelings, feelings. We just talked about that. I’ll tell you what’ll happen. I’m looking outside my window here in the studio, and I’m seeing some purple flowers. I’m seeing a beautiful vine on a fence, and they were there before, but I wasn’t paying attention to them. Now I’m paying attention to them. They look pretty good. You change your perception, and you change the frequency. You change your vibration. Start to notice the beauty around you. Do what I was just telling you there, the gratitude.

You see, the higher frequency will cause you to see things differently. As you raise the frequency, what you’re doing is you’re raising your level of consciousness. You’re shifting your perception. Perception is a mental faculty. Perception to the mind is something like sight or hearing is to the body. Your perception is your point of view. Well, what you want to do, as you change your point of view and look for more beauty, look for something more beautiful, you’re raising your frequency. You’re moving on to a very high frequency.

A very good piece of music will move you on to a higher frequency. I have music playing all the time. I play music all day long because music, it does something to you. If there’s a beautiful piece of music… I’ve been playing the same music now, it’s the Together album, but I’ve been playing that now for five, six, seven years, and when I come in, the first thing I do is turn the music on. It’s very quiet, puts me in a good vibration. Now, get with very positive people, they’ll help you raise your level of vibration. The higher the frequency, the better you feel. Feeling is conscious awareness of vibration. Do things that cause you to feel better.

Q:

Can you please explain sexual transmutation? I have read all of Hill’s books, and I’m still not understanding it.

A:

Sure. Your sex drive is your creative drive. It’s the creative urge. They’re urges, and we have urges. Well, you have the creative urge. The creative urge is where your sex control comes from. Now, I remember, maybe I was 28, I thought my sex life went right down the tubes, and I was starting to concern myself. I wasn’t remotely interested in sex. I was so involved in work, I was working night and day, just locked into it, and I thought there was something wrong with me. You see, I was taking all this creative energy and putting it all into work. There was no balance. Well, sexual transmutation, is where you balance it. You move it from one to the other. You want to keep your life properly balanced. That’s really what it is.

If you can see maybe a split in the road, one, you’re talking about sexual intercourse, or sex. The other side, you’re talking about work. They’re both creative adventures. That’s really what they are. Well, some people, all they think about is sex. They’re not very productive in whatever they do. Other people, they may be super productive, but they have a terrible sex life. You’ve got to try and balance it out. That’s what sexual transmutation is all about. Most people don’t understand it because they’ve never really studied it.

Some people have a subnormal gregarious urge. In other words, they become loners. Other people have an abnormal gregarious urge. Come on, let’s have a party. They want all kinds of people around. You have self-preservation urge. Some people have a very low self-preservation urge. They become daredevils. Other people have a very high self-preservation urge. They’re afraid to even go into traffic. Well, they are urges. Well, the creative urge is your sex urge.

Q:

Of the six mental faculties, do you suggest one to strengthen first? For example, how one feels does influence how one views.

A:

Well, I don’t think there’s any one that should be more important than the others. They’re all very important. Your will is a very important one because that gives you the ability to concentrate and that’s what you want to learn to do. You want to concentrate on the point that you’re moving towards, because as you’re moving towards a particular goal, you’ll want to realize that most of the population of the world is going in a different direction. If you’re not really thinking, you could be led to believe that maybe you’re wrong and they’re right because there’s so many of them. But the truth is they’ve never been right, so, you know they’re not going in the right direction. The will gives you the ability to concentrate and that’s very important, and I don’t think one’s any more important than the other.

Q:

How can I convince myself that this new learning is the truth?

A:

By doing it. When you hear the truth, you’ll know it. You say, “What does that mean?” Let’s think of this for a moment. In the room you’re in, there’s music playing. There’s music playing in the room I’m in too. I don’t hear it and you don’t hear it, and that is because we’re not on the frequency that the music is being broadcast on. The broadcasting company is sending out music on a frequency and that is in the room I’m in. There’s movies. There’s all kinds of movies going on in the room I’m in, but I don’t see them either, because my eyes and ears don’t operate on that frequency.

If I turned the radio on, it would pick up the music on the frequency that it’s being broadcast on by the receiver. It would speed it up a few million times onto a much higher frequency and I would hear it because it would broadcast. Then it would be raised to the frequency my ears operate on and I would hear it. When you hear the truth, the truth resonates with the essence of who you are. Your receiver is the essence of who you are. There’s perfection within you. It’s just that all this old stuff is piled on top of that perfection and it’s controlling us. We call it a paradigm. We’ve got to get rid of that.

When you hear the truth, the truth resonates with the essence of who you are, and on a conscious level, it’s called knowing.

Q:

In the Law of Thinking it says we must first gain a disciplined, orderly, constructive state of mind. How do I work on that and how many minutes daily would you suggest?

A:

It’s not the number of minutes daily, it’s something you do off and on all day. You’re just aware of what you’re thinking, and you only think of things you want to think about. So you keep moving in that direction. Write down “harvest the good.” Look for the good in everything. It doesn’t matter what it is. See good in it. That’s your best bet.

Q:

How did you learn to read another person’s energy/vibration? How can you tell if what you are feeling is not a reflection of yourself? Do you have any books or video recommendations on this topic?

A:

No I teach it periodically. It’s something I learned over the years. I just don’t teach it very often. I don’t have anything scheduled. I learned it from a good doctor friend many years ago. Anybody can do it. If I can do it anybody can do it. That’s just a basic of life. You see one person do something you can do it if you make up your mind you want to and you pay the price, and there’s always a price to pay.

Q:

I am working with a marketing coach. She practices law of attraction. How do I manage conversations where she wants to be realistic about goals so that I don’t blame her if I don’t meet them in the time frame?

A:

Well, understand realistic is determined by a paradigm. And the Wright Brother’s were not realistic. Edison was not realistic. Anybody that made any great breakthrough were not being realistic. In other words they crashed right through logic and they went after what they want. Let her know that you’re not going to be realistic, and stunt your growth. You’re going to see yourself as what you want. If she practices the law of attraction then she must understand this. Because you can only attract what you’re in harmony with. And if you’re in harmony with lack and limitation that’s what you’re going to attract. That’s what realistic does. Ed Hillary didn’t get to the top of Mount Everest because he was being realistic. Nobody ever got to the top of Mount Everest before him. He was told he was going to kill himself doing that because many people, all kinds of people, not most of them, but a lot of them went up that mountain and never came down again.

Q:

Is there a difference of tithing 10% of your earnings or buying gifts that I feel would be helpful to uplift someone who is down?

A:

No, I think you’re both on the track there. You’re giving, and giving is a good habit. But you want to make sure you’re not trading. There’s a difference. And I think there is a bit of a difference there. Tithing should be consistent. What we do, the company does, we do as individuals, because it’s a great idea. It’s much the same as a farmer. A farmer brings in the crop and saves part of the crop so he can plant seeds for the next crop. Well, this is like seeding, and that’s the way it works. You’re working with universal laws, what you put out comes back, the more you give the more you receive. It’s worth studying. I think tithing is one of the best ideas to ever come down the road.

Q:

I’m working with a marketing coach. She practices LOA. How do I manage conversation where she wants to be realistic about goals so that I don’t blame her if I don’t meet them in the timeframe?

A:

Well, what is realistic? You see, logic is quite a barrier for the imagination. The Wright brothers weren’t very realistic as far as the rest of the world was concerned, as far as appearance were concerned. They were bicycle mechanics, and they’re going to introduce us to the kingdom of flight. They were considered very ridiculous, not only unrealistic, crazy. Ed Hillary was considered unrealistic. He was a beekeeper. Nobody had ever been to the top of Mount Everest. That’s where he was going. He failed twice, 1951-52. But in ’53 he did it.

Well, if a person’s practicing law of attraction, do they really understand it? Because most people don’t really understand it. Law of attraction’s the secondary law. Primary law’s the law of vibration. Now, the vibration you’re in is controlled by your thinking or by your paradigm. And whatever vibration you’re in, whatever frequency you’re on, that’s going to dictate what you attract into your life. You can only attract into your life what you’re in harmony with.

And if you’re not in harmony with it, it isn’t going to happen. But I would be very cautious if somebody tells me I’ve got to be realistic. I think I’d probably move a little ways away from them. Because I don’t want to be realistic. I want to be unrealistic. I want goals that are crazy.

Q:

Can we use the law to bring about results for animals under our care?

A:

I don’t know. I would like to think you can, but I don’t think so. See, animals operate by instinct. They don’t reason. Now, I think you can … I’ve got a little dog wandering around the studio here, Missy Love. Missy Love has hydrocephalus. In other words, her little tiny brain is mostly water. If I go to pick her up, she’ll bite me. She’s 14 years old. She was only supposed to live for two years. She sleeps under the bed in our bedroom. And I’ll go in and I’ll say, “Come on, Ms. Love. Let’s go to work.

She will come out of the bedroom, stand beside me, and let me pick her up. I bring her out here. When I’m going to go back in the house, I’ll say, “Come on, we’re going in the house now, Ms. Love.” And she’ll come over and let me pick her up. Outside of that, if I try and pick her up, she’ll bite me. Now, I think we’ve helped this dog live for 14 years, and she was only supposed to live for two. She’s a little crazy, but she’s very small, little Pomeranian, and I love her dearly. And I really believe the good care we’ve given her has extended her life. So in that respect, I think you can help them. And you give them lots of love, but I don’t know if that’s true or not.

Q:

Once you establish a higher frequency, what are some things that you can do to keep it elevated when surrounded by life’s inevitable issues?

A:

Well, mixing with the right people is very important. It’s very important. Life’s inevitable issues: everybody has them. There are no exceptions. Everybody gets hit with negatives.

You’ve got to understand the conditions or circumstances in your life you can’t change. But you can make up your mind you’re not going to let them control you. You can’t change them. You can change your perception of them, you can look at them from a totally different perspective, but you can say, “I’m not going to let them mold me. I’m going to control myself.”

When you get on the higher frequency, say, “Now, how would be a good way of staying here?” Mix with other people that are on a higher frequency. See, I don’t mix with a lot of people. I’m surrounded by people frequently, like thousands, but I don’t mix with a lot of people. I mix with Mykie. She’s on the phone. I don’t mix with her physically, I’m not in her presence very often, but we talk a lot on the phone. We work together. I mix a lot with Sandy Gallagher; we work together; with Jean Hayden, with all our sales staff, with Arash, and Chris. And these people are all high-frequency people. They do what I do.

You’re going to find, the more you get into this, the higher the frequency you’re operating on, you don’t need a lot of people, because you’re really locked in to the higher side of yourself, and you realize that it’s important to keep your mind on the right things.

So you’re aware of the conditions and circumstances around you, but you’re not going to let them control you. You control yourself. Your environment is very important. Make up your mind you’re not going to let it control you. You’re going to stay in control of it.

The economy can be the same for everyone. The economy can be in the tank, going downhill. But that doesn’t mean your economy has to be. Generally speaking, the Dow may be off. The market may be falling. That doesn’t matter. You don’t have to let yours fall. You control your own economy. You control your frequency. Mix with people that are on the frequency you’re on.

Q:

In the last Paradigm Shift, you mentioned Joseph Campbell’s quote, ‘A myth is something that always was and never will be.’ Can you please speak more about how this relates to the Law of Polarity?

A:

That’s a good question. Well, a myth is something that you see as real in your mind, but it’ll never happen. So there’s two sides to everything you see in your mind. I’ve got a great quote here by Joseph Campbell. I’ll come back to your question in just a second. You see this little box? It’s a little box that was designed by Frank Lloyd Wright. Watch. I lift the top of it, and what comes out of it? A clock. Isn’t that cool? Watch. And I can take the clock out of it. See? And in here then I have a couple of papers.

Here’s one of them. One is just the authenticity of the box. It was designed by Frank Lloyd Wright, the great architect. And that was … it’s a metal box. It’s heavy. I love it. I saw it in the store one day a few years ago and I really liked it. And I said, “Bob, you should buy that as a gift for yourself.” So I did.

Now, listen, Maria Shriver shared this, but she was quoting Joseph Campbell: “You must be willing to leave the life that you planned in order to find the one that is waiting for you.” Isn’t that beautiful? “You must be willing to leave the life that you planned in order to find the one that is waiting for you.” Maria Shriver said that. She was a member of the Kenndy family, here mother Eunice Kennedy Shriver was a sister of John F., Rober and Ted Kenndy.

Now, how does that relate to the Law of Polarity? Well, first of all, let’s think about it. The Law of Polarity decrees that everything has an opposite, or there’s two sides, there’s two components in everything that makes up anything. There has to be two components. Like, there’s the thought, and then there’s the feeling. That’s polarity: the thoughts and the feelings. It’s two sides. That’s the two things that make up the third.

So a myth is something that never was and always will be. It’s something that we believe exists, but it doesn’t exist. God, I’m going to have to think about that for a while. How does the Law of Polarity relate to it? Well, there’s two sides to it. There would be. There’d be a positive and negative polarity there, and there’s two sides: the side that is and the side that isn’t.

See, the truth is: everything just is. The Law of Polarity, there’s two sides there, but we make the sides. There’s only … everything just is. There’s not positive and negative, it just is. We make it positive and negative. We make the two sides. Let’s all think about that. I’ll keep thinking about it and if I come up with a better answer I’ll give it to you. That’s a damn good question though.

Q:

Sometimes I become aware of low-frequency vibrations in specific areas of my body. For example, shame in the stomach and fear in the chest. I feel as though they are stuck there. What can I do to change this?

A:

Whoa! That is really good! “Sometimes I become of frequency vibrations in specific areas of my body. Shame in my stomach, fear in my chest. I feel as though they’re stuck there. You know, everybody listening can benefit from this. You eliminate them. You love your stomach. When you feel shame in your stomach, you love it, and you just think, “Where would I be without it? I love my stomach. My God, I love it.” Put your hands on it and send it just nothing but love.

And fear in your chest, say, “No, that’s where … my heart is there. That heart of mine is circulating blood through my body every 33 seconds. It circulates the body through hundreds of miles of passageway, carries all the food in and all the garbage out in one sweeping change. I love my heart, and I’m going to eliminate … I’m just releasing all that fear, and I’m replacing it with love; love in the heart.”

“Love in the heart wasn’t put there to stay. Love isn’t love until you give it away.” That’s the lyrics from a song [inaudible] I think wrote.

Q:

What is meant by know that you know?

A:

You got to know that you know. When you know something you want to know that you know. I know this whole universe operates by law and I know that I know it. That’s called awareness.

Q:

When I am training my concentration by focusing on a candle, do I need to do this a bit longer each day? I do not know how long I should be focusing on it, and should I set a timer?

A:

It doesn’t really matter how long you do it, the important thing is that you do it. Not that you do it for such great length of time, but you do it often. And you concentrate on the flame, you’re going to find your mind will wander. When it wanders, bring it right back to the flame. Don’t feel bad that it wandered, because it will wander. Thoughts will come in from outside, you originate them, we don’t know where they come from, and they take you off on a little mental trip. But what you’re training your mind to do is focus on that flame. Or you could take your pen and put a dot on a wall, it doesn’t matter what it is, and then focus on the dot.

What you’re doing is you’re training your will, you’re developing, you’re causing strength in your will. If you lifted weights every day with your arm you would develop strong muscles in your arm. Well, these are mental muscles, and as you concentrate on one thing, what you’re doing is developing the will. And when you develop a strong will, you can concentrate on anything. If you learn to focus on the flame or on the dot, then you can focus on anything.

And the problem with most people is they have weak will. They don’t have the ability to concentrate on anything. The more you concentrate the more energy you give to a thing. Energy flows to and through you. As you concentrate you increase aptitude of vibration. In other words, you give more energy to whatever it is you’re concentrating on and it becomes stronger.

Now think, when John Kennedy, the President of the United States, asked back in the 60s, asked Dr. Wernher von Braun, who was the father of the space program, what it would take to build a rocket that will carry a person to the moon and bring him safely to Earth? He answered him in five words, “The will to do it.” In other words, concentrate on it, it will happen.

Q:

On Saturday my phone app for the Secret stated, “When you need money it is a powerful feeling with you, and so of course through the law of attraction you will continue to attract needing money.” I have lived most of my life this way, needing money. Can you please explain how it looks to not need money?

A:

That’s great. It’s really a good way to live. Don’t think of needing money, love it. But understand you got to get it in its right place. Money is something you use. Don’t let it use you. Money is something that you use, you do not let it use you. You love people and use money. Don’t get that reversed. Most people love money and use people. When I say love it, feel comfortable with it, feel very comfortable with it. Stop thinking that you need it. You want it. Wanting it is a normal thing. Want comes right from the center of our being, that’s our spiritual essence of who we are, spiritual DNA is perfect.

Well, spiritual DNA wants to express itself in a greater way. Start to see yourself. Do you know the strange thing? All the books on money that teach you how to earn money very rarely talk about money. It’s all about consciousness. It’s developing a prosperity consciousness. Get into “The Science of Getting Rich,” I got a copy sitting right here on my desk, “The Science of Getting Rich.” Getting into “Think and Grow Rich.” Get into Catherine Ponder’s book … “Dynamic Laws of Prosperity.” There’s all kinds of books.

Start to see it. Don’t think lack and limitation, think prosperity. See yourself with it. Get yourself a $100 bill and put a bunch of paper in behind it and wrap it with … Look it. There, there’s a $100 bill. I’ve got a paper clip with it. I had something like this and it had all kinds of false paper behind it so I had a wad of money in my pocket and that’s what I did. And your subconscious mind doesn’t know. You just feel all that money in your pocket. When you start impressing that upon your subconscious mind people say, “That’s silly.” Well, it worked for me. Helped me earn millions of dollars and I didn’t have a whole lot of the gray matter working at the time. It works.

Start to see yourself with it. Don’t think you need it. Think you got it. See yourself already in possession of it. Go visit nice places. When you go out for lunch, go to a real good restaurant, leave a good tip. If they’ve got valet parking, use the valet. Don’t park the car yourself. When you go to clothes stores, go to the best clothes stores. Pick out the garments you’d like to wear. You don’t have to buy any of them. If you haven’t got any money, just go shopping there mentally. But go into the place. Get into a prosperous environment mentally.

Q:

How do I choose what to do when there are multiple options coming from my mind and heart? I get confused and I’m unsure which way to go. Please help guide me.

A:

You know. Quit confusing yourself. People frequently come and ask me questions, and this is a big deal for them, and I tell them, “You already know what do. What you’re looking for is approval, but you already know what to do.” When you have multiple options you know the right one. Do it. Make a decision and go ahead and do it. If it’s the wrong decision you can always change it. You know. Quit telling yourself you don’t know, you do know.

See, with every question comes an answer. You talked about big, small, up, down, high, low, good, bad, question, answer. Law of polarity, it’s the law of opposites. The question and the answer come together. Just know. You feel it.

Q:

I would like some advice on how to balance doing my best and the time for raising my energy. How can I identify if I need some rest or if it’s just my paradigm trying to bring me back?

A:

You’d know if you need rest, it’s just … you know it. You don’t need anybody to tell you. You know when you need rest. Then you go and rest, and what you’re doing is preparing your body to be more productive. You’ll raise your energy the more involved you get with your goal, the energy automatically goes up. You’re moving yourself on to a higher frequency.

Q:

What law should I study if I wish to become more popular?

A:

Love, cause, and effect. Emerson said that’s the law of laws. You want to become more popular? Do what a popular person would do; help everybody, be good to everybody, treat everyone as the most important person in the world because that’s who they think they are anyway.

Visualization and Imagination

Q:

Can you please provide a very precise explanation with as much description as possible on the way one should practice visualization? How do you visualize yourself accomplishing goals? Is it similar to looking at yourself on a screen from the outside or from the inside? Do you see, feel, smell, hear the same way we live every day?

A:

There’s different ways of doing this. I have become very proficient at it because of practice. It’s almost like I have an eye in the center of my head and just inside my forehead is a screen. I’ve never talked about this before, but this is exactly the way it works. It’s like I have an inner eye in the center of my head and I have a screen on the inside of my forehead. I see things happening on that screen that I want to happen. I see myself the way I want to be. I see the things coming that I want to have. I have the color, I could smell it, taste it, touch it. All my senses are affected. You see what I’m doing is using my imagination. It knows no limits. Hill said, “It’s the most marvelous, miraculous, inconceivably powerful force the world has ever known.” I can actually smell it. I can taste it. I can touch it and I get all this going in my mind.

Now, I may sit on a chair and just close my eyes and I let myself sink into a very deep relaxed state. Then, I flip the camera on and I see on that screen, it’s the inside of my forehead is the screen. I see it all happening and it’s very real in my mind. See, everything’s created twice, it’s created in your mind once and then, outside the second time. That’s why when Van Gogh was asked how he did such beautiful work? He said, “I dream my painting and then, I paint my dream.”

Q:

I carry four specific goal cards in my pocket, the some of which is pretty much my vision statement – the life I want to live. Am I trying to focus on too much at one time? Is it better to be focusing and visualizing just one thing at a timeeven though they are really all part of the same big picture?

A:

I want you to imagine that you’re a captain on a ship and you’re leaving the harbor in New York. You want to get to Amsterdam, to Frankfurt, to Yokohama, to Kuala Lumpur. Now, how are you going to go to all those places at the same time? I would probably start for Amsterdam, then maybe Frankfurt, then maybe Yokohama and then, Kuala Lumpur. Now that would be sailing around the globe. You can go to all of those places, but you’re only going to one at a time. If you’re leaving New York, your focus is on Amsterdam. You don’t even give any thought to Yokohama, to Frankfurt or Kuala Lumpur. Your focus is Amsterdam. You can only sail to one port at a time. You can only hold one idea on the screen of your mind at one time. If you hold more than one, you will get a garbled message running around your head and that’s the kind of message you’re going to see manifest in your life.

Q:

Two equally talented salespeople in the same company, same business, same number of daily customer calls, etc. One practices visualization, affirmations, the other does not. What will happen?

A:

It’s hard to say. One person could be an unconscious competent that doesn’t do any of those things and yet, they still win. The other person that practices the visualization is going to win. You could find a person winning that doesn’t do any of these things. There are all kinds of people that are winning, and they don’t know why. I was one of them. I was earning over a million dollars a year, and I had no idea what the hell I was doing that caused me to be so successful because I went from being just an abject failure, to starting to win, and I didn’t know what I had done. It took me nine years to figure it out. At first, I was just enjoying the win. I was having a heck of a good time. One day I asked myself how did this happen, and I couldn’t answer it. I knew I wasn’t lucky, I didn’t believe in luck! So, I thought somebody must know why I’m winning and so I started to study. That’s how these seminars came about.

It took me nine and a half years and I figured it out and all I wanted to do was teach it. You could have a person that doesn’t do any of those things and still winning. Now, they would be unusual, but that could happen. Odds are, the person that doesn’t do any of the visualization, doesn’t do any of those things is going to get poor results.

Q:

I have my dream home chosen and work on the details every day. I understand that using my five senses is huge in helping this to manifest. However, I cannot physically go there at this time. Any suggestions?

A:

The idea hasn’t manifested yet, you should act as if you’ve already got it though. Understand, if you just write it out, and you’re not working, you’re not paying the price, it isn’t going happen. Some people think they do some of these things, and they don’t have to go to work. Just write it out, visualize it, and it will move into form. A person will not come along in a white coat and take you places where things like that happen. You have to put the effort in. You have to put the work in. You have to do the work. See the idea that you write out – use all the senses, get the senses involved, that helps you. You’ve got to take that idea and plant it in your subconscious mind. That planting of that idea in the subconscious mind is going to cause you to start doing things you’re not now doing. You have to get out and act. You have to hustle.

Q:

I’m taking my board exam. I decided to have four months to prepare, which limits the pressure. Sometimes I think two months is enough, but it would be more pressure. How should I think?

A:

If you can do it in two why would you take four months? First of all, you do your work and before you take the exam, understand they’re not going to ask you questions that you don’t have the answers to. So, put yourself in a very relaxed state when you go to write the exam and repeat to yourself “I want to give thanks for all the answers that I need as I need them. I know they will come to me.” Then you start to read the questions.

If you read a question, and the answer doesn’t come, go to the next question. Read that one. If the answer doesn’t come go to the next question. When you’re working on the third one the answer might come to the first one. Stop what you’re doing, go right back to the first one and write it out. Otherwise, you may lose it. Understand you’ve got the answers locked up within you. If you’re uptight you’ll block the flow of the information.

You’ve got to be in a relaxed state. Become very, very relaxed and know that you’ve got the answers to any question they’re going to ask you.
They wouldn’t ask you questions they haven’t given you the answer to prior to that, but the trick is to be relaxed. If you’re going to take four months, and you know you can do it in two, I think what you’re doing is you’re selling yourself a bill of goods. Quit doing that, relax, do the two months, go and write your exam and pass it.

Q:

The future must become the present in the imagination of the one who would wisely and consciously create circumstances.” How can I create circumstances in that manner?

A:

Well by visualizing what it is you want in the present tense. You’re going to put yourself into the vibration you have to be in because the actions that you’re going to cause and to create the circumstances that you want to create. See it’s all in your mind. You have to see it in the present tense. If you’ve got an idea in your conscious mind, it’s not something you’re going to get in the future, it’s something you’ve got now, so you’ve got to see it in the present tense. The future must become the present in the imagination. See the good that you desire now. As you get emotionally involved you’ve got the idea now. The only thing you haven’t got is on a physical level, it must move into form. If you’re intellectually and emotionally involved it’s only a period of time until it moves into form. That’s how you create circumstances. Everybody creates circumstances by virtue of the vibration they’re in and what they’re doing.

Q:

Previously when visualizing, I have been envisioning my goals. These essentially were my visions. Now that I’m learning about creating a larger vision separate from my goals, I’m wondering what I should be visualizing every day. Should I be visualizing the individual goals I want to achieve as part of my vision, or the vision itself?

A:

No, the goal, the goal. Listen, you start off with a purpose. The purpose is why you get out of bed in the morning. The purpose is why you’re living. This is what I am doing with my life, that’s your purpose. Your vision, if you could visualize a funnel coming from your forehead and going out. And as it goes out, it gets wider and wider and wider, that it’s like a big V coming out of your forehead. A vision, and it gets broader and there’s many pictures. All kinds of beautiful things in that vision, all the things you’d like to have, do, or be. That great big vision.

Now the goal is to take a bite out of the start of the vision. The goal is one thing you focus on. That’s where your focusv – on the thing you’re going to make happen right now. And when you accomplish it, then you pick another one off your vision, and you go after it. But you focus on the thing that you’re going after right now.

Q:

How can I enrich the feeling of abundance to help me reach my goal?

A:

I would suggest you get started on a book called The Art of Acting, and start to act like the person you want to become, it’s a great book on acting written by a method actor teacher. And you start to become that person. Act like you’re the person you want to become. William James gives that advice – he was in Harvard way back in 1900. That’s how you do it.

Q:

My girlfriend is taking an exam in a few months. She is dyslexic. The test is multiple choice and that is a problem area for her. Any suggestions?

A:

Well quit telling her it’s a problem area and she has done something like this before and been successful. She wants to ask herself what was I doing and then start doing it here. Approach it with the right idea in mind.

Q:

I know what I want, and I can visualize myself in possession of this, but I often stop due to lack of money. What do you recommend so I can stop this from happening?

A:

Well, I’d say just start to study how to earn more money. We’re doing seminars all the time, and in all of them we teach that if you really want to earn money, you get involved in multiple sources of income. There’s a million ways to earn a million dollars. I mean, there’s no end to it. Now, that’s not multiple jobs. It’s multiple sources of income. I would suggest you start to shift your perception of money and what you’re capable of earning. Start to play with large numbers. I really mean play with it. Sit down and say, “I’m going to double my income.”

I have a little calculator in front of me. I play with it all the time. I take a big number, and I reduce it to a little number. I reduce everything to the ridiculous, and by doing this, you make it easier to grasp bigger numbers. So, spend maybe 15 minutes a couple of times a day, but do it at the same time every day, and sit, and only think of how you can double your income, or how you can turn your annual income into a monthly income. Do one or the other, because you’re quite capable of doing that.

You see your income as being limited. You want to start to see it as unlimited. You limit it. You’re the only person that can limit your income. You’re the only person who can change it, too. So, I would take 15 minutes, maybe 20 minutes every day, and sit down, and just start playing with it. How can I multiply my income? How can I earn twice as much, or how could I turn my annual income into a monthly income? If you keep doing that, the answers are going to start to come to you. But it’s like chipping away at something. It takes a while, but you start loosening up your mind. It’s like taking putty that’s rather hard and playing with it, and you soften it up. That’s really what you’re doing with your thinking.

Q:

My discovery process seems to suggest that I have more than one life purpose. Is this possible?

A:

I don’t think so. You might have more than one thing you want, but I think your purpose is why you’re here. I think you’re hardwired to do something. You could have two, I don’t know. You can only focus on one thing at a time. If there are two purposes, you want to make very sure they’re compatible. I haven’t met anybody that had two purposes in life. They may do two different things to feed their purpose. You have your purpose as the reason you get out of bed. It’s your reason for living. It’s why you’re doing what you’re doing.

Then you build a vision, and the vision, if you could see it like a funnel coming from the forehead and going out, and it keeps getting wider, it’s like a beam of light that widens as it goes out, and that vision then would be a multiplicity of things that you want to do that are all on purpose. Your goal then is to take a bite out of that vision. Get the first part to get it moving. So, I think probably if you’re thinking you have two purposes, you probably have two different ways of fulfilling the purpose.

Q:

What is the best way to get mental clarity? I feel I am in a fog.

A:

Relax, totally relax. Visualize your whole being relaxed. You’re in a fog because there’s confusion in your mind. Totally relaxed and then ask yourself, “What am I going to do with my day? What am I going to do with my day?” And just start writing down the first few things that come to you and then start doing them. As long as your mind is in a confused state there’s not going to be any intelligent behavior. When you totally relax and say, “What am I going to do with my day?” And start doing it.

Q:

When you build a picture in your mind how can you take action toward that plan? I am not sure how I will get there.

A:

Well you build a picture and you don’t have a plan so you can’t make action to take action on the plan if you don’t have one. When you first build a picture you get that picture really clear and then start to pay attention to your feelings about you should do this or you should do that. Write the things down that come to your mind. Your intuition will tell you how to get there. That’s how everything has been done where people make great breakthroughs. So, you build a picture and take time everyday to sit and dwell on that picture and you’ll start to get feelings of what things you should do and do them. And you’ll start to find that the way will be shown a step at a time.

Q:

I have been studying every morning, meditating, and visualizing. My goal includes increasing my income and developing more revenue streams. Are there any other practices I can do?

A:

No. I think you’re on the right track. Most people when they get into this if it’s relatively new they’re fairly impatient. They want to do it overnight. It doesn’t happen overnight. See, the first thing you’re doing is you’re changing your perception of your life and how you’re living it. You’re changing your perception of how you spend your days and how you earn your money. And that doesn’t change overnight, but you keep working at it, and it does change. And pretty soon the new way is very commonplace. That’s just the way you’re going to live. Now, that’s based on my own experience.

Q:

At times my vision does not seem powerful enough to keep me moving forward. How do I form absolute belief in my vision to push through my tear barriers?

A:

Well, it’s got to be visual. It’s got to be something you really want. And then it’s got to be something you focus on. You may take, I don’t know, a few minutes four or five times a day to sit and let yourself be an actor, get emotionally involved. See yourself already in possession of the good that you desire. You’ve got it in your mind. And I think you’re going to find that that’s going to keep you going in the right direction. And terror barriers are illusions. Just go right through them. Say, “Get the hell out of the road,” and keep on going.

Q:

Can you please give some examples of images to hold in our mind regarding bank accounts and credit cards? I can easily see the lifestyle I would live with improved income, but not my bank account.

A:

Look here. Now, that’s a gift I got. That’s a gold paperclip. It’s a money clip. But you see that? It’s money. It’s a $100 bill. I don’t know how many there are, 10, 15 of them.

Do you know what I did when I first started? I got one $100 bill, and I put monopoly money inside it, or just paper money. And you just feel it. You feel a thick wad of money. Your mind can’t tell the difference. If you tell yourself, “That’s all $100 bills.” That’s what your mind will start to accept. So you can do physical things to trick yourself. And it works.

Visualize yourself with it. Take a bank account and doctor it up. I remember one time Sandy Gallagher had checks written to herself, she had a couple of them. They were pretty big ones, too. We were coming back from the Bahamas. We came from the Bahamas to Toronto. Well, any plane coming in from the islands, from the Caribbean, the Mounties are on top of it.

They took our bags apart like you would not believe. They took them apart, they took her wallet apart, and they came across this check. Now, if you’re carrying more than $10,000 in cash or in a check even, you’ve got to report it. You’ve got to mark on your slip when you’re entering the country that you have it. Well, she didn’t put that down. They wanted to know, “What is this?” “Well,” she says, “it’s a make-believe check I’ve made out to myself.” Man, she had to really convince them of it. I’ll never forget that.

I saw her cash that check, too. I did see her get to a point where she cashed that check, and she cashed it. But at any rate, that’s what she was doing. She had a check made out to herself and she carried it around.

Listen: Jim Carrey said he was on the Ellen Show, a couple of times. But at any rate, Ellen’s manager was Jim Carrey’s manager. And I asked him about it and he said, “No, that’s true.” Jim Carrey’s manager said that Jim came to him when he first started to manage him, and he took out this old wallet out of his pocket, and he took a check out of it … I forgot whether he said it was $10 million or $20 million. He said, “I want you to get me a job where they’re going to pay me this much.” And the manager said, “Yeah? Well, good luck, fella.”

Do you know something? He got him a job that paid him that much. I think it was $20 million. That’s right. Jim Carrey was carrying that check when he was a nobody. He lived outside of Toronto here. He was just a stand-up comic from a little place, I think called Burlington, just about 50 miles from Toronto. Carried it around in his pocket because he believed he’d get it.

That’s what you do. You do different things like that. You read The Magic of Believing by Claude Bristol. Liberace, great star. He’s gone now, God bless him, but very flamboyant guy. He was reading that book, that made him the star. Wayne Newton was developed by Liberace. Wayne Newton was just a fat little kid that played a piano, played a guitar. Liberace molded him. Now, he’s Mr. Vegas. Phyllis Diller was an ordinary housewife, became an international star as a comedian from reading The Magic of Believing. Get the book The Magic of Believing by Claude Bristol. Read it. Memorize it. It’s a powerful book. That’s what you’ve got to do.

Q:

What are the differences between visioneering, your self-image statement and all the other descriptive writing exercises suggested in “Thinking Into Results,” as well as some of your other programs? I feel that they are similar but different. Can you please clarify?

A:

Well, the similarity is that you’re making it in present tense and you’re seeing things the way you want them to be. You bring them into present tense, you don’t make it in the future. The visualization, we use that on the goal and that’s to plant the idea properly in your subconscious mind. You visualize, you get yourself emotionally involved with it. And when you do that you’re stirring the higher side of your own personality. There’s a part of you that’s a part of the whole universe. Spirit is omnipresent, operates on frequencies, the frequencies are all connected. If you see my fingers as frequencies they’re all connected. There’s no line of demarcation where one stops and the other starts. They’re all tied together.

Do you know what that means? That means everything is connected. It doesn’t appear that way to our eyes but if we start to think and study we’ll find that everything is connected. Everything is an expression of the same thing.

You and I are different in that we can cause things to change. We’re creative beings. I think I’ve said this many times on calls. We’re the only creature on the planet, so far as we know, that’s totally disoriented in our environment. All the other little creatures in the environment are completely at home in their environment, they blend in. We’re totally disoriented. We don’t blend in and that is because we’ve been given the mental, creative faculties to create our own environment. The others blend in to their environment. We create our own environment.

Now, I don’t know about you, but I like a nice environment. I’m working in a beautiful studio. At the click of a button, boom. Hear the music? I have it playing all the time, even when I’m not here. Now, I just turn it off when I’m broadcasting, but I have a beautiful studio and I have nice calming music playing all the time. I had somebody decorate this that really understood decoration, a woman who understood color. So it’s very pleasant. This is a beautiful place for me to work so I can be creative. But I visualized it before I ever saw it. I had it in my mind before it was ever built. That’s what the vision is. You’re seeing what you want.

Q:

How can I improve my imagination faculty? It is getting better but can you please suggest ways to improve further?

A:

Start building pictures of something that you’ve never had in your mind. Just fool around with your mind. I can sit in this room and I can rearrange all the furniture in the room, I can paint the room different colors. I could have cameras all over the place. I can rearrange it. I can make this room look totally different. That’s a way of working with your imagination.

Do anything. Start building pictures in your mind of something. You exercise your imagination that way. The imagination, Hill said in this book … I think it was in this book. He said, “The imagination is the most marvelous, miraculous, inconceivably powerful force the world’s ever known.” He’s right.

Children have a wonderful imagination. It’s just beautiful watching them. My goodness. I’ve often thought if you get around a three-year-old, or even less than three, if you could put a probe into their mind and see everything that’s going on in there. Man, you’d see some of the best movies you’ve ever been to. But unfortunately we get a little older. Get ourselves boxed in. Loosen up.

Q:

One day I will have a vision and I can do and see things totally different than the way I have been doing. The next day, I lose this new way of thinking and vision. How can I keep this going and why does this happen?

A:

It’s a matter of disciplining yourself to do it on a regular basis. You might set your phone to ping every couple of hours, and when it pings, then you sit down, you build a vision in your mind. And just discipline yourself to do it. Pretty soon you’ll get good at it. Quit talking about how you’ve done it wrong, just see yourself doing it right.

Q:

What is your recommendation for a morning routine using the curriculum we have in BPC? Currently, I am using your meditation, writing my vision, and then watching the winners image video.

A:

That’s fine. Make sure you’re doing it, though. No amount of reading or memorizing is going to make you successful; It’s the understanding and application of the wise thoughts that make the difference.

Q:

How can I find the balance between visualizing my goal and being extremely productive without stressing myself?

A:

Well I think you’re stressing yourself when you’re trying to do something you don’t believe you can do. Change your belief system. Understand you’re quite capable. You’re God’s highest form of creation.

Q:

The following are my thoughts, am I on the right track? Imagination- I am to create my own world where I make the decision of what I want to be, which is serenity. Intuition- my oneness with God means I do the things he wants.

A:

Well doing what you want is not serenity. Serenity comes as a result of studying. James Allen said, “Calmness of mind was one of the beautiful jewels of wisdom. It’s a result of long and pace and effort in self-control. Its presence is an indication of ripened experience and of a more than ordinary knowledge of the laws and operations of thought.” Now that’s the very first paragraph in the chapter on serenity in As a Man Thinketh. Your imagination will give you the picture of yourself already in possession of your goal, that’s what your imagination’s for. That’s where you’re going to make your decision on what you want to be. Now it’s in a calm state or in a state serenity that you’re going to track what you want because you’re open and receptive. Your intuition, my oneness with God, means I do things God’s way. Well, your objective is to become one with God, that’s what you’re working towards, that’s the ultimate of all thinking people. You want to become one with God. Intuition as well, the higher faculties that help us move in that direction.